libreoffice-help-en-gb 1:3.5.2-2ubuntu1 / usr / share / libreoffice / help / en-GB / scalc.ht

13 .uno%3AClosePreview 39 To exit the page preview, click the Close Preview button.
13 .uno%3APrintPreview 3d Displays a preview of the printed page or closes the preview.
15 SC_HID_SC_NAVIPI_DATA 4c Specifies the current data range denoted by the position of the cell cursor.
14 SC_HID_SC_NAVIPI_DOC 29 Displays the names of all open documents.
14 SC_HID_SC_NAVIPI_COL 6b Enter the column letter. Press Enter to reposition the cell cursor to the specified column in the same row.
10 .uno%3ANavigator 28 Activates and deactivates the Navigator.
17 SC_HID_SC_DROPMODE_LINK 53 Creates a link when you drag-and-drop an object from the Navigator into a document.
13 SC_HID_SC_NAVIPI_UP 72 Moves to the cell at the beginning of the current data range, which you can highlight using the Data Range button.
15 SC_HID_SC_NAVIPI_DOWN 6c Moves to the cell at the end of the current data range, which you can highlight using the Data Range button.
18 SC_HID_SC_NAVIPI_ENTRIES 26 Displays all objects in your document.
15 SC_HID_SC_NAVIPI_SCEN 4d Displays all available scenarios. Double-click a name to apply that scenario.
15 SC_HID_SC_NAVIPI_ZOOM 25 Allows you to hide/show the contents.
14 SC_HID_SC_NAVIPI_ROW 66 Enter a row number. Press Enter to reposition the cell cursor to the specified row in the same column.
15 SC_HID_SC_NAVIPI_ROOT 60 Toggles the content view. Only the selected Navigator element and its subelements are displayed.
15 SC_HID_SC_NAVIPI_DROP 100 Opens a sub-menu for selecting the drag mode. You decide which action is performed when dragging-and-dropping an object from the Navigator into a document. Depending on the mode you select, the icon indicates whether a hyperlink, link or a copy is created.
17 SC_HID_SC_DROPMODE_COPY 55 Generates a copy when you drag-and-drop an object from the Navigator into a document.
19 SC_HID_SC_SCENARIO_DELETE 1e Deletes the selected scenario.
16 SC_HID_SC_DROPMODE_URL 58 Inserts a hyperlink when you drag-and-drop an object from the Navigator into a document.
17 SC_HID_SC_SCENARIO_EDIT 54 Opens the Edit scenario dialogue box, in which you can edit the scenario properties.
1a .uno%3AEditHeaderAndFooter 34 Allows you to define and format headers and footers.
11 SC_HID_SC_HF_PAGE 93 Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by page numbering. This allows continuous page numbering in a document.
10 SC_HID_SC_HF_FLL 48 Enter the text to be displayed at the left side of the header or footer.
10 SC_HID_SC_HF_HRR 49 Enter the text to be displayed at the right side of the header or footer.
11 SC_HID_SC_HF_FILE 35 Inserts a file name placeholder in the selected area.
11 SC_HID_SC_HF_TEXT 3f Opens a dialogue box to assign formats to new or selected text.
11 SC_HID_SC_HF_DATE a9 Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the current date which will be repeated in the header/footer on each page of the document.
10 SC_HID_SC_HF_HRC 45 Enter the text to be displayed at the centre of the header or footer.
12 SC_HID_SC_HF_TABLE 8a Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the sheet name in the header/footer of the actual document.
17 SC_HID_SC_HF_HR_DEFINED 33 Select a predefined header or footer from the list.
10 SC_HID_SC_HF_HLC 45 Enter the text to be displayed at the centre of the header or footer.
10 SC_HID_SC_HF_HLL 48 Enter the text to be displayed at the left side of the header or footer.
15 SC_HID_SCPAGE_HFED_HL 37 Defines or formats a header or footer for a Page Style.
10 SC_HID_SC_HF_HLR 49 Enter the text to be displayed at the right side of the header or footer.
10 SC_HID_SC_HF_FRL 48 Enter the text to be displayed at the left side of the header or footer.
15 SC_HID_SCPAGE_HFED_HR 37 Defines or formats a header or footer for a Page Style.
10 SC_HID_SC_HF_FRC 45 Enter the text to be displayed at the centre of the header or footer.
10 SC_HID_SC_HF_HRL 48 Enter the text to be displayed at the left side of the header or footer.
12 SC_HID_SC_HF_PAGES 79 Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the total number of pages in the document.
10 SC_HID_SC_HF_FRR 49 Enter the text to be displayed at the right side of the header or footer.
15 SC_HID_SCPAGE_HFED_FR 37 Defines or formats a header or footer for a Page Style.
10 SC_HID_SC_HF_FLR 49 Enter the text to be displayed at the right side of the header or footer.
10 SC_HID_SC_HF_FLC 45 Enter the text to be displayed at the centre of the header or footer.
11 SC_HID_SC_HF_TIME 92 Inserts a placeholder in the selected header/footer area, which is replaced by the current time in the header/footer on each page of the document.
15 SC_HID_SCPAGE_HFED_FL 37 Defines or formats a header or footer for a Page Style.
11 .uno%3ADataSelect 48 A list box containing all text found in the current column is displayed.
14 .uno%3AFillCellsMenu 27 Automatically fills cells with content.
f .uno%3AFillDown 5b Fills a selected range of at least two rows with the contents of the top cell of the range.
10 .uno%3AFillRight 56 Fills a selected range of at least two columns with the contents of the leftmost cell.
d .uno%3AFillUp 55 Fills a selected range of at least two rows with the contents of the bottommost cell.
f .uno%3AFillLeft 57 Fills a selected range of at least two columns with the contents of the far right cell.
10 .uno%3AFillTable 4b Specifies the options for transferring sheets or ranges of a certain sheet.
33 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_FILLSERIES%3ABTN_MONTH 68 Use the Date series type and this option to form a series from the names or abbreviations of the months.
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_FILLSERIES%3ABTN_DATE 3f Creates a date series using the defined increment and end date.
30 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_FILLSERIES%3AED_END_VALUES 28 Determines the end value for the series.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_FILLSERIES%3ABTN_DAY 4d Use the Date series type and this option to create a series using seven days.
33 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_FILLSERIES%3ABTN_RIGHT 78 Creates a series running from left to right within the selected cell range using the defined increment to the end value.
39 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_FILLSERIES%3ABTN_DAY_OF_WEEK 4d Use the Date series type and this option to create a series of five day sets.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_FILLSERIES%3ABTN_TOP 66 Creates an upward series in the cell range of the column using the defined increment to the end value.
37 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_FILLSERIES%3ABTN_GEOMETRIC 42 Creates a growth series using the defined increment and end value.
2f sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_FILLSERIES%3AED_INCREMENT 55 Determines the value by which the series of the selected type is increased each step.
34 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_FILLSERIES%3ABTN_BOTTOM 71 Creates a downward series in the selected cell range for the column using the defined increment to the end value.
36 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_FILLSERIES%3ABTN_AUTOFILL 25 Forms a series directly in the sheet.
11 .uno%3AFillSeries 7f Automatically generate series with the options in this dialogue box. Determine direction, increment, time unit and series type.
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_FILLSERIES%3ABTN_LEFT 74 Creates a series running from right to left in the selected cell range using the defined increment to the end value.
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_FILLSERIES%3ABTN_YEAR 45 Use the Date series type and this option to create a series of years.
38 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_FILLSERIES%3ABTN_ARITHMETIC 49 Creates a linear number series using the defined increment and end value.
32 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_FILLSERIES%3AED_START_VALUES 2a Determines the start value for the series.
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DELCONT%3ABTN_DELNOTES 45 Deletes comments added to cells. All other elements remain unchanged.
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DELCONT%3ABTN_DELFORMULAS 4b Deletes formulae. Text, numbers, formats, dates and times remain unchanged.
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DELCONT%3ABTN_DELDATETIME 53 Deletes date and time values. Formats, text, numbers and formulae remain unchanged.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DELCONT%3ABTN_DELNUMBERS 3c Deletes numbers only. Formats and formulae remain unchanged.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DELCONT%3ABTN_DELSTRINGS 49 Deletes text only. Formats, formulae, numbers and dates are not affected.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DELCONT%3ABTN_DELOBJECTS 34 Deletes objects. All cell content remains unchanged.
d .uno%3ADelete 58 Specifies the contents to be deleted from the active cell or from a selected cell range.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DELCONT%3ABTN_DELALL 31 Deletes all content from the selected cell range.
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DELCONT%3ABTN_DELATTRS 4f Deletes format attributes applied to cells. All cell content remains unchanged.
11 .uno%3ADeleteRows 49 After selecting at least one cell, deletes the entire row from the sheet.
11 .uno%3ADeleteCell 7d Completely deletes selected cells, columns or rows. The cells below or to the right of the deleted cells will fill the space.
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_DELCELL%3ABTN_DELCOLS 4c After selecting at least one cell, deletes the entire column from the sheet.
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_DELCELL%3ABTN_DELROWS 49 After selecting at least one cell, deletes the entire row from the sheet.
14 .uno%3ADeleteColumns 4c After selecting at least one cell, deletes the entire column from the sheet.
34 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_DELCELL%3ABTN_CELLSLEFT 49 Fills the resulting space by the cells to the right of the deleted cells.
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_DELCELL%3ABTN_CELLSUP 4b Fills the space produced by the deleted cells with the cells underneath it.
d .uno%3ARemove 33 Deletes the current sheet after query confirmation.
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_MOVETAB%3ABTN_COPY 58 Specifies that the sheet is to be copied. If the option is unmarked, the sheet is moved.
2c sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_MOVETAB%3ALB_INSERT 44 The current sheet is moved or copied in front of the selected sheet.
b .uno%3AMove 55 Moves or copies a sheet to a new location in the document or to a different document.
2a sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_MOVETAB%3ALB_DEST 3e Indicates where the current sheet is to be moved or copied to.
13 .uno%3ADelBreakMenu 38 Choose the type of manual break that you want to delete.
15 .uno%3ADeleteRowbreak 33 Removes the manual row break above the active cell.
18 .uno%3ADeleteColumnbreak 3d Removes a manual column break to the left of the active cell.
14 .uno%3AEditSheetMenu 20 Edit commands for entire sheets.
13 SC_HID_SELECTTABLES 139 Lists the sheets in the current document. To select a sheet, press the up or down arrow keys to move to a sheet in the list. To add a sheet to the selection, hold down Ctrl (Mac: Command) while pressing the arrow keys and then press Spacebar. To select a range of sheets, hold down Shift and press the arrow keys.
13 .uno%3ASelectTables 18 Selects multiple sheets.
1b .uno%3AViewRowColumnHeaders 31 Shows column headers and row headers when marked.
1c .uno%3AViewValueHighlighting 3e Displays cell content in different colours, depending on type.
17 .uno%3AInputLineVisible 50 Shows or hides the Formula Bar, which is used for entering and editing formulae.
16 .uno%3ADeleteAllBreaks 2f Deletes all manual breaks in the current sheet.
14 .uno%3APagebreakMode 64 Display the page breaks and print ranges in the sheet. Choose View - Normal to switch this mode off.
16 .uno%3AInsertBreakMenu c2 This command inserts manual row or column breaks to ensure that your data prints properly. You can insert a horizontal page break above, or a vertical page break to the left of, the active cell.
15 .uno%3AInsertRowBreak 44 Inserts a row break (horizontal page break) above the selected cell.
18 .uno%3AInsertColumnBreak 4c Inserts a column break (vertical page break) to the left of the active cell.
35 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCELL%3ABTN_CELLSRIGHT 4e Moves the contents of the selected range to the right when cells are inserted.
34 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCELL%3ABTN_CELLSDOWN 4b Moves the contents of the selected range downwards when cells are inserted.
11 .uno%3AInsertCell 71 Opens the Insert Cells dialogue box, in which you can insert new cells according to the options that you specify.
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCELL%3ABTN_INSCOLS 6f Inserts an entire column. The number of columns to be inserted is determined by the selected number of columns.
17 .uno%3AInsertCellsRight 4e Moves the contents of the selected range to the right when cells are inserted.
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCELL%3ABTN_INSROWS 5b Inserts an entire row. The position of the row is determined by the selection on the sheet.
16 .uno%3AInsertCellsDown 4b Moves the contents of the selected range downwards when cells are inserted.
11 .uno%3AInsertRows 28 Inserts a new row above the active cell.
14 .uno%3AInsertColumns 34 Inserts a new column to the left of the active cell.
35 sc%3ANumericField%3ARID_SCDLG_INSERT_TABLE%3ANF_COUNT 2d Specifies the number of sheets to be created.
d .uno%3AInsert 35 Defines the options to be used to insert a new sheet.
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSERT_TABLE%3ARB_NEW 87 Creates a new sheet. Enter a sheet name in the Name field. Allowed characters are letters, numbers, spaces and the underline character.
36 sc%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSERT_TABLE%3ALB_TABLES ca If you selected a file by using the Browse button, the sheets contained in it are displayed in the list box. The file path is displayed below this box. Select the sheet to be inserted from the list box.
35 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSERT_TABLE%3ARB_BEHIND 35 Inserts a new sheet directly after the current sheet.
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSERT_TABLE%3ACB_LINK 6e Select to insert the sheet as a link instead as a copy. The links can be updated to show the current contents.
2f sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_INSERT_TABLE%3AED_TABNAME 24 Specifies the name of the new sheet.
37 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSERT_TABLE%3ARB_FROMFILE 40 Inserts a sheet from an existing file into the current document.
29 sc%3AModalDialog%3ARID_SCDLG_INSERT_TABLE 35 Defines the options to be used to insert a new sheet.
35 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSERT_TABLE%3ABTN_BROWSE 24 Opens a file selection dialogue box.
35 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSERT_TABLE%3ARB_BEFORE 36 Inserts a new sheet directly before the current sheet.
1a .uno%3AInsertSheetFromFile 32 Inserts a sheet from a different spreadsheet file.
12 SC_HID_INSWIN_CALC 4c Opens the Function Wizard, which helps you to interactively create formulae.
15 .uno%3AFunctionDialog 4c Opens the Function Wizard, which helps you to interactively create formulae.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_DBMAX 7c DMAX returns the maximum content of a cell (field) in a database (all records) that matches the specified search conditions.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_DBMIN 6c DMIN returns the minimum content of a cell (field) in a database that matches the specified search criteria.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_DBVARIANZ 73 DVAR returns the variance of all cells of a database field in all records that match the specified search criteria.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_DBANZAHL2 90 DCOUNTA counts the number of rows (records) in a database that match the specified search conditions and contain numeric or alphanumeric values.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_DBANZAHL 7d DCOUNT counts the number of rows (records) in a database that match the specified search criteria and contain numeric values.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_DBSUMME 77 DSUM returns the total of all cells in a database field in all rows (records) that match the specified search criteria.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_DBSTDABW 93 DSTDEV calculates the standard deviation of a population based on a sample, using the numbers in a database column that match the given conditions.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_DBSTDABWN 7d DSTDEVP calculates the standard deviation of a population based on all cells of a data range which match the search criteria.
18 SC_HID_FUNC_DBMITTELWERT 89 DAVERAGE returns the average of the values of all cells (fields) in all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_DBAUSZUG 6b DGET returns the contents of the referenced cell in a database which matches the specified search criteria.
17 SC_HID_FUNC_DBVARIANZEN 7d DVARP calculates the variance of all cell values in a database field in all records that match the specified search criteria.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_DBPRODUKT 66 DPRODUCT multiplies all cells of a data range for which each cell content matches the search criteria.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_ISPMT 48 Calculates the level of interest for unchanged amortisation instalments.
16 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_EFFECT 89 Calculates the effective annual rate of interest on the basis of the nominal interest rate and the number of interest payments per annum.
18 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_AMORLINC cc Calculates the amount of depreciation for a settlement period as linear amortisation. If the capital asset is purchased during the settlement period, the proportional amount of depreciation is considered.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_EFFEKTIV 41 Returns the net annual interest rate for a nominal interest rate.
e SC_HID_FUNC_BW 61 Returns the present (current) value of an investment resulting from a series of regular payments.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_ACCRINT 4f Calculates the accrued interest of a security in the case of periodic payments.
18 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_ACCRINTM 64 Calculates the accrued interest of a security in the case of one-off payment at the settlement date.
18 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_DURATION 3e Calculates the duration of a fixed interest security in years.
19 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_AMORDEGRC 59 Calculates the amount of depreciation for a settlement period as degressive amortisation.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_GDA2 66 Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the double-declining balance method.
f SC_HID_FUNC_IKV 39 Calculates the internal rate of return for an investment.
f SC_HID_FUNC_GDA 62 Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the arithmetic-declining method.
14 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_DISC 42 Calculates the allowance (discount) of a security as a percentage.
f SC_HID_FUNC_DIA 33 Returns the arithmetic-declining depreciation rate.
18 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_RECEIVED 63 Calculates the amount received that is paid for a fixed-interest security at a given point in time.
d SC_HID_FUNC_N be Returns the numeric value of the given parameter, if the parameter is a number. Returns the number 1 if the parameter is TRUE. Returns the number 0 for other parameters (text, FALSE or #NA).
15 SC_HID_FUNC_ISTFORMEL 29 Returns TRUE if a cell is a formula cell.
16 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_ISEVEN 60 Tests for even numbers. Returns TRUE (1) if the number returns a whole number when divided by 2.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_ISTTEXT 41 Returns TRUE if the cell content is, or refers to, a text string.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_FORMEL 38 Displays the formula of a formula cell as a text string.
15 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_ISODD 50 Returns TRUE (1) if the number does not return a whole number when divided by 2.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_ISTZAHL 3c Returns TRUE if the cell content is, or refers to, a number.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_ISTFEHL 51 Returns TRUE if the value refers to any error value except #N/A, FALSE otherwise.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_ISTBEZUG 25 Tests if the argument is a reference.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_ISTLEER 31 Returns TRUE if the reference to a cell is blank.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_ISTFEHLER 56 Returns TRUE if the value refers to any error value (including #N/A), FALSE otherwise.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_ZELLE 40 Returns information on address, formatting or content of a cell.
e SC_HID_FUNC_NV 1d Returns the error value #N/A.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_AKTUELL 10c This function returns the result to date of evaluating the formula of which it is a part (in other words the result as far as that evaluation has got). Its main use is together with the STYLE() function to apply selected styles to a cell depending on the cell content.
f SC_HID_FUNC_TYP 1a Returns the type of value.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_ISTLOG 2a Tests for a logical value (TRUE or FALSE).
10 SC_HID_FUNC_INFO 10c This function returns the result to date of evaluating the formula of which it is a part (in other words the result as far as that evaluation has got). Its main use is together with the STYLE() function to apply selected styles to a cell depending on the cell content.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_ISTKTEXT 56 Tests if the cell content is text or numbers and returns FALSE if the content is text.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_ISTNV 4b Returns TRUE if a cell contains the #N/A (value not available) error value.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_ODER 2e Returns TRUE if at least one argument is TRUE.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_WENN 29 Specifies a logical test to be performed.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_NICHT 26 Complements (inverts) a logical value.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_FALSCH 20 Returns the logical value FALSE.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_WAHR 21 The logical value is set to TRUE.
f SC_HID_FUNC_UND 27 Returns TRUE if all arguments are TRUE.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_COTHYP 3b Returns the hyperbolic cotangent of a given number (angle).
15 SC_HID_FUNC_SUMMEWENN 2d Adds the cells specified by a given criteria.
f SC_HID_FUNC_RAD 1c Converts degrees to radians.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_ARCSIN 3e Returns the inverse trigonometric sine (arc sine) of a number.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_UMRECHNEN 8e Converts a value from one unit of measurement to another unit of measurement. The conversion factors are given in a list in the configuration.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_AUFRUNDEN 3b Rounds a number up, away from zero, to a certain precision.
17 SC_HID_FUNC_EUROCONVERT 45 Converts between old European national currency and to and from euro.
f SC_HID_FUNC_COT 36 Returns the cotangent of the given angle (in radians).
14 SC_HID_FUNC_ARCOSHYP 32 Returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number.
17 SC_HID_FUNC_ZAEHLENWENN 50 Returns the number of cells that meet with certain criteria within a cell range.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_UNGERADE 6d Rounds a positive number up to the nearest odd integer and a negative number down to the nearest odd integer.
16 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_SQRTPI 2f Returns the square root of (PI times a number).
16 SC_HID_FUNC_OBERGRENZE 3b Rounds a number up to the nearest multiple of Significance.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_ARCOTHYP 3d Returns the inverse hyperbolic cotangent of the given number.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_RUNDEN 3f Returns a number rounded to a certain number of decimal places.
f SC_HID_FUNC_LOG 38 Returns the logarithm of a number to the specified base.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_ARCTAN2 5e Returns the inverse trigonometric tangent (arc tangent) of the specified x- and y-coordinates.
16 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_MROUND 43 Returns a number rounded to the nearest multiple of another number.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_ABRUNDEN 3b Rounds a number down, towards zero, to a certain precision.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_PRODUKT 46 Multiplies all the numbers given as arguments and returns the product.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_GANZZAHL 2c Rounds a number down to the nearest integer.
13 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_LCM 3e The result is the lowest common multiple of a list of numbers.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_SINHYP 28 Returns the hyperbolic sine of a number.
16 SC_HID_FUNC_VORZEICHEN 61 Returns the sign of a number. Returns +1 if the number is positive, -1 if negative and 0 if zero.
1d SC_HID_FUNC_ANZAHLLEEREZELLEN 22 Returns the number of empty cells.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_ARTANHYP 33 Returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number.
f SC_HID_FUNC_TAN 34 Returns the tangent of the given angle (in radians).
17 SC_HID_FUNC_UNTERGRENZE 3d Rounds a number down to the nearest multiple of Significance.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_ARCCOT 50 Returns the inverse trigonometric cotangent (arc cotangent) of the given number.
e SC_HID_FUNC_LN 42 Returns the natural logarithm based on the constant e of a number.
19 SC_HID_FUNC_QUADRATESUMME 8c If you want to calculate the sum of the squares of numbers (totalling up of the squares of the arguments), enter these into the text fields.
19 SC_HID_FUNC_KOMBINATIONEN 56 Returns the number of combinations for a given number of objects (without repetition).
12 SC_HID_FUNC_GERADE 69 Rounds a positive number up to the next even integer and a negative number down to the next even integer.
17 SC_HID_FUNC_ZUFALLSZAHL 30 Returns a random number in the range 0.0 to 1.0.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_ISTGERADE 4b Returns TRUE if the value is an even integer, or FALSE if the value is odd.
17 SC_HID_FUNC_ISTUNGERADE 41 Returns TRUE if the value is odd, or FALSE if the number is even.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_WURZEL 2d Returns the positive square root of a number.
18 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_QUOTIENT 33 Returns the integer result of a division operation.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_TANHYP 2b Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a number.
1b SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_MULTINOMIAL 6c Returns the factorial of the sum of the arguments divided by the product of the factorials of the arguments.
18 SC_HID_FUNC_TEILERGEBNIS 15 Calculates subtotals.
f SC_HID_FUNC_SIN 31 Returns the sine of the given angle (in radians).
12 SC_HID_FUNC_POTENZ 31 Returns the result of a number raised to a power.
1b SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_RANDBETWEEN 36 Returns an integer random number in a specified range.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_FAKULTAET 22 Returns the factorial of a number.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_LOG10 2a Returns the base-10 logarithm of a number.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_COSHYP 2a Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a number.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_REST 3d Returns the remainder after a number is divided by a divisor.
e SC_HID_FUNC_PI 5c Returns 3.14159265358979..., the value of the mathematical constant PI to 14 decimal places.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_KUERZEN 2e Truncates a number by removing decimal places.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_SUMME 29 Adds all the numbers in a range of cells.
13 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_GCD 3f The result is the greatest common divisor of a list of numbers.
19 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_SERIESSUM 27 Sums the first terms of a power series.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_ARCCOS 42 Returns the inverse trigonometric cosine (arc cosine) of a number.
f SC_HID_FUNC_COS 33 Returns the cosine of the given angle (in radians).
f SC_HID_FUNC_ABS 27 Returns the absolute value of a number.
f SC_HID_FUNC_GGT 3c Returns the greatest common divisor of two or more integers.
f SC_HID_FUNC_EXP 2a Returns e raised to the power of a number.
f SC_HID_FUNC_DEG 1e Converts radians into degrees.
f SC_HID_FUNC_KGV 3a Returns the least common multiple of one or more integers.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_ARSINHYP 30 Returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of a number.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_ARCTAN 44 Returns the inverse trigonometric tangent (arc tangent) of a number.
1a SC_HID_FUNC_KOMBINATIONEN2 4e Returns the number of combinations of a subset of items including repetitions.
19 SC_HID_FUNC_SUMMENPRODUKT 5d Multiplies corresponding elements in the given arrays, and returns the sum of those products.
f SC_HID_FUNC_RGP 4c Returns a table of statistics for a straight line that best fits a data set.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_MMULT 2b Calculates the array product of two arrays.
16 SC_HID_FUNC_SUMMEX2PY2 4c Returns the sum of the sum of squares of corresponding values in two arrays.
1a SC_HID_FUNC_EINHEITSMATRIX 33 Returns the unitary square array of a certain size.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_MINV 1a Returns the inverse array.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_TREND 24 Returns values along a linear trend.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_SUMMEXMY2 4c Adds the squares of the variance between corresponding values in two arrays.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_MTRANS 2c Transposes the rows and columns of an array.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_MDET 2a Returns the array determinant of an array.
17 SC_HID_FUNC_HAEUFIGKEIT 3b Indicates the frequency distribution in a one-column-array.
f SC_HID_FUNC_RKP 69 This function calculates the adjustment of the entered data as an exponential regression curve (y=b*m^x).
15 SC_HID_FUNC_VARIATION 3a Calculates the points of an exponential trend in an array.
16 SC_HID_FUNC_SUMMEX2MY2 53 Returns the sum of the difference of squares of corresponding values in two arrays.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_ZEILEN 33 Returns the number of rows in a reference or array.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_INDIREKT 31 Returns the reference specified by a text string.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_ADRESSE 67 Returns a cell address (reference) as a text string, according to the specified row and column numbers.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_TABELLE 4e Returns the sheet number of a reference or a string representing a sheet name.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_INDEX 93 INDEX returns a subrange, specified by row and column number or an optional range name. Depending on context, INDEX returns a reference or content.
18 SC_HID_FUNC_GETPIVOTDATA b5 The GETPIVOTDATA function returns a result value from a pivot table. The value is addressed using field and item names, so it remains valid if the layout of the pivot table changes.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_FEHLERTYP 51 Returns the number corresponding to an error value occurring in a different cell.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_BEREICHE 48 Returns the number of individual ranges that belong to a multiple range.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_VERWEIS 59 Returns the content of a cell either from a one-row or one-column range or from an array.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_SPALTE 2e Returns the column number of a cell reference.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_WVERWEIS 48 Searches for a value and reference to the cells below the selected area.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_HYPERLINK 50 When you click a cell that contains the HYPERLINK function, the hyperlink opens.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_SVERWEIS 3e Vertical search with reference to adjacent cells to the right.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_VORLAGE 33 Applies a style to the cell containing the formula.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_TABELLEN 2f Determines the number of sheets in a reference.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_SPALTEN 35 Returns the number of columns in the given reference.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_ZEILE 2b Returns the row number of a cell reference.
f SC_HID_FUNC_DDE 27 Returns the result of a DDE-based link.
18 SC_HID_FUNC_VERSCHIEBUNG 68 Returns the value of a cell offset by a certain number of rows and columns from a given reference point.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_WAHL 3e Uses an index to return a value from a list of 1 to 30 values.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_VERGLEICH 54 Returns the relative position of an item in an array that matches a specified value.
f SC_HID_FUNC_ASC 68 The ASC function converts full-width to half-width ASCII and katakana characters. Returns a text string.
d SC_HID_FUNC_T 61 This function returns the target text, or a blank text string if the target is not a text string.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_UNICODE 4a Returns the numeric code for the first Unicode character in a text string.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_SAEUBERN 38 All non-printing characters are removed from the string.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_VERKETTEN 2e Combines several text strings into one string.
f SC_HID_FUNC_JIS 68 The JIS function converts half-width to full-width ASCII and katakana characters. Returns a text string.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_UNICHAR 3a Converts a code number into a Unicode character or letter.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_SUCHEN 3c Returns the position of a text segment within a text string.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_FEST 6e Returns a number as a text string with a specified number of decimal places and optional thousands separators.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_BAHTTEXT 5d Converts a positive integer to a specified base into a text string from the numbering system.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_GROSS2 3b Capitalises the first letter in all words of a text string.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_LAENGE 35 Returns the length of a text string including spaces.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_GLAETTEN 52 Removes spaces from a string, leaving only a single space character between words.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_ERSETZEN 3c Replaces part of a text string with a different text string.
e SC_HID_FUNC_DM 5c Converts a number to an amount in the currency format, rounded to a specified decimal place.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_LINKS 3b Returns the first character or characters of a text string.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_ROEMISCH 80 Converts a number into a Roman numeral. The value must be in the range 0 to 3999, the modes can be integers in the range 0 to 4.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_KLEIN 3f Converts all upper-case letters in a text string to lower-case.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_CODE 40 Returns a numeric code for the first character in a text string.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_WERT 25 Converts a text string into a number.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_GROSS 3e Converts the string specified in the Text field to upper-case.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_IDENTISCH 41 Compares two text strings and returns TRUE if they are identical.
17 SC_HID_FUNC_WIEDERHOLEN 30 Repeats a text string the given number of times.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_RECHTS 3a Returns the last character or characters of a text string.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_WECHSELN 2e Substitutes new text for old text in a string.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_BASIS 5d Converts a positive integer to a specified base into a text string from the numbering system.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_TEIL 6e Returns a segment of a text string. The parameters specify the starting position and the number of characters.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_DEZIMAL 6a Converts a text string with characters from a number system to a positive integer in the base radix given.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_TEXT 38 Converts a number into text according to a given format.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_ARABISCH 51 Calculates the value of a Roman number. The value must be in the range 0 to 3999.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_ZEICHEN 47 Converts a number into a character according to the current code table.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_FINDEN 27 Looks for a text string within another.
1b SC_HID_DAI_FUNC_DAYSINMONTH 4a Calculates the number of days in the month in which the given date occurs.
1a SC_HID_DAI_FUNC_DAYSINYEAR 49 Calculates the number of days in the year in which the given date occurs.
1a SC_HID_DAI_FUNC_DIFFMONTHS 36 Calculates the difference in months between two dates.
19 SC_HID_DAI_FUNC_DIFFWEEKS 35 Calculates the difference in weeks between two dates.
15 SC_HID_DAI_FUNC_ROT13 4d Encrypts a text string by moving the characters 13 positions in the alphabet.
19 SC_HID_DAI_FUNC_DIFFYEARS 35 Calculates the difference in years between two dates.
1b SC_HID_DAI_FUNC_WEEKSINYEAR 4a Calculates the number of weeks in the year in which the given date occurs.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_BIN2HEX 43 The result is the hexadecimal number for the binary number entered.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_HEX2DEC 44 The result is the decimal number for the hexadecimal number entered.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_BESSELI 28 Calculates the modified Bessel function.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_DEC2HEX 44 The result is the hexadecimal number for the decimal number entered.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_BIN2OCT 3d The result is the octal number for the binary number entered.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_HEX2OCT 42 The result is the octal number for the hexadecimal number entered.
16 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_GESTEP 3b The result is 1 if Number is greater than or equal to Step.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_BESSELK 28 Calculates the modified Bessel function.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_BESSELY 28 Calculates the modified Bessel function.
15 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_DELTA 71 The result is TRUE (1) if both numbers, which are delivered as an argument, are equal, otherwise it is FALSE (0).
13 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_ERF 2e Returns values of the Gaussian error integral.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_BESSELJ 33 Calculates the Bessel function (cylinder function).
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_DEC2BIN 54 The result is the binary number for the decimal number entered between -512 and 511.
14 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_ERFC 53 Returns complementary values of the Gaussian error integral between x and infinity.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_HEX2BIN 43 The result is the binary number for the hexadecimal number entered.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_BIN2DEC 3f The result is the decimal number for the binary number entered.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_DEC2OCT 3e The result is the octal number for the decimal number entered.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMPOWER 34 The result is the integer power of a complex number.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_OCT2DEZ 3e The result is the decimal number for the octal number entered.
1a SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMARGUMENT 3f The result is the argument (the phi angle) of a complex number.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_OCT2BIN 3d The result is the binary number for the octal number entered.
14 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMLN 48 The result is the natural logarithm (to the base e) of a complex number.
16 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMREAL 37 The result is the real coefficient of a complex number.
16 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMSQRT 32 The result is the square root of a complex number.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_COMPLEX 66 The result is a complex number which is returned from a real coefficient and an imaginary coefficient.
16 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMLOG2 37 The result is the binary logarithm of a complex number.
15 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMEXP 33 The result is the power of e to the complex number.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_OCT2HEX 42 The result is the hexadecimal number for the octal number entered.
1b SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMCONJUGATE 44 The result is the conjugated complex complement to a complex number.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMLOG10 48 The result is the common logarithm (to the base 10) of a complex number.
19 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMAGINARY 3c The result is the imaginary coefficient of a complex number.
15 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMDIV 32 The result is the division of two complex numbers.
15 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMCOS 2d The result is the cosine of a complex number.
15 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMSUM 32 The result is the sum of up to 29 complex numbers.
15 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMSUB 35 The result is the subtraction of two complex numbers.
1a SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_FACTDOUBLE 29 Returns the double factorial of a number.
15 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMSIN 2b The result is the sine of a complex number.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_CONVERT 60 Converts a value from one unit of measure to the corresponding value in another unit of measure.
15 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMABS 35 The result is the absolute value of a complex number.
19 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMPRODUCT 36 The result is the product of up to 29 complex numbers.
19 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_COUPDAYBS 6a Returns the number of days from the first day of interest payment on a security until the settlement date.
f SC_HID_FUNC_ZGZ 51 Calculates the interest rate resulting from the profit (return) of an investment.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_COUPPCD 60 Returns the date of the interest date prior to the settlement date. Format the result as a date.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_INTRATE a9 Calculates the annual interest rate that results when a security (or other item) is purchased at an investment value and sold at a redemption value. No interest is paid.
f SC_HID_FUNC_VDB 71 Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified or partial period using a variable declining balance method.
f SC_HID_FUNC_ZZR 72 Returns the number of periods for an investment based on periodic, constant payments and a constant interest rate.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_ZINS 3c Returns the constant interest rate per period of an annuity.
14 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_XNPV 6b Calculates the capital value (net present value)for a list of payments which take place on different dates.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_ZINSZ 6a Calculates the periodic amortisation for an investment with regular payments and a constant interest rate.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_COUPNCD 63 Returns the date of the first interest date after the settlement date. Format the result as a date.
e SC_HID_FUNC_ZW 7b Returns the future value of an investment based on periodic, constant payments and a constant interest rate (Future Value).
18 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_COUPDAYS 5d Returns the number of days in the current interest period in which the settlement date falls.
14 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_XIRR 62 Calculates the internal rate of return for a list of payments which take place on different dates.
19 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_ODDLPRICE 71 Calculates the price per 100 currency units par value of a security, if the last interest date falls irregularly.
19 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_ODDLYIELD 4f Calculates the yield of a security if the last interest date falls irregularly.
19 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_ODDFPRICE 72 Calculates the price per 100 currency units par value of a security, if the first interest date falls irregularly.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_COUPNUM 64 Returns the number of coupons (interest payments) between the settlement date and the maturity date.
1a SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_FVSCHEDULE 6d Calculates the accumulated value of the starting capital for a series of periodically varying interest rates.
1a SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_COUPDAYSNC 51 Returns the number of days from the settlement date until the next interest date.
19 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_ODDFYIELD 50 Calculates the yield of a security if the first interest date falls irregularly.
f SC_HID_FUNC_LIA 42 Returns the straight-line depreciation of an asset for one period.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_QIKV 4b Calculates the modified internal rate of return of a series of investments.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_TBILLEQ 33 Calculates the annual return on a treasury bill ().
15 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_YIELD 23 Calculates the yield of a security.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_KAPZ 97 Returns for a given period the payment on the principal for an investment that is based on periodic and constant payments and a constant interest rate.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_NOMINAL 75 Calculates the yearly nominal interest rate, given the effective rate and the number of compounding periods per year.
18 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_DOLLARDE 55 Converts a quotation that has been given as a decimal fraction into a decimal number.
15 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_PRICE 84 Calculates the market value of a fixed interest security with a par value of 100 currency units as a function of the forecast yield.
1a SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_TBILLPRICE 3f Calculates the price of a treasury bill per 100 currency units.
16 SC_HID_FUNC_KUMKAPITAL 5c Returns the cumulative interest paid for an investment period with a constant interest rate.
18 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_YIELDMAT 61 Calculates the annual yield of a security, the interest of which is paid on the date of maturity.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_KUMZINSZ 7e Calculates the cumulative interest payments, that is, the total interest, for an investment based on a constant interest rate.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_CUMIPMT 31 Calculates the accumulated interest for a period.
18 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_CUMPRINC 3b Calculates the cumulative redemption of a loan in a period.
f SC_HID_FUNC_NBW e8 Returns the present value of an investment based on a series of periodic cash flows and a discount rate. To obtain the net present value, subtract the cost of the project (the initial cash flow at time zero) from the returned value.
18 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_PRICEMAT 70 Calculates the price per 100 currency units of par value of a security, that pays interest on the maturity date.
18 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_DOLLARFR 5b Converts a quotation that has been given as a decimal number into a mixed decimal fraction.
19 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_PRICEDISC 5d Calculates the price per 100 currency units of par value of a non-interest- bearing security.
1a SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_TBILLYIELD 28 Calculates the yield of a treasury bill.
f SC_HID_FUNC_RMZ 49 Returns the periodic payment for an annuity with constant interest rates.
19 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_YIELDDISC 3f Calculates the annual yield of a non-interest-bearing security.
19 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_MDURATION 50 Calculates the modified Macauley duration of a fixed interest security in years.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_NOMINAL 80 Calculates the annual nominal rate of interest on the basis of the effective rate and the number of interest payments per annum.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_LAUFZEIT 57 Calculates the number of periods required by an investment to attain the desired value.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_BITRSHIFT 20 Shifts a number right by n bits.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_BITXOR 3b Returns a bitwise logical "exclusive or" of the parameters.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_BITAND 32 Returns a bitwise logical "and" of the parameters.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_BITLSHIFT 1f Shifts a number left by n bits.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_BITOR 31 Returns a bitwise logical "or" of the parameters.
1b SC_HID_FUNC_ACHSENABSCHNITT 66 Calculates the point at which a line will intersect the y-values by using known x-values and y-values.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_BETAINV 48 Returns the inverse of the cumulative beta probability density function.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_CHISQINV 21 Returns the inverse of CHISQDIST.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_CHISQDIST 7e Returns the value of the probability density function or the cumulative distribution function for the chi-square distribution.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_ANZAHL 35 Counts how many numbers are in the list of arguments.
1d SC_HID_FUNC_BESTIMMTHEITSMASS 54 Returns the square of the Pearson correlation coefficient based on the given values.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_CHIVERT 5b Returns the probability value from the indicated chi-square that a hypothesis is confirmed.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_BINOMVERT 3e Returns the individual term binomial distribution probability.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_ANZAHL2 34 Counts how many values are in the list of arguments.
d SC_HID_FUNC_B 3f Returns the probability of a sample with binomial distribution.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_BETAVERT 1a Returns the beta function.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_CHIINV 51 Returns the inverse of the one-tailed probability of the chi-square distribution.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_CHITEST 82 Returns the probability of a deviance from a random distribution of two test series based on the chi-square test for independence.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_EXPONVERT 25 Returns the exponential distribution.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_GTEST 66 Calculates the probability of observing a z-statistic greater than the one computed based on a sample.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_GAMMAINV 43 Returns the inverse of the Gamma cumulative distribution GAMMADIST.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_FTEST 20 Returns the result of an F-test.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_GAMMA 21 Returns the Gamma function value.
17 SC_HID_FUNC_HYPGEOMVERT 28 Returns the hypergeometric distribution.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_GEOMITTEL 27 Returns the geometric mean of a sample.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_GAUSS 34 Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_HARMITTEL 28 Returns the harmonic mean of a data set.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_FVERT 2b Calculates the values of an F-distribution.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_GAMMAVERT 2b Returns the values of a Gamma distribution.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_FINV 2a Returns the inverse of the F-distribution.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_FISHER 5e Returns the Fisher transformation for x and creates a function close to a normal distribution.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_FISHERINV 6d Returns the inverse of the Fisher transformation for x and creates a function close to a normal distribution.
1a SC_HID_FUNC_GESTUTZTMITTEL 50 Returns the mean of a data set without the Alpha percent of data at the margins.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_GAMMALN 3a Returns the natural logarithm of the Gamma function: G(x).
12 SC_HID_FUNC_LOGINV 33 Returns the inverse of the log-normal distribution.
17 SC_HID_FUNC_LOGNORMVERT 2f Returns the cumulative log-normal distribution.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_KORREL 3a Returns the correlation coefficient between two data sets.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_KKLEINSTE 33 Returns the Rank_c-th smallest value in a data set.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_KGROESSTE 32 Returns the Rank_c-th largest value in a data set.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_KOVAR 3b Returns the covariance of the product of paired deviations.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_KURT 40 Returns the kurtosis of a data set (at least 4 values required).
15 SC_HID_FUNC_KONFIDENZ 44 Returns the (1-alpha) confidence interval for a normal distribution.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_KRITBINOM 75 Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is less than or equal to a criterion value.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_MEDIAN 100 Returns the median of a set of numbers. In a set containing an uneven number of values, the median will be the number in the middle of the set and in a set containing an even number of values, it will be the mean of the two values in the middle of the set.
17 SC_HID_FUNC_MITTELWERTA 46 Returns the average of the arguments. The value of a text string is 0.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_POISSON 21 Returns the Poisson distribution.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_QUARTILE 23 Returns the quartile of a data set.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_MINA 7d Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments. Unlike MIN, you can also use text strings. The value of a text string is 0.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_MODALWERT 2c Returns the most common value in a data set.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_QUANTIL 38 Returns the alpha-percentile of data values in an array.
f SC_HID_FUNC_MAX 31 Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_MITTELABW 4e Returns the average of the absolute deviations of data points from their mean.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_NORMVERT 53 Returns the normal density function or the normal cumulative distribution function.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_MAXA 7d Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments. Unlike MAX, you can also use text strings. The value of a text string is 0.
f SC_HID_FUNC_PHI 53 Returns the values of the distribution function for a standard normal distribution.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_NORMINV 3a Returns the inverse of the normal cumulative distribution.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_PEARSON 3d Returns the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient r.
18 SC_HID_FUNC_QUANTILSRANG 33 Returns the percentage rank of a value in a sample.
16 SC_HID_FUNC_MITTELWERT 25 Returns the average of the arguments.
18 SC_HID_FUNC_NEGBINOMVERT 2b Returns the negative binomial distribution.
f SC_HID_FUNC_MIN 31 Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments.
16 SC_HID_FUNC_SUMQUADABW 40 Returns the sum of squares of deviations based on a sample mean.
18 SC_HID_FUNC_STANDNORMINV 43 Returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution.
1a SC_HID_FUNC_WAHRSCHBEREICH 46 Returns the probability that values in a range are between two limits.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_WEIBULL 2f Returns the values of the Weibull distribution.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_STABWNA 41 Calculates the standard deviation based on the entire population.
19 SC_HID_FUNC_STANDNORMVERT 82 Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution function. The distribution has a mean of zero and a standard deviation of one.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_RANG 29 Returns the rank of a number in a sample.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_VARIANZ 29 Estimates the variance based on a sample.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_SCHAETZER 3d Extrapolates future values based on existing x- and y-values.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_VARIANZA 3f Estimates a variance based on a sample. The value of text is 0.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_STABWN 41 Calculates the standard deviation based on the entire population.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_STABW 33 Estimates the standard deviation based on a sample.
17 SC_HID_FUNC_VARIATIONEN 41 Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_TVERT 1b Returns the t-distribution.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_TTEST 3b Returns the probability associated with a Student's t-Test.
16 SC_HID_FUNC_VARIANZENA 4f Calculates the variance based on the entire population. The value of text is 0.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_STEIGUNG 30 Returns the slope of the linear regression line.
18 SC_HID_FUNC_VARIATIONEN2 56 Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects (repetition allowed).
16 SC_HID_FUNC_STFEHLERYX 57 Returns the standard error of the predicted y-value for each x-value in the regression.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_TINV 2a Returns the inverse of the t-distribution.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_SCHIEFE 27 Returns the skewness of a distribution.
1c SC_HID_FUNC_STANDARDISIERUNG 31 Converts a random variable to a normalised value.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_VARIANZEN 35 Calculates a variance based on the entire population.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_STABWA 45 Calculates the standard deviation of an estimation based on a sample.
10 .uno%3ANamesMenu 47 Allows you to name the different sections of your spreadsheet document.
2c sc%3AMoreButton%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES%3ABTN_MORE 41 Allows you to specify the Area type (optional) for the reference.
11 .uno%3ADefineName 49 Opens a dialogue box in which you can specify a name for a selected area.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES%3ABTN_CRITERIA 3b Defines the selected area to be used in an advanced filter.
27 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES%3AED_ASSIGN 4b The reference of the selected area name is shown here as an absolute value.
2b sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES%3ABTN_ADD 9c Click the Add button to add the defined name to the list. Click the Modify button to enter another name for an already existing name selected from the list.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES%3ABTN_ROWHEADER 24 Defines the area as a repeating row.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES%3ABTN_COLHEADER 27 Defines the area as a repeating column.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES%3ABTN_PRINTAREA 22 Defines the area as a print range.
29 sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES%3AED_NAME 9a Enter the name of the area for which you want to define a reference. All area names already defined in the spreadsheet are listed in the text field below.
31 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES_PASTE%3ABTN_ADD 67 Inserts a list of all named areas and the corresponding cell references at the current cursor position.
11 .uno%3AInsertName 44 Inserts a defined named cell range at the current cursor's position.
33 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES_PASTE%3ALB_ENTRYLIST 82 Lists all defined cell areas. Double-click an entry to insert the named area into the active sheet at the current cursor position.
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES_CREATE%3ABTN_BOTTOM 55 Creates the range names from the entries in the last row of the selected sheet range.
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES_CREATE%3ABTN_LEFT 59 Creates the range names from the entries in the first column of the selected sheet range.
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES_CREATE%3ABTN_TOP 42 Creates the range names from the header row of the selected range.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES_CREATE%3ABTN_RIGHT 58 Creates the range names from the entries in the last column of the selected sheet range.
12 .uno%3ACreateNames 36 Allows you to automatically name multiple cell ranges.
30 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_COLROWNAMERANGES%3AED_DATA 8a Sets the data range for which the selected label range is valid. To modify it, click in the sheet and select another range with the mouse.
30 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_COLROWNAMERANGES%3AED_AREA 30 Displays the cell reference of each label range.
3b sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLROWNAMERANGES%3ABTN_ROWHEAD 2f Includes row labels in the current label range.
17 .uno%3ADefineLabelRange 3b Opens a dialogue box in which you can define a label range.
36 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLROWNAMERANGES%3ABTN_ADD 29 Adds the current label range to the list.
34 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_COLROWNAMERANGES%3ALB_RANGE 30 Displays the cell reference of each label range.
3b sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLROWNAMERANGES%3ABTN_COLHEAD 32 Includes column labels in the current label range.
30 sc%3AImageButton%3AFID_FUNCTION_BOX%3AIMB_INSERT 30 Inserts the selected function into the document.
12 .uno%3AFunctionBox 72 This command opens the Function List window, which displays all functions that can be inserted into your document.
28 sc%3AListBox%3AFID_FUNCTION_BOX%3ACB_CAT 21 Displays the available functions.
29 sc%3AListBox%3AFID_FUNCTION_BOX%3ALB_FUNC 21 Displays the available functions.
18 SC_HID_SCDLG_LINKAREAURL 64 Enter the URL or the file name that contains the data that you want to insert, and then press Enter.
1f .uno%3AInsertExternalDataSource 89 Inserts data from an HTML, Calc, or Microsoft Excel file into the current sheet as a link. The data must be located within a named range.
31 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_LINKAREA%3ABTN_BROWSE 37 Locate the file containing the data you want to insert.
32 sc%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_LINKAREA%3ALB_RANGES 3b Select the table or the data range that you want to insert.
31 sc%3ANumericField%3ARID_SCDLG_LINKAREA%3ANF_DELAY 64 Enter the number of seconds to wait before the external data are reloaded into the current document.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_LINKAREA%3ABTN_RELOAD 64 Enter the number of seconds to wait before the external data are reloaded into the current document.
17 .uno%3AFormatCellDialog 64 Allows you to specify a variety of formatting options and to apply attributes to the selected cells.
37 sc%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_PROTECTION%3ABTN_HIDE_ALL 32 Hides formulae and contents of the selected cells.
18 SC_HID_SCPAGE_PROTECTION 2e Defines protection options for selected cells.
39 sc%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_PROTECTION%3ABTN_HIDE_PRINT 2c Keeps the selected cells from being printed.
38 sc%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_PROTECTION%3ABTN_PROTECTED 30 Prevents the selected cells from being modified.
3c sc%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_PROTECTION%3ABTN_HIDE_FORMULAR 25 Hides formulae in the selected cells.
e .uno%3ARowMenu 35 Sets the row height and hides or shows selected rows.
1a .uno%3ASetOptimalRowHeight 38 Determines the optimal row height for the selected rows.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ROW_OPT%3ABTN_DEFVAL 36 Restores the default value for the optimal row height.
2f sc%3AMetricField%3ARID_SCDLG_ROW_OPT%3AED_VALUE 57 Sets additional spacing between the largest character in a row and the cell boundaries.
b .uno%3AHide 32 Hides selected rows, columns or individual sheets.
e .uno%3AHideRow 32 Hides selected rows, columns or individual sheets.
11 .uno%3AHideColumn 32 Hides selected rows, columns or individual sheets.
e .uno%3AShowRow 3e Choose this command to show previously hidden rows or columns.
11 .uno%3AShowColumn 3e Choose this command to show previously hidden rows or columns.
11 .uno%3AColumnMenu 3a Sets the column width and hides or shows selected columns.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_COL_OPT%3ABTN_DEFVAL 57 Defines the optimal column width in order to display the entire contents of the column.
22 .uno%3ASetOptimalColumnWidthDirect 36 Defines the optimal column width for selected columns.
1c .uno%3ASetOptimalColumnWidth 36 Defines the optimal column width for selected columns.
2f sc%3AMetricField%3ARID_SCDLG_COL_OPT%3AED_VALUE 61 Defines additional spacing between the longest entry in a column and the vertical column borders.
17 .uno%3ASheetRightToLeft 58 Changes the orientation of the current sheet to Right-To-Left if CTL support is enabled.
10 .uno%3ASheetMenu 37 Sets the sheet name and hides or shows selected sheets.
15 SC_HID_SC_APPEND_NAME 24 Enter a new name for the sheet here.
25 sc%3AModalDialog%3ARID_SCDLG_STRINPUT 60 This command opens a dialogue box in which you can assign a different name to the current sheet.
12 .uno%3ARenameTable 60 This command opens a dialogue box in which you can assign a different name to the current sheet.
b .uno%3AName 60 This command opens a dialogue box in which you can assign a different name to the current sheet.
29 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_STRINPUT%3AED_INPUT 24 Enter a new name for the sheet here.
15 SC_HID_SC_RENAME_NAME 24 Enter a new name for the sheet here.
35 sc%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_SHOW_TAB%3ALB_ENTRYLIST 42 Displays a list of all hidden sheets in your spreadsheet document.
b .uno%3AShow 42 Displays sheets that were previously hidden with the Hide command.
17 .uno%3AToggleMergeCells 46 Combines the selected cells into a single cell or splits merged cells.
17 .uno%3APageFormatDialog 5a Opens a dialogue box in which you can define the appearance of all pages in your document.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_TABLE%3ABTN_HEADER 44 Specifies whether you want the column and row headers to be printed.
30 sc%3ANumericField%3ARID_SCPAGE_TABLE%3AED_PAGENO 23 Enter the number of the first page.
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_TABLE%3ABTN_NOTES 30 Prints the comments defined in your spreadsheet.
33 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_TABLE%3ABTN_LEFTRIGHT 46 Prints horizontally from the top row of the sheet to the right column.
36 sc%3ANumericField%3ARID_SCPAGE_TABLE%3AED_SCALEPAGENUM 30 Enter the maximum number of pages to be printed.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_TABLE%3ABTN_PAGENO 53 Mark this check box if you want the first page to start with a number other than 1.
38 sc%3ANumericField%3ARID_SCPAGE_TABLE%3AED_SCALEPAGEWIDTH 44 Enter the maximum number of pages to be printed horizontally across.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_TABLE%3ABTN_NULLVALS 33 Specifies that cells with a zero value are printed.
13 SC_HID_SCPAGE_TABLE b6 Specifies the elements to be included in the printout of all sheets with the current Page Style. Additionally, you can set the print order, the first page number, and the page scale.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_TABLE%3ABTN_DRAWINGS 35 Includes all drawing objects in the printed document.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_TABLE%3ABTN_TOPDOWN 42 Prints vertically from the left column to the bottom of the sheet.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_TABLE%3ALB_SCALEMODE 68 Select a scaling mode from the list box. Appropriate controls will be shown at the side of the list box.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_TABLE%3ABTN_FORMULAS 43 Prints the formulae contained in the cells, instead of the results.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_TABLE%3ABTN_CHARTS 40 Prints the charts that have been inserted into your spreadsheet.
31 sc%3AMetricField%3ARID_SCPAGE_TABLE%3AED_SCALEALL 61 Enter a scaling factor. Factors less than 100 reduce the pages, higher factors enlarge the pages.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_TABLE%3ABTN_OBJECTS 54 Includes all inserted objects (if printable) and graphics with the printed document.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_TABLE%3ABTN_GRID 39 Prints out the borders of the individual cells as a grid.
39 sc%3ANumericField%3ARID_SCPAGE_TABLE%3AED_SCALEPAGEHEIGHT 43 Enter the maximum number of pages to be printed vertically stacked.
16 .uno%3APrintRangesMenu 49 Manages print ranges. Only cells within the print ranges will be printed.
16 .uno%3ADefinePrintArea 40 Defines an active cell or selected cell area as the print range.
16 .uno%3ADeletePrintArea 1f Removes the defined print area.
2a sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_AREAS%3AED_REPEATROW 83 Choose one or more rows to print on every page. In the right text box enter the row reference, for example, "1" or "$1" or "$2:$3".
2a sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_AREAS%3AED_PRINTAREA 2b Allows you to modify a defined print range.
2d sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_AREAS%3ALB_REPEATROW 83 Choose one or more rows to print on every page. In the right text box enter the row reference, for example, "1" or "$1" or "$2:$3".
14 .uno%3AEditPrintArea 3e Opens a dialogue box in which you can specify the print range.
2a sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_AREAS%3AED_REPEATCOL 89 Choose one or more columns to print on every page. In the right text box enter the column reference, for example, "A" or "AB" or "$C:$E".
2d sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_AREAS%3ALB_PRINTAREA 2b Allows you to modify a defined print range.
2d sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_AREAS%3ALB_REPEATCOL 89 Choose one or more columns to print on every page. In the right text box enter the column reference, for example, "A" or "AB" or "$C:$E".
13 .uno%3AAddPrintArea 36 Adds the current selection to the defined print areas.
18 SFX2_HID_TEMPLATE_FILTER 21 Lists the available style groups.
15 SFX2_HID_TEMPLATE_FMT 41 Displays the list of the styles from the selected style category.
1a SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_WATERCAN 7a Turns the Fill Format mode on and off. Use the paint can to assign the Style selected in the Styles and Formatting window.
21 SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_UPDATEBYEXAMPLE 72 Updates the Style selected in the Styles and Formatting window with the current formatting of the selected object.
10 .uno%3AParaStyle 4c Displays the list of the available Cell Styles for indirect cell formatting.
10 .uno%3APageStyle 40 Displays the Page Styles available for indirect page formatting.
1e SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_NEWBYEXAMPLE 41 Creates a new style based on the formatting of a selected object.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_AUTOFORMAT%3ABTN_FONT 4f When marked, specifies that you want to retain the font of the selected format.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_AUTOFORMAT%3ABTN_PATTERN 52 When marked, specifies that you want to retain the pattern of the selected format.
18 SC_HID_SC_RENAME_AUTOFMT 5a Opens a dialogue box in which you can change the specification of the selected AutoFormat.
2f sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_AUTOFORMAT%3ALB_FORMAT 49 Choose a predefined AutoFormat to apply to a selected area in your sheet.
17 SC_HID_SC_REN_AFMT_NAME 2a Enter the new name of the AutoFormat here.
16 SC_HID_SC_AUTOFMT_NAME 1a Enter a name and click OK.
34 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_AUTOFORMAT%3ABTN_ALIGNMENT 54 When marked, specifies that you want to retain the alignment of the selected format.
30 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AUTOFORMAT%3ABTN_ADD 72 Allows you to add the current formatting of a range of at least 4 x 4 cells to the list of predefined AutoFormats.
34 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_AUTOFORMAT%3ABTN_NUMFORMAT 58 When marked, specifies that you want to retain the number format of the selected format.
11 .uno%3AAutoFormat 63 Use this command to apply an AutoFormat to a selected sheet area or to define your own AutoFormats.
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_AUTOFORMAT%3ABTN_BORDER 51 When marked, specifies that you want to retain the border of the selected format.
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_AUTOFORMAT%3ABTN_ADJUST 71 When marked, specifies that you want to retain the width and height of the selected cells of the selected format.
31 sc%3AMoreButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AUTOFORMAT%3ABTN_MORE c5 Opens the Formatting section, which displays the formatting overrides that can be applied to the spreadsheet. Deselecting an option keeps the format of the current spreadsheet for that format type.
30 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ALB_COND3_1 4e Specifies if conditional formatting is dependent on a cell value or a formula.
30 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ALB_COND3_2 46 Choose a condition for the format to be applied to the selected cells.
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ACBX_COND1 55 Mark the boxes corresponding to each condition and enter the corresponding condition.
30 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ALB_COND1_2 46 Choose a condition for the format to be applied to the selected cells.
2e sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3AEDT_COND1_1 24 Enter a reference, value or formula.
2e sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3AEDT_COND2_2 24 Enter a reference, value or formula.
37 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ALB_COND2_TEMPLATE 42 Choose the style to be applied if the specified condition matches.
30 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ALB_COND1_1 4e Specifies if conditional formatting is dependent on a cell value or a formula.
30 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ALB_COND2_2 46 Choose a condition for the format to be applied to the selected cells.
1e .uno%3AConditionalFormatDialog 56 Choose Conditional Formatting to define format styles depending on certain conditions.
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ACBX_COND2 55 Mark the boxes corresponding to each condition and enter the corresponding condition.
30 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ALB_COND2_1 4e Specifies if conditional formatting is dependent on a cell value or a formula.
2e sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3AEDT_COND2_1 24 Enter a reference, value or formula.
36 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ABTN_COND1_NEW b0 If you haven't already defined a style to be used, you can click New Style to open the Organiser tab page of the Cell Style dialogue box. Define a new style there and click OK.
2e sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3AEDT_COND3_1 24 Enter a reference, value or formula.
37 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ALB_COND3_TEMPLATE 42 Choose the style to be applied if the specified condition matches.
2e sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3AEDT_COND3_2 24 Enter a reference, value or formula.
36 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ABTN_COND2_NEW b0 If you haven't already defined a style to be used, you can click New Style to open the Organiser tab page of the Cell Style dialogue box. Define a new style there and click OK.
36 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ABTN_COND3_NEW b0 If you haven't already defined a style to be used, you can click New Style to open the Organiser tab page of the Cell Style dialogue box. Define a new style there and click OK.
2e sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3AEDT_COND1_2 24 Enter a reference, value or formula.
37 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ALB_COND1_TEMPLATE 42 Choose the style to be applied if the specified condition matches.
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ACBX_COND3 55 Mark the boxes corresponding to each condition and enter the corresponding condition.
10 .uno%3AHyphenate 61 The Hyphenation command calls the dialogue box for setting the hyphenation in $[officename] Calc.
15 .uno%3AShowPrecedents 75 This function shows the relationship between the current cell containing a formula and the cells used in the formula.
1b .uno%3AClearArrowPrecedents 5b Deletes one level of the trace arrows that were inserted with the Trace Precedents command.
15 .uno%3AShowDependents 5e Draws tracer arrows to the active cell from formulae that depend on values in the active cell.
1b .uno%3AClearArrowDependents 41 Deletes one level of tracer arrows created with Trace Dependents.
12 .uno%3AClearArrows 2f Removes all tracer arrows from the spreadsheet.
11 .uno%3AShowErrors 59 Draws tracer arrows to all precedent cells which cause an error value in a selected cell.
17 .uno%3AAuditingFillMode 99 Activates the Fill Mode in the Detective. The mouse pointer changes to a special symbol, and you can click any cell to see a trace to the precedent cell.
12 .uno%3AShowInvalid 4e Marks all cells in the sheet that contain values outside the validation rules.
14 .uno%3ARefreshArrows 62 Redraws all traces in the sheet. Formulae modified when traces are redrawn are taken into account.
18 .uno%3AAutoRefreshArrows 52 Automatically refreshes all the traces in the sheet whenever you modify a formula.
15 .uno%3AGoalSeekDialog 48 Opens a dialogue box in which you can solve an equation with a variable.
2b sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_SOLVER%3AED_TARGETVAL 38 Specifies the value you want to achieve as a new result.
29 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_SOLVER%3AED_VARCELL 6d Specifies the reference for the cell that contains the value you want to adjust in order to reach the target.
2d sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_SOLVER%3AED_FORMULACELL 78 In the formula cell, enter the reference of the cell which contains the formula. It contains the current cell reference.
34 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_NEWSCENARIO%3ACB_SHOWFRAME 85 Highlights the scenario in your table with a border. The colour for the border is specified in the field to the right of this option.
15 SC_HID_SC_SCENWIN_TOP 67 Defines the name for the scenario. Use a clear and unique name so you can easily identify the scenario.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_NEWSCENARIO%3ACB_COPYALL 3a Copies the entire sheet into an additional scenario sheet.
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_NEWSCENARIO%3ACB_TWOWAY 11f Copies the values of cells that you change into the active scenario. If you do not mark this check box, the scenario is not changed when you change cell values. The behaviour of the Copy back setting depends on the cell protection, the sheet protection, and the Prevent changes settings.
18 SC_HID_SC_SCENWIN_BOTTOM ab Specifies additional information about the scenario. This information will be displayed in the Navigator when you click the Scenarios icon and select the desired scenario.
2b sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_NEWSCENARIO%3AED_NAME 67 Defines the name for the scenario. Use a clear and unique name so you can easily identify the scenario.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_NEWSCENARIO%3ACB_PROTECT a7 Prevents changes to the active scenario. The behaviour of the Copy back setting depends on the cell protection, the sheet protection, and the Prevent changes settings.
37 sc%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_NEWSCENARIO%3AED_COMMENT ab Specifies additional information about the scenario. This information will be displayed in the Navigator when you click the Scenarios icon and select the desired scenario.
16 .uno%3AScenarioManager 2f Defines a scenario for the selected sheet area.
2f sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_NEWSCENARIO%3ALB_COLOR 85 Highlights the scenario in your table with a border. The colour for the border is specified in the field to the right of this option.
e .uno%3AProtect 3c Protects the cells in the current sheet from being modified.
1d .uno%3AToolProtectionDocument 82 Protects the sheet structure of your document from modifications. It is impossible to insert, delete, rename, move or copy sheets.
1b .uno%3AAutomaticCalculation 38 Automatically recalculates all formulae in the document.
10 .uno%3ACalculate 82 Recalculates all changed formulae. If AutoCalculate is enabled, the Recalculate command applies only to formulae like RAND or NOW.
13 .uno%3AAutoComplete 7d Switches the AutoInput function on and off, which automatically completes entries, based on other entries in the same column.
12 .uno%3ASplitWindow 45 Divides the current window at the top left corner of the active cell.
12 .uno%3AFreezePanes 71 Divides the sheet at the top left corner of the active cell and the area to the top left is no longer scrollable.
2e sc%3AMoreButton%3ARID_SCDLG_DBNAMES%3ABTN_MORE 19 Shows additional options.
13 .uno%3ADefineDBName 43 Defines a database range based on the selected cells in your sheet.
29 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_DBNAMES%3AED_DBAREA 21 Displays the selected cell range.
2b sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DBNAMES%3AED_NAME 66 Enter a name for the database range that you want to define, or select an existing name from the list.
2d sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_DBNAMES%3ABTN_ADD 60 Adds the selected cell range to the database range list, or modifies an existing database range.
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DBNAMES%3ABTN_SIZE 7f Automatically inserts new rows and columns into the database range in your document when new records are added to the database.
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DBNAMES%3ABTN_STRIPDATA 4a Only saves a reference to the database, and not the contents of the cells.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DBNAMES%3ABTN_HEADER 25 Selected cell ranges contains labels.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DBNAMES%3ABTN_FORMAT 5b Applies the existing cell format of headers and first data row to the whole database range.
f .uno%3ASelectDB 44 Selects a database range that you defined under Data - Define Range.
17 SC_HID_SC_SELENTRY_LIST 77 Lists the available database ranges. To select a database range in your spreadsheet, click its name, and then click OK.
f .uno%3ADataSort 45 Sorts the selected rows according to the conditions that you specify.
33 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_SORT_FIELDS%3ABTN_UP2 77 Sorts the selection from the lowest value to the highest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options.
35 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_SORT_FIELDS%3ABTN_DOWN3 77 Sorts the selection from the highest value to the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options.
35 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_SORT_FIELDS%3ABTN_DOWN2 77 Sorts the selection from the highest value to the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options.
33 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_SORT_FIELDS%3ABTN_UP3 77 Sorts the selection from the lowest value to the highest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options.
35 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_SORT_FIELDS%3ABTN_DOWN1 77 Sorts the selection from the highest value to the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options.
30 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_SORT_FIELDS%3ALB_SORT3 3d Select the column that you want to use as the third sort key.
14 .uno%3ASortAscending eb Sorts the selection from the highest to the lowest value, or from the lowest to the highest value. Number fields are sorted by size and text fields by the order of the characters. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options.
19 SC_HID_SCPAGE_SORT_FIELDS 33 Specify the sorting options for the selected range.
30 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_SORT_FIELDS%3ALB_SORT1 3f Select the column that you want to use as the primary sort key.
30 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_SORT_FIELDS%3ALB_SORT2 41 Select the column that you want to use as the secondary sort key.
33 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_SORT_FIELDS%3ABTN_UP1 a2 Sorts the selection from the lowest value to the highest value. The sorting rules are given by the locale. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options.
15 .uno%3ASortDescending eb Sorts the selection from the highest to the lowest value, or from the lowest to the highest value. Number fields are sorted by size and text fields by the order of the characters. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options.
39 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_SORT_OPTIONS%3ABTN_TOP_DOWN 45 Sorts rows by the values in the active columns of the selected range.
34 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_SORT_OPTIONS%3ALB_LANGUAGE 2a Select the language for the sorting rules.
1a SC_HID_SCPAGE_SORT_OPTIONS 20 Sets additional sorting options.
30 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCPAGE_SORT_OPTIONS%3AED_OUTAREA 69 Enter the cell range in which you want to display the sorted list, or select a named range from the list.
35 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_SORT_OPTIONS%3ABTN_FORMATS 26 Preserves the current cell formatting.
35 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_SORT_OPTIONS%3ALB_ALGORITHM 29 Select a sorting option for the language.
37 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_SORT_OPTIONS%3ABTN_SORT_USER 3f Click here and then select the custom sort order that you want.
3b sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_SORT_OPTIONS%3ABTN_LEFT_RIGHT 45 Sorts columns by the values in the active rows of the selected range.
39 SC%3ACHECKBOX%3ARID_SCPAGE_SORT_OPTIONS%3ABTN_NATURALSORT ca Natural sort is a sort algorithm that sorts string-prefixed numbers based on the value of the numerical element in each sorted number, instead of the traditional way of sorting them as ordinary strings.
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_SORT_OPTIONS%3ABTN_LABEL 47 Omits the first row or the first column in the selection from the sort.
33 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_SORT_OPTIONS%3ALB_OUTAREA 6f Select a named cell range in which you want to display the sorted list, or enter a cell range in the input box.
38 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_SORT_OPTIONS%3ABTN_COPYRESULT 3a Copies the sorted list to the cell range that you specify.
35 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_SORT_OPTIONS%3ALB_SORT_USER a7 Select the custom sort order that you want to apply. To define a custom sort order, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists .
3b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_SORT_OPTIONS%3ABTN_CASESENSITIVE 70 Sorts first by upper-case letters and then by lower-case letters. For Asian languages, special handling applies.
11 .uno%3AFilterMenu 23 Shows commands to filter your data.
1b .uno%3ADataFilterAutoFilter 8b Automatically filters the selected cell range, and creates one-row list boxes with which you can choose the items that you want to display.
33 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER%3ALB_COPY_AREA 63 Mark the check box, and then select the cell range in which you want to display the filter results.
30 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER%3AED_COPY_AREA 63 Mark the check box, and then select the cell range in which you want to display the filter results.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER%3ABTN_HEADER 3c Includes the column labels in the first row of a cell range.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ABTN_CASE 50 Distinguishes between upper-case and lower-case letters when filtering the data.
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ABTN_DEST_PERS 127 Mark the Copy results to check box, and then specify the destination range in which you want to display the filtered data. If this check box is marked, the destination range remains linked to the source range. You must have defined the source range under Data - Define range as a database range.
2b sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3AED_COPY_AREA 63 Mark the check box, and then select the cell range in which you want to display the filter results.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER%3ABTN_REGEXP 35 Allows you to use wildcards in the filter definition.
35 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER%3ABTN_DEST_PERS 127 Mark the Copy results to check box, and then specify the destination range in which you want to display the filtered data. If this check box is marked, the destination range remains linked to the source range. You must have defined the source range under Data - Define range as a database range.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_COPY_AREA 63 Mark the check box, and then select the cell range in which you want to display the filter results.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ABTN_COPY_RESULT 63 Mark the check box, and then select the cell range in which you want to display the filter results.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ABTN_HEADER 3c Includes the column labels in the first row of a cell range.
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER%3ABTN_CASE 50 Distinguishes between upper-case and lower-case letters when filtering the data.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ABTN_UNIQUE 37 Excludes duplicate rows from the list of filtered data.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER%3ABTN_UNIQUE 37 Excludes duplicate rows from the list of filtered data.
37 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER%3ABTN_COPY_RESULT 63 Mark the check box, and then select the cell range in which you want to display the filter results.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ABTN_REGEXP 35 Allows you to use wildcards in the filter definition.
32 sc%3AMoreButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER%3ABTN_MORE 20 Shows additional filter options.
2d sc%3AMoreButton%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ABTN_MORE 20 Shows additional filter options.
37 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER%3ALB_CRITERIA_AREA 67 Select the named range, or enter the cell range that contains the filter criteria that you want to use.
1e .uno%3ADataFilterSpecialFilter 1b Defines an advanced filter.
34 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER%3AED_CRITERIA_AREA 67 Select the named range, or enter the cell range that contains the filter criteria that you want to use.
1d .uno%3ADataFilterRemoveFilter 81 Removes the filter from the selected cell range. To enable this command, click inside the cell area where the filter was applied.
1f .uno%3ADataFilterHideAutoFilter 38 Hides the AutoFilter buttons in the selected cell range.
14 .uno%3ADataSubTotals 35 Calculates subtotals for the columns that you select.
13 SC_HID_SC_SUBT_COLS 45 Select the column(s) containing the values that you want to subtotal.
18 SC_HID_SCPAGE_SUBT_GROUP 45 Select the column(s) containing the values that you want to subtotal.
14 SC_HID_SC_SUBT_GROUP aa Select the column that you want to control the subtotal calculation process. If the contents of the selected column changes, the subtotals are automatically recalculated.
13 SC_HID_SC_SUBT_FUNC 51 Select the mathematical function that you want to use to calculate the subtotals.
19 SC_HID_SCPAGE_SUBT_GROUP1 53 Specify the settings for up to three subtotal groups. Each tab has the same layout.
19 SC_HID_SCPAGE_SUBT_GROUP3 53 Specify the settings for up to three subtotal groups. Each tab has the same layout.
19 SC_HID_SCPAGE_SUBT_GROUP2 53 Specify the settings for up to three subtotal groups. Each tab has the same layout.
33 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_SUBT_OPTIONS%3ALB_USERDEF 6b Uses a custom sorting order that you defined in the Options dialogue box at %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists.
35 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_SUBT_OPTIONS%3ABTN_USERDEF 6b Uses a custom sorting order that you defined in the Options dialogue box at %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists.
35 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_SUBT_OPTIONS%3ABTN_FORMATS 2d Considers formatting attributes when sorting.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_SUBT_OPTIONS%3ABTN_CASE 40 Recalculates subtotals when you change the case of a data label.
3a sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_SUBT_OPTIONS%3ABTN_ASCENDING 5e Sorts beginning with the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options.
37 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_SUBT_OPTIONS%3ABTN_PAGEBREAK 38 Inserts a new page after each group of subtotalled data.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_SUBT_OPTIONS%3ABTN_SORT 72 Sorts the area that you selected in the Group by box of the Group tabs according to the columns that you selected.
1a SC_HID_SCPAGE_SUBT_OPTIONS 3e Specify the settings for calculating and presenting subtotals.
3b sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_SUBT_OPTIONS%3ABTN_DESCENDING 5f Sorts beginning with the highest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options.
28 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3AED_ROWCELL 61 Enter the input cell reference that you want to use as a variable for the rows in the data table.
1b .uno%3ATableOperationDialog 51 Applies the same formula to different cells, but with different parameter values.
28 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3AED_COLCELL 64 Enter the input cell reference that you want to use as a variable for the columns in the data table.
2d sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3AED_FORMULARANGE 6f Enter the cell references for the cells containing the formulae that you want to use in the multiple operation.
33 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ALB_DATA_AREA f9 Specifies the cell range that you want to consolidate with the cell ranges listed in the Consolidation ranges box. Select a cell range in a sheet, and then click Add. You can also select the name of a predefined cell from the Source data range list.
16 .uno%3ADataConsolidate 76 Combines data from one or more independent cell ranges and calculates a new range using the function that you specify.
31 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ABTN_ADD 5b Adds the cell range specified in the Source data range box to the Consolidation ranges box.
32 sc%3AMoreButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ABTN_MORE 19 Shows additional options.
30 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3AED_DEST_AREA 5a Displays the first cell in the range in which the consolidation results will be displayed.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ALB_FUNC 41 Select the function that you want to use to consolidate the data.
33 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ALB_DEST_AREA 5a Displays the first cell in the range in which the consolidation results will be displayed.
30 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3AED_DATA_AREA f9 Specifies the cell range that you want to consolidate with the cell ranges listed in the Consolidation ranges box. Select a cell range in a sheet, and then click Add. You can also select the name of a predefined cell from the Source data range list.
38 sc%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ALB_CONSAREAS 36 Displays the cell ranges that you want to consolidate.
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ABTN_BYCOL 38 Uses the column labels to arrange the consolidated data.
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ABTN_BYROW 35 Uses the row labels to arrange the consolidated data.
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ABTN_REFS 99 Links the data in the consolidation range to the source data, and automatically updates the results of the consolidation when the source data is changed.
11 .uno%3AHideDetail ad Hides the details of the grouped row or column that contains the cursor. To hide all of the grouped rows or columns, select the outlined table, and then choose this command.
11 .uno%3AShowDetail bc Shows the details of the grouped row or column that contains the cursor. To show the details of all of the grouped rows or columns, select the outlined table, and then choose this command.
22 sc%3AModalDialog%3ARID_SCDLG_GROUP 3e Defines the selected cell range as a group of rows or columns.
14 SC_HID_SC_GROUP_ROWS 19 Groups the selected rows.
c .uno%3AGroup 3e Defines the selected cell range as a group of rows or columns.
14 SC_HID_SC_GROUP_COLS 1c Groups the selected columns.
e .uno%3AUngroup 6f Ungroups the selection. In a nested group, the last rows or columns that were added are removed from the group.
12 .uno%3AAutoOutline 6f If the selected cell range contains formulae or references, $[officename] automatically outlines the selection.
13 .uno%3AClearOutline 31 Removes the outline from the selected cell range.
17 .uno%3ADataDataPilotRun 66 Opens a dialogue box where you can select the source for your pivot table, and then create your table.
34 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_DAPITYPE%3ABTN_EXTERNAL 65 Opens the External Source dialogue box where you can select the OLAP data source for the pivot table.
34 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_DAPITYPE%3ABTN_DATABASE 6f Uses a table or query in a database that is registered in $[officename] as the data source for the pivot table.
35 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_DAPITYPE%3ABTN_SELECTION 3f Uses the selected cells as the data source for the pivot table.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DAPIDATA%3ALB_OBJTYPE 33 Click the source type for the selected data source.
2e sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DAPIDATA%3ACB_OBJECT 2c Select the data source that you want to use.
2f sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DAPIDATA%3ALB_DATABASE 47 Select the database that contains the data source that you want to use.
14 SC_HID_SC_DPLAY_PAGE 8f To define the layout of a pivot table, drag-and-drop data field buttons onto the Page Fields, Row Fields, Column Fields, and Data Fields areas.
35 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT%3ABTN_TOTALCOL 42 Calculates and displays the grand total of the column calculation.
39 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT%3ABTN_IGNEMPTYROWS 28 Ignores empty fields in the data source.
35 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT%3ABTN_REMOVE 36 Removes the selected data field from the table layout.
36 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT%3ABTN_DETECTCAT 4b Automatically assigns rows without labels to the category of the row above.
14 SC_HID_SC_DPLAY_DATA 8f To define the layout of a pivot table, drag-and-drop data field buttons onto the Page Fields, Row Fields, Column Fields, and Data Fields areas.
16 SC_HID_SC_DPLAY_SELECT 8f To define the layout of a pivot table, drag-and-drop data field buttons onto the Page Fields, Row Fields, Column Fields, and Data Fields areas.
2e sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT%3AED_INAREA 43 Select the area that contains the data for the current pivot table.
33 sc%3AMoreButton%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT%3ABTN_MORE 42 Displays or hides additional options for defining the pivot table.
16 SC_HID_SC_DPLAY_COLUMN 8f To define the layout of a pivot table, drag-and-drop data field buttons onto the Page Fields, Row Fields, Column Fields, and Data Fields areas.
36 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT%3ABTN_OPTIONS 71 Opens the Data Field dialogue box with in you can change the function that is associated with the selected field.
2f sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT%3AED_OUTAREA 49 Select the area where you want to display the results of the pivot table.
36 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT%3ABTN_DRILLDOWN c1 Mark this check box and double-click an item label in the table to show or hide details of the item. Unmark this check box and double-click a cell in the table to edit the contents of the cell.
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT%3ABTN_FILTER 48 Adds a Filter button to pivot tables that are based on spreadsheet data.
35 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT%3ABTN_TOTALROW 3f Calculates and displays the grand total of the row calculation.
35 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT%3ARB_INAREA 43 Select the area that contains the data for the current pivot table.
13 SC_HID_SC_DPLAY_ROW 8f To define the layout of a pivot table, drag-and-drop data field buttons onto the Page Fields, Row Fields, Column Fields, and Data Fields areas.
2f sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DPSHOWDETAIL%3ALB_DIMS 34 Choose the field for which you want to view details.
16 .uno%3ADataPilotFilter 1e Opens the Filter dialogue box.
14 .uno%3ADataPilotExec 45 Specify the layout of the table that is generated by the pivot table.
32 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT%3ALB_OUTAREA 49 Select the area where you want to display the results of the pivot table.
2f sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOTFILTER%3ALB_COND3 3f Select an operator to compare the Field name and Value entries.
2f sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOTFILTER%3ALB_COND2 3f Select an operator to compare the Field name and Value entries.
2d sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOTFILTER%3ALB_OP2 29 Select a logical operator for the filter.
30 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOTFILTER%3ALB_FIELD1 74 Select the field that you want to use in the filter. If field names are not available, the column labels are listed.
2f sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOTFILTER%3ALB_COND1 3f Select an operator to compare the Field name and Value entries.
2f sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOTFILTER%3AED_VAL3 40 Select the value that you want to compare to the selected field.
2f sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOTFILTER%3AED_VAL1 40 Select the value that you want to compare to the selected field.
2d sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOTFILTER%3ALB_OP1 29 Select a logical operator for the filter.
30 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOTFILTER%3ALB_FIELD2 74 Select the field that you want to use in the filter. If field names are not available, the column labels are listed.
2f sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOTFILTER%3AED_VAL2 40 Select the value that you want to compare to the selected field.
30 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOTFILTER%3ALB_FIELD3 74 Select the field that you want to use in the filter. If field names are not available, the column labels are listed.
13 SC_HID_SC_PIVOTSUBT 31 Specify the subtotals that you want to calculate.
32 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DPDATAFIELD%3ALB_BASEITEM 67 Select the item of the base field from which the respective value is taken as base for the calculation.
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOTSUBT%3ACB_SHOWALL 35 Includes empty columns and rows in the results table.
33 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOTSUBT%3ABTN_OPTIONS 6e Opens the Data Field Options dialogue box. The Options button is visible for column, row, or page fields only.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DPDATAFIELD%3ALB_TYPE 49 Select the type of calculation for the displayed value of the data field.
33 sc%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DPDATAFIELD%3ALB_FUNC 7c Click the type of subtotal that you want to calculate. This option is only available if the User-defined option is selected.
31 sc%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOTSUBT%3ALB_FUNC 7c Click the type of subtotal that you want to calculate. This option is only available if the User-defined option is selected.
33 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DPDATAFIELD%3ALB_BASEFIELD 56 Select the field from which the respective value is taken as base for the calculation.
32 sc%3AMoreButton%3ARID_SCDLG_DPDATAFIELD%3ABTN_MORE 55 Expands or reduces the dialogue box. The More button is visible for data fields only.
36 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DPSUBTOTAL_OPT%3ALB_HIERARCHY 83 Select the hierarchy that you want to use. The pivot table must be based on an external source data that contains data hierarchies.
3a sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DPSUBTOTAL_OPT%3ACB_LAYOUT_EMPTY 42 Adds an empty row after the data for each item in the pivot table.
37 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DPSUBTOTAL_OPT%3ALB_SHOW_USING 39 Select the data field by which you want to sort the data.
3a sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_DPSUBTOTAL_OPT%3ARB_SORT_DESC 12d Sorts the values descending from the highest value to the lowest value (i.e. from Z to A or from 9 to 0). If the selected field is the field for which the dialogue box was opened, the items are sorted by name. If a data field was selected, the items are sorted by the value of the selected data field.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DPSUBTOTAL_OPT%3ACB_SHOW 24 Turns on the automatic show feature.
39 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_DPSUBTOTAL_OPT%3ARB_SORT_ASC 100 Sorts the values from the lowest value to the highest value. If the selected field is the field for which the dialogue box was opened, the items are sorted by name. If a data field was selected, the items are sorted by the value of the selected data field.
36 sc%3ANumericField%3ARID_SCDLG_DPSUBTOTAL_OPT%3ANF_SHOW 46 Enter the maximum number of items that you want to show automatically.
15 SC_HID_SC_DPSUBT_HIDE 3d Select the items that you want to hide from the calculations.
33 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DPSUBTOTAL_OPT%3ALB_LAYOUT 37 Choose the layout mode for the field from the list box.
39 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_DPSUBTOTAL_OPT%3ARB_SORT_MAN 1c Sorts values alphabetically.
34 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DPSUBTOTAL_OPT%3ALB_SORT_BY 3f Select the data field that you want to sort columns or rows by.
36 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_DPSUBTOTAL_OPT%3ALB_SHOW_FROM 3a Shows the top or bottom items in the specified sort order.
17 .uno%3ARecalcPivotTable 18 Updates the pivot table.
17 .uno%3ADeletePivotTable 21 Deletes the selected pivot table.
13 .uno%3ADataReImport 8e Updates a data range that was inserted from an external database. The data in the sheet is updated to match the data in the external database.
16 .uno%3ADataAreaRefresh 8e Updates a data range that was inserted from an external database. The data in the sheet is updated to match the data in the external database.
11 .uno%3AValidation 3d Defines what data is valid for a selected cell or cell range.
37 sc%3ACheckBox%3ATP_VALIDATION_VALUES%3ATSB_ALLOW_BLANKS 8f In conjunction with Tools - Detective - Mark invalid Data, this defines that blank cells are shown as invalid data (disabled) or not (enabled).
2a sc%3AEdit%3ATP_VALIDATION_VALUES%3AEDT_MAX 5a Enter the maximum value for the data validation option that you selected in the Allow box.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ATP_VALIDATION_VALUES%3ACB_SHOWLIST 93 Shows a list of all valid strings or values to select from. The list can also be opened by selecting the cell and pressing Ctrl+D (Mac: Command+D).
34 sc%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_VALIDATION_VALUES%3AEDT_LIST 3c Enter the entries that will be valid values or text strings.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ATP_VALIDATION_VALUES%3ACB_SORTLIST 89 Sorts the selection list in ascending order and filters duplicates from the list. If not marked, the order is taken from the data source.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ATP_VALIDATION_VALUES%3ALB_ALLOW 33 Click a validation option for the selected cell(s).
23 sc%3ATabPage%3ATP_VALIDATION_VALUES 36 Specify the validation rules for the selected cell(s).
2a sc%3AEdit%3ATP_VALIDATION_VALUES%3AEDT_MIN 5a Enter the minimum value for the data validation option that you selected in the Allow box.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ATP_VALIDATION_VALUES%3ALB_VALUE 35 Select the comparative operator that you want to use.
3c sc%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_VALIDATION_INPUTHELP%3AEDT_INPUTHELP 53 Enter the message that you want to display when the cell or cell range is selected.
2f sc%3AEdit%3ATP_VALIDATION_INPUTHELP%3AEDT_TITLE 51 Enter the title that you want to display when the cell or cell range is selected.
35 sc%3ATriStateBox%3ATP_VALIDATION_INPUTHELP%3ATSB_HELP 6d Displays the message that you enter in the Contents box when the cell or cell range is selected in the sheet.
26 sc%3ATabPage%3ATP_VALIDATION_INPUTHELP 60 Enter the message that you want to display when the cell or cell range is selected in the sheet.
34 sc%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_VALIDATION_ERROR%3AEDT_ERROR 52 Enter the message that you want to display when invalid data is entered in a cell.
32 sc%3APushButton%3ATP_VALIDATION_ERROR%3ABTN_SEARCH b3 Opens the Macro dialogue box in which you can select the macro that is executed when invalid data is entered in a cell. The macro is executed after the error message is displayed.
22 sc%3ATabPage%3ATP_VALIDATION_ERROR 52 Define the error message that is displayed when invalid data is entered in a cell.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ATP_VALIDATION_ERROR%3ALB_ACTION 50 Select the action that you want to occur when invalid data is entered in a cell.
31 sc%3ATriStateBox%3ATP_VALIDATION_ERROR%3ATSB_SHOW 66 Displays the error message that you enter in the Contents area when invalid data is entered in a cell.
2b sc%3AEdit%3ATP_VALIDATION_ERROR%3AEDT_TITLE 72 Enter the title of the macro or the error message that you want to display when invalid data is entered in a cell.
16 .uno%3ADrawGraphicMenu 3f Opens a sub-menu to edit the properties of the selected object.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_DATUM 80 This function converts a date written as year, month, day to an internal serial number and displays it in the cell's formatting.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_DATWERT 34 Returns the internal date number for text in quotes.
f SC_HID_FUNC_TAG 24 Returns the day of given date value.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_TAGE 32 Calculates the difference between two date values.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_TAGE360 61 Returns the difference between two dates based on the 360 day year used in interest calculations.
18 SC_HID_FUNC_OSTERSONNTAG 37 Returns the date of Easter Sunday for the entered year.
15 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_EDATE 89 The result is a date which is a number of Months away from the Start date. Only months are considered; days are not used for calculation.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_EOMONTH 58 Returns the date of the last day of a month which falls Months away from the Start date.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_STUNDE 28 Returns the hour for a given time value.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_MINUTE 31 Calculates the minute for an internal time value.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_MONAT 2b Returns the month for the given date value.
1b SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_NETWORKDAYS 5d Returns the number of working days between Start date and End date. Holidays can be deducted.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_JETZT 2a Returns the computer system date and time.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_SEKUNDE 2c Returns the second for the given time value.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_ZEIT 4f TIME returns the current time value from values for hours, minutes and seconds.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_ZEITWERT 81 TIMEVALUE returns the internal time number from a text string enclosed by quotes and which may show a possible time entry format.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_HEUTE 29 Returns the current computer system date.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_WOCHENTAG 35 Returns the day of the week for the given date value.
19 SC_HID_FUNC_KALENDERWOCHE 4b WEEKNUM calculates the week number of the year for the internal date value.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_WEEKNUM 40 The result indicates the number of the calendar week for a date.
17 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_WORKDAY 9e The result is a date number that can be formatted as a date. You then see the date of a day that is a certain number of working days away from the start date.
10 SC_HID_FUNC_JAHR 49 Returns the year as a number according to the internal calculation rules.
18 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_YEARFRAC 72 The result is a number in the range 0.0 to 1.0, representing the fraction of a year between StartDate and EndDate.
32 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AIB_RIGHT2 92 Click to shrink or restore the dialogue box. You can click or select cells in the sheet. You can enter a cell reference manually in the input box.
33 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AIB_DELETE2 4c Click to remove the row from the list. Any rows from below this row move up.
2f sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3ARB_MIN 41 Try to solve the equation for a minimum value of the target cell.
13 .uno%3ASolverDialog 7a Opens the Solver dialogue box. A solver allows to solve equations with multiple unknown variables by goal seeking methods.
31 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AIB_LEFT1 92 Click to shrink or restore the dialogue box. You can click or select cells in the sheet. You can enter a cell reference manually in the input box.
31 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3ABTN_SOLVE 83 Click to solve the equation with the current settings. The dialogue box settings are retained until you close the current document.
33 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AIB_DELETE3 4c Click to remove the row from the list. Any rows from below this row move up.
2b sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AED_RIGHT1 22 Enter a value or a cell reference.
33 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AIB_DELETE4 4c Click to remove the row from the list. Any rows from below this row move up.
33 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AIB_DELETE1 4c Click to remove the row from the list. Any rows from below this row move up.
31 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AIB_LEFT3 92 Click to shrink or restore the dialogue box. You can click or select cells in the sheet. You can enter a cell reference manually in the input box.
2a sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AED_LEFT1 17 Enter a cell reference.
2b sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AED_RIGHT2 22 Enter a value or a cell reference.
2b sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AED_RIGHT3 22 Enter a value or a cell reference.
39 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AIB_VARIABLECELLS 92 Click to shrink or restore the dialogue box. You can click or select cells in the sheet. You can enter a cell reference manually in the input box.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3ALB_OP3 21 Select an operator from the list.
31 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AIB_LEFT4 92 Click to shrink or restore the dialogue box. You can click or select cells in the sheet. You can enter a cell reference manually in the input box.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3ARB_VALUE 47 Try to solve the equation to approach a given value of the target cell.
32 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AIB_RIGHT1 92 Click to shrink or restore the dialogue box. You can click or select cells in the sheet. You can enter a cell reference manually in the input box.
2f sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3ARB_MAX 41 Try to solve the equation for a maximum value of the target cell.
2b sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AED_RIGHT4 22 Enter a value or a cell reference.
32 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AIB_RIGHT4 92 Click to shrink or restore the dialogue box. You can click or select cells in the sheet. You can enter a cell reference manually in the input box.
31 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AIB_LEFT2 92 Click to shrink or restore the dialogue box. You can click or select cells in the sheet. You can enter a cell reference manually in the input box.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3ALB_OP4 21 Select an operator from the list.
32 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AED_OBJECTIVECELL 7e Enter or click the cell reference of the target cell. This field takes the address of the cell whose value is to be optimised.
2a sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AED_LEFT2 17 Enter a cell reference.
32 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AED_VARIABLECELLS 29 Enter the cell range that can be changed.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3ALB_OP1 21 Select an operator from the list.
2a sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AED_LEFT3 17 Enter a cell reference.
2b sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AED_TARGET 24 Enter the value or a cell reference.
32 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AIB_RIGHT3 92 Click to shrink or restore the dialogue box. You can click or select cells in the sheet. You can enter a cell reference manually in the input box.
2a sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AED_LEFT4 17 Enter a cell reference.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3ALB_OP2 21 Select an operator from the list.
39 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AIB_OBJECTIVECELL 92 Click to shrink or restore the dialogue box. You can click or select cells in the sheet. You can enter a cell reference manually in the input box.
32 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3AIB_TARGET 92 Click to shrink or restore the dialogue box. You can click or select cells in the sheet. You can enter a cell reference manually in the input box.
33 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER%3ABTN_OPTIONS 1f Opens the Options dialogue box.
34 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SOLVEROPTIONS%3ABTN_EDIT 9c If the current entry in the Settings list box allows to edit a value, you can click the Edit button. A dialogue box opens in which you can change the value.
1a SC_HID_SC_SOLVEROPTIONS_LB 1d Configure the current solver.
37 sc%3ANumericField%3ARID_SCDLG_SOLVER_INTEGER%3ANF_VALUE 1a Enter or change the value.
32 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_SOLVEROPTIONS%3ALB_ENGINE 87 Select a solver engine. The list box is disabled if only one solver engine is installed. Solver engines can be installed as extensions.
1b .uno%3ANumberFormatCurrency 3a Applies the default currency format to the selected cells.
1a .uno%3ANumberFormatPercent 34 Applies the percentage format to the selected cells.
1b .uno%3ANumberFormatStandard 38 Applies the default number format to the selected cells.
1e .uno%3ANumberFormatIncDecimals 3c Adds one decimal place to the numbers in the selected cells.
1e .uno%3ANumberFormatDecDecimals 41 Removes one decimal place from the numbers in the selected cells.
11 SC_HID_INSWIN_POS c3 Displays the reference for the current cell, the range of the selected cells, or the name of the area. You can also select a range of cells, and then type a name for that range into the Name Box.
17 .uno%3AFocusCellAddress c3 Displays the reference for the current cell, the range of the selected cells, or the name of the area. You can also select a range of cells, and then type a name for that range into the Name Box.
13 SC_HID_INSWIN_SUMME fe Inserts the sum of a cell range into the current cell, or inserts sum values into selected cells. Click in a cell, click this icon and optionally adjust the cell range. Or select some cells into which the sum values will be inserted, then click the icon.
12 SC_HID_INSWIN_FUNC 62 Adds a formula to the current cell. Click this icon, and then enter the formula in the Input line.
13 SC_HID_INSWIN_INPUT 99 Enter the formula that you want to add to the current cell. You can also click the Function Wizard icon to insert a predefined function into the formula.
14 SC_HID_INSWIN_CANCEL 63 Clears the contents of the Input line, or cancels the changes that you made to an existing formula.
10 SC_HID_INSWIN_OK 5c Accepts the contents of the Input line, and then inserts the contents into the current cell.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGSTYLES_LISTBOX 45 Click the formatting theme that you want to apply, and then click OK.
13 .uno%3AChooseDesign 31 Applies a formatting style to the selected cells.
13 .uno%3AStatusDocPos 5b Displays the number of the current sheet and the total number of sheets in the spreadsheet.
14 SVX_HID_MNU_FUNC_SUM 78 Displays information about the current document. By default, the SUM of the contents of the selected cells is displayed.
15 SVX_HID_MNU_FUNC_NONE 78 Displays information about the current document. By default, the SUM of the contents of the selected cells is displayed.
15 .uno%3AStateTableCell 78 Displays information about the current document. By default, the SUM of the contents of the selected cells is displayed.
14 SVX_HID_MNU_FUNC_MAX 78 Displays information about the current document. By default, the SUM of the contents of the selected cells is displayed.
17 SVX_HID_MNU_FUNC_COUNT2 78 Displays information about the current document. By default, the SUM of the contents of the selected cells is displayed.
14 SVX_HID_MNU_FUNC_AVG 78 Displays information about the current document. By default, the SUM of the contents of the selected cells is displayed.
16 SVX_HID_MNU_FUNC_COUNT 78 Displays information about the current document. By default, the SUM of the contents of the selected cells is displayed.
14 SVX_HID_MNU_FUNC_MIN 78 Displays information about the current document. By default, the SUM of the contents of the selected cells is displayed.
d .uno%3AZoomIn 6c Enlarges the screen display of the current document. The current zoom factor is displayed on the Status Bar.
e .uno%3AZoomOut 6b Reduces the screen display of the current document. The current zoom factor is displayed on the Status Bar.
11 .uno%3AInsertCtrl 89 Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Insert toolbar, with which you can add graphics and special characters to the current sheet.
13 .uno%3AInsCellsCtrl 8c Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Insert Cells toolbar, with which you can insert cells, rows and columns into the current sheet.
1d FID_TAB_MENU_SET_TAB_BG_COLOR 3e Opens a window where you can assign a colour to the sheet tab.
e FID_TAB_EVENTS 41 Opens a dialogue box where you can assign macros to sheet events.
15 .uno%3ATableSelectAll 2b Click to select all sheets in the document.
17 .uno%3ATableDeselectAll 47 Click to deselect all sheets in the document, except the current sheet.
18 FID_TAB_SET_TAB_BG_COLOR 3e Opens a window where you can assign a colour to the sheet tab.
f .uno%3AFileMenu 5c These commands apply to the current document, open a new document, or close the application.
f .uno%3AEditMenu 4d This menu contains commands for editing the contents of the current document.
f .uno%3AViewMenu 52 This menu contains commands for controlling the on-screen display of the document.
15 .uno%3ANormalViewMode 26 Displays the normal view of the sheet.
11 .uno%3AInsertMenu 80 The Insert menu contains commands for inserting new elements, such as cells, rows, sheets and cell names into the current sheet.
11 .uno%3AFormatMenu 6c The Format menu contains commands for formatting selected cells, objects, and cell content in your document.
10 .uno%3AToolsMenu 78 The Tools menu contains commands to check spelling, to trace sheet references, to find mistakes and to define scenarios.
11 .uno%3AWindowList 43 Contains commands for manipulating and displaying document windows.
f .uno%3ADataMenu ad Use the Data menu commands to edit the data in the current sheet. You can define ranges, sort and filter the data, calculate results, outline data, and create a pivot table.
11 .uno%3AAlignBlock 43 Aligns the contents of the cell to the left and right cell borders.
16 .uno%3AParaRightToLeft 53 The text formatted in a complex text layout language is entered from right to left.
1c .uno%3AAlignHorizontalCenter 2e Horizontally centres the contents of the cell.
10 .uno%3AAlignLeft 2c Aligns the contents of the cell to the left.
17 .uno%3ANumberFormatDate 2e Applies the date format to the selected cells.
11 .uno%3AAlignRight 2d Aligns the contents of the cell to the right.
16 .uno%3AParaLeftToRight 27 The text is entered from left to right.
1d .uno%3ANumberFormatScientific 35 Applies the exponential format to the selected cells.
13 HID_SC_TOOLBOX_DRAW 76 The Drawing Object Properties Bar for objects that you select in the sheet contains formatting and alignment commands.
15 HID_SC_TOOLBOX_DRTEXT a4 The Text Formatting Bar that is displayed when the cursor is in a text object, such as a text frame or a drawing object, contains formatting and alignment commands.
15 .uno%3AFocusInputLine 1f Use this bar to enter formulae.
12 SC_HID_SC_INPUTWIN 1f Use this bar to enter formulae.
15 SC_HID_SC_WIN_PREVIEW 46 The Page Preview Bar is displayed when you choose File - Page Preview.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
1e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CANCEL 46 Clicking Cancel closes a dialogue box without saving any changes made.
2c starmath%3APushButton%3ARID_SYMBOLDIALOG%3A2 49 Applies the modified or selected values without closing the dialogue box.
1c SFX2_HID_TABDLG_STANDARD_BTN 56 Resets the values visible in the dialogue box back to the default installation values.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER%3ARB_COPY_AREA 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
2f sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3ARB_ROWCELL 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
32 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ARB_COPY_AREA 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_CUSTOMSHOW%3ABTN_REMOVE 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDCANCEL 46 Clicking Cancel closes a dialogue box without saving any changes made.
2c sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_COPY%3ABTN_SET_DEFAULT 56 Resets the values visible in the dialogue box back to the default installation values.
31 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AREAS%3ARB_REPEATCOL 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFADLG_OPTIONS_TREE%3APB_BACK 40 Resets modified values back to the $[officename] default values.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DBWIZ_PREVIOUS 69 View the selections in the dialogue box made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_0_CMDPREV 69 View the selections in the dialogue box made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
39 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLROWNAMERANGES%3ABTN_REMOVE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
30 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_DBNAMES%3ABTN_REMOVE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_NEXT a4 Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialogue box settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
17 DBACCESS_HID_DBWIZ_NEXT a4 Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialogue box settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
31 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AREAS%3ARB_PRINTAREA 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
2e sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES%3ARB_ASSIGN 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
1e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CREATE 2a Applies all changes and closes the wizard.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3APB_DELABBREV 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_CANCEL 46 Clicking Cancel closes a dialogue box without saving any changes made.
1c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_NEXT a4 Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialogue box settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
1b CUI_HID_MEASURE_CTL_PREVIEW 2c Displays a preview of the current selection.
2e sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES%3ABTN_REMOVE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
31 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AREAS%3ARB_REPEATROW 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND3_2 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_BIB_BASE%3APB_DELETE 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
2b sw%3APushButton%3ATP_STD_FONT%3APB_STANDARD 56 Resets the values visible in the dialogue box back to the default installation values.
11 WIZARDS_HID0_NEXT a4 Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialogue box settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDNEXT a4 Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialogue box settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND2_1 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SOLVER%3ARB_FORMULACELL 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDCANCEL 46 Clicking Cancel closes a dialogue box without saving any changes made.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDPREV 69 View the selections in the dialogue box made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_NEXT a4 Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialogue box settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
33 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AUTOFORMAT%3ABTN_REMOVE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
3b sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER%3ARB_CRITERIA_AREA 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
15 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDPREV 69 View the selections in the dialogue box made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
19 SFX2_HID_TABDLG_RESET_BTN a3 Resets changes made to the current tab to those applicable when this dialogue box was opened. A confirmation query does not appear when you close the dialogue box.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND1_2 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
43 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3APB_DELETE_REPLACE 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ARB_DEST_AREA 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3APB_DELDOUBLECAPS 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
2f sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3ARB_COLCELL 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_PREVIOUS 69 View the selections in the dialogue box made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_CANCEL 46 Clicking Cancel closes a dialogue box without saving any changes made.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_PREVIOUS 69 View the selections in the dialogue box made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_DEL 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
13 WIZARDS_HID0_CANCEL 46 Clicking Cancel closes a dialogue box without saving any changes made.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_CANCEL 46 Clicking Cancel closes a dialogue box without saving any changes made.
34 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ABTN_REMOVE 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
17 SVX_HID_GALLERY_PREVIEW 2c Displays a preview of the current selection.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3ARB_FORMULARANGE 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_0_CMDCANCEL 46 Clicking Cancel closes a dialogue box without saving any changes made.
1c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BACK 69 View the selections in the dialogue box made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
30 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SOLVER%3ARB_VARCELL 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
30 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_DBNAMES%3ARB_DBAREA 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDCANCEL 46 Clicking Cancel closes a dialogue box without saving any changes made.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLROWNAMERANGES%3ARB_DATA 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
33 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ABTN_REMOVE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND1_1 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ARB_DATA_AREA 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLROWNAMERANGES%3ARB_AREA 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDFINISH 2a Applies all changes and closes the wizard.
36 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT%3ARB_OUTAREA 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND2_2 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND3_1 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_DLGS%3ARID_PB_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
11 WIZARDS_HID0_PREV 69 View the selections in the dialogue box made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_MULTIPATH%3ABTN_DEL_MULTIPATH 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDNEXT a4 Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialogue box settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
1d SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_BACKGROUND 35 Inserts the selected picture as a background graphic.
19 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_PASTE 46 Inserts the element that you moved to the clipboard into the document.
1a SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_RENAME 28 Enables a selected object to be renamed.
1f SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN_OBJECT 3f Use the Open command to open the selected object in a new task.
1f SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN_FOLDER 3f Use the Open command to open the selected object in a new task.
18 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_COPY 2d Copies the selected element to the clipboard.
19 SVX_HID_GALLERY_ACTUALIZE 39 Updates the view in the window or in the selected object.
18 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN 3f Use the Open command to open the selected object in a new task.
1b SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_DESTROY 99 Deletes the current selection. If multiple objects are selected, all will be deleted. In most cases, a security query appears before objects are deleted.
1c SFX2_HID_DID_SAVE_PACKED_XML 50 By default, $[officename] loads and saves files in the OpenDocument file format.
11 .uno%3AActiveHelp 53 Enables the display of a brief description of menus and icons at the mouse pointer.
e .uno%3AHelpTip 4f Enables the display of icon names at the mouse pointer and other Help contents.
13 .uno%3AHelperDialog 9f Allows you to activate the automatic Help Agent. You can also activate the Help Agent through $[officename] - General - Help Agent in the Options dialogue box.
2f svtools%3AListBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ALB_COLOR_DEPTH 43 Select the colour depth from 8 bit greyscale or 24 bit true colour.
34 svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ANF_COMPRESSION df Sets the compression and quality for the export. Choose from a low quality with smallest file size, up to a high quality and largest file size. A high compression means a low quality, a low compression means a high quality.
33 svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ANF_RESOLUTION 4b Enter the image resolution. Select the measurement units from the list box.
2e svtools%3AListBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ALB_RESOLUTION 4b Enter the image resolution. Select the measurement units from the list box.
2d svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_EXPORT%3AMF_SIZEX 14 Specifies the width.
3c svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_EPS_COMPRESSION_NONE 32 Specifies that you do not wish to use compression.
2f svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ACB_INTERLACED 40 Specifies whether the graphic is to be saved in interlaced mode.
36 svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ACB_SAVE_TRANSPARENCY bc Specifies whether to save the background of the picture as transparent. Only objects will be visible in the GIF image. Use the Colour Replacer to set the transparent colour in the picture.
2e svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_BINARY 52 Exports the file in binary format. The resulting file is smaller than a text file.
32 svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_EPS_LEVEL2 74 Select the Level 2 option if your output device supports coloured bitmaps, palette graphics and compressed graphics.
39 svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_EPS_COLOR_FORMAT1 1b Exports the file in colour.
29 svtools%3AListBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ALB_SIZEX 20 Specifies the measurement units.
2d svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_EXPORT%3AMF_SIZEY 15 Specifies the height.
3b svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_EPS_COMPRESSION_LZW 66 LZW compression is the compression of a file into a smaller file using a table-based lookup algorithm.
35 svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ACB_EPS_PREVIEW_EPSI b6 Specifies whether a monochrome preview graphic in EPSI format is exported together with the PostScript file. This format only contains printable characters from the 7-bit ASCII code.
2c svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_TEXT 57 Exports the file in ASCII text format. The resulting file is larger than a binary file.
35 svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ACB_EPS_PREVIEW_TIFF 6a Specifies whether a preview image is exported in the TIFF format together with the actual PostScript file.
31 svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ACB_RLE_ENCODING 36 Applies RLE (Run Length Encoding) to the BMP graphics.
39 svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_EPS_COLOR_FORMAT2 24 Exports the file in greyscale tones.
32 svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_EPS_LEVEL1 8c Compression is not available at this level. Select the Level 1 option if your PostScript printer does not offer the capabilities of Level 2.
2c sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ALB_FONT 41 Select the character set from the options used for import/export.
31 sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3AED_FIELDSEP 41 Choose or enter the field delimiter, which separates data fields.
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ACB_FIXEDWIDTH 2b Exports all data fields with a fixed width.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ACB_SAVESHOWN bd Enabled by default, data will be saved as displayed, including applied number formats. If this check box is not marked, raw data content will be saved, as in older versions of the software.
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ACB_QUOTEALL c0 Exports all text cells with leading and trailing quote characters as set in the Text delimiter box. If not checked, only those text cells get quoted that contain the Field delimiter character.
30 sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3AED_TEXTSEP 44 Choose or enter the text delimiter, which encloses every data field.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ADDLB_FONT 2c Specifies the character set for text export.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ALB_CHARSET 3c Specifies the character set to be used in the imported file.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACB_ASONCE 3e Combines consecutive delimiters and removes blank data fields.
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACB_QUOTED_AS_TEXT b2 When this option is enabled, fields or cells whose values are quoted in their entirety (the first and last characters of the value equal the text delimiter) are imported as text.
29 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ALB_TYPE1 5f Choose a column in the preview window and select the data type to be applied the imported data.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_COMMA 30 Separates data delimited by commas into columns.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ALB_CUSTOMLANG 2f Determines how the number strings are imported.
2c sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACB_TEXTSEP 5c Select a character to delimit text data. You can can also enter a character in the text box.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_SPACE 30 Separates data delimited by spaces into columns.
2d sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ARB_FIXED 45 Separates fixed-width data (equal number of characters) into columns.
2f sc%3ANumericField%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ANF_AT_ROW 35 Specifies the row where you want to start the import.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_OTHER 88 Separates data into columns using the custom separator that you specify. Note: The custom separator must also be contained in your data.
3a sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACB_DETECT_SPECIAL_NUMBER 9e When this option is enabled, Calc will automatically detect all number formats, including special number formats such as dates, time, and scientific notation.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ARB_SEPARATED 27 Select the separator used in your data.
29 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_TAB 2e Separates data delimited by tabs into columns.
22 sc%3AModalDialog%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII 2b Sets the import options for delimited data.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_SEMICOLON 34 Separates data delimited by semicolons into columns.
26 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3AED_OTHER 88 Separates data into columns using the custom separator that you specify. Note: The custom separator must also be contained in your data.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS%3ARBT_SCALE 3f Specifies whether to distribute the printout on multiple pages.
25 sd%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS 6a The Warning Print Options dialogue box appears when the page setup does not match the defined print range.
2f sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS%3ARBT_CUT 72 Specifies that anything extending beyond the maximum print range will be cut off and not included in the printing.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS%3ARBT_POSTER 3f Specifies whether to distribute the printout on multiple pages.
2b sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ARB_LF 2d Produces a "Linefeed" as the paragraph break.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ALB_LANGUAGE 78 Specifies the language of the text, if this has not already been defined. This setting is only available when importing.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ALB_FONT 93 By setting a default font, you specify that the text should be displayed in a specific font. The default fonts can only be selected when importing.
2d sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ARB_CRLF 4a Produces a "Carriage Return" and a "Linefeed". This option is the default.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ALB_CHARSET 3d Specifies the character set of the file for export or import.
2b sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ARB_CR 34 Produces a "Carriage Return" as the paragraph break.
1b SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_ADD_LINK 27 Inserts the selected graphic as a link.
16 SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_ADD 49 Inserts a copy of the selected graphic object directly into the document.
19 SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_DELETE 30 Deletes the selected graphic after confirmation.
1a SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_ADDMENU 42 Defines how a selected graphic object is inserted into a document.
15 SVX_HID_GALLERY_TITLE 2d Assigns a title to a selected Gallery object.
1a SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_PREVIEW 32 The Preview command displays the selected graphic.
1d SW_HID_MN_READONLY_GRAPHICOFF 32 Sets all graphics in the document to be invisible.
1e SW_HID_MN_READONLY_LOADGRAPHIC 64 If you have deactivated the graphics display, choose the Load Graphics command to make them visible.
1b SW_HID_MN_READONLY_COPYLINK 36 Copies the link at the mouse pointer to the clipboard.
21 SW_HID_MN_READONLY_SAVEBACKGROUND 30 Allows you to save the background of a Web page.
1e SW_HID_MN_READONLY_SAVEGRAPHIC 43 Opens a dialogue box with which you can save the selected graphics.
1c SW_HID_MN_READONLY_PLUGINOFF 1b Disables inserted plug-ins.
1e SW_HID_MN_READONLY_COPYGRAPHIC 2b Copies a selected graphic to the clipboard.
22 CUI_HID_GALLERY_PROPERTIES_GENERAL 1f Displays the name of the theme.
10 .uno%3AAddDirect 25 Creates a new $[officename] document.
19 private%3Afactory%2Fscalc 38 Creates a new spreadsheet document ($[officename] Calc).
28 private%3Afactory%2Fsimpress%3Fslot=6686 6e Creates a new presentation document ($[officename] Impress). The Presentation Wizard dialogue box will appear.
21 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%2Fweb 1c Creates a new HTML document.
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21052 9c Opens the Business Cards dialogue box in which you can set the options for your business cards, and then creates a new text document ($[officename] Writer).
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21051 9b Opens the Labels dialogue box in which you can set the options for your labels, and then creates a new text document for the labels ($[officename] Writer).
2c private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%2FGlobalDocument 1e Creates a new master document.
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21053 1e Creates a new XForms document.
1b private%3Afactory%2Fswriter 33 Creates a new text document ($[officename] Writer).
2b private%3Afactory%2Fsdatabase%3FInteractive 34 Opens the Database Wizard to create a database file.
19 private%3Afactory%2Fsdraw 34 Creates a new drawing document ($[officename] Draw).
1b SFX2_HID_TBXCONTROL_FILENEW 52 Creates a new $[officename] document. Click the arrow to select the document type.
2f service%3Acom.sun.star.sdb.DatabaseWizardDialog 34 Opens the Database Wizard to create a database file.
d .uno%3ANewDoc 57 If you want to create a document from a template, choose New - Templates and Documents.
19 private%3Afactory%2Fsmath 34 Creates a new formula document ($[officename] Math).
b slot%3A5500 4d Creates a new document using an existing template or opens a sample document.
1e SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_DOCINFO 3e Displays the properties for the selected template or document.
1e SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PREVIEW 38 Allows you to preview the selected template or document.
1c SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PRINT 29 Prints the selected template or document.
1b SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PREV 28 Moves up one folder level, if available.
1c SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_FILEVIEW c7 Lists the available templates or documents for the selected category. Select a template or document and, then click Open. To preview the document, click the Preview button above the box on the right.
3d svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOCTEMPLATE%3ABTN_DOCTEMPLATE_EDIT 28 Opens the selected template for editing.
1c SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_ICONCTRL b3 Categories are shown in the box on the left side of the Templates and Documents dialogue box. Click a category to display the files associated with that category in the Title box.
3f svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOCTEMPLATE%3ABTN_DOCTEMPLATE_MANAGE 3b Adds, removes, or rearranges templates or sample documents.
1b SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_BACK 36 Moves back to the previous window in the dialogue box.
13 .uno%3AInsertLabels 43 Allows you to create labels. Labels are created in a text document.
13 SW_HID_LABEL_INSERT 23 Creates a new document for editing.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABOX_TYPE eb Select the size format that you want to use. The available formats depend on the brand on what you selected in the Brand list. If you want to use a custom label format, select [User], and then click the Format tab to define the format.
2d sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3AEDT_WRITING 5a Enter the text that you want to appear on the label. You can also insert a database field.
25 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABOX_ADDR 66 Creates a label with your return address. Text that is currently in the Label text box is overwritten.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ALB_DATABASE 4b Select the database that you want to use as the data source for your label.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABOX_MAKE 2f Select the brand of paper that you want to use.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ALB_DBFIELD 86 Select the database field that you want, and then click the arrow to the left of this box to insert the field into the Label text box.
29 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABTN_SHEET 23 Prints labels on individual sheets.
28 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABTN_CONT 22 Prints labels on continuous paper.
2a sw%3AImageButton%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABTN_INSERT 86 Select the database field that you want, and then click the arrow to the left of this box to insert the field into the Label text box.
e SW_HID_LAB_LAB 3f Specify the label text and choose the paper size for the label.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ALB_TABLE 55 Select the database table containing the field(s) that you want to use in your label.
28 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_LEFT a3 Displays the distance from the left edge of the page to the left edge of the first label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here.
28 sw%3AComboBox%3ADLG_SAVE_LABEL%3ACB_MAKE 22 Enter or select the desired brand.
26 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3APB_SAVE 30 Saves the current label or business card format.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_WIDTH 6f Displays the width for the label or the business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_SAVE_LABEL%3AED_TYPE 1d Enter or select a label type.
e SW_HID_LAB_FMT 1d Set paper formatting options.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_UPPER 98 Displays distance from the top edge of the page to the top of the first label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_VDIST c8 Displays the distance between the upper edge of a label or a business card and the upper edge of the label or the business card directly below. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here.
2a sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_HEIGHT 6c Displays the height for the label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here.
2c sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_COLUMNS 59 Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to span the width of the page.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_HDIST 8b Displays the distance between the left edges of adjacent labels or business cards. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here.
29 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_ROWS 5a Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to span the height of the page.
28 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3AFLD_COL 59 Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to have in a row on your page.
28 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3AFLD_ROW 58 Enter the number of rows of labels or business cards that you want to have on your page.
2a sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3ABTN_SINGLE 31 Prints a single label or business card on a page.
28 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3ACB_SYNCHRON af Allows you to edit a single label or business card and updates the contents of the remaining labels or business cards on the page when you click the Synchronise Labels button.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_SYNC_BTN%3ABTN_SYNC 71 Copies the contents of the top left label or business card to the remaining labels or business cards on the page.
28 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3ABTN_PAGE 30 Creates a full page of labels or business cards.
2b sw%3APushButton%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3ABTN_PRTSETUP 25 Opens the Printer Setup dialogue box.
e SW_HID_LAB_PRT 6f Sets additional options for your labels or business cards, including text synchronisation and printer settings.
19 .uno%3AInsertBusinessCard 2a Design and create your own business cards.
1d SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_CONT 2a Prints business cards on continuous paper.
1e SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_SHEET 2b Prints business cards on individual sheets.
1d SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_TYPE dd Select the size format that you want to use. The available formats depend on what you selected in the Brand list. If you want to use a custom size format, select [User], and then click the Format tab to define the format.
1e SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_BRAND 2f Select the brand of paper that you want to use.
1c SW_HID_BUSINESS_CARD_CONTENT 67 Select a business card category in AutoText - Section box, and then click a layout in the Content list.
35 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_VISITING_CARDS%3ALB_AUTO_TEXT_GROUP 4d Select a business card category, and then click a layout in the Content list.
2b sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_PROFESSION 23 Enter the title of your profession.
2b sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_SHORTCUT_2 4b Enter the initials of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_MOBILE 23 Enter your mobile telephone number.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_NAME_2 4a Enter the surname of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_PHONE 21 Enter your home telephone number.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_STATE 30 Enter the name of the country in which you live.
2c sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_FIRSTNAME_2 4b Enter the forename of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_WWW 2c Enter the address of your Internet homepage.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_WWW 36 Enter the address of your company's Internet homepage.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_MOBILE 23 Enter your mobile telephone number.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_SLOGAN 21 Enter the slogan of your company.
2a sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_COMP_EXT 21 Enter additional company details.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_PHONE 25 Enter your business telephone number.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_STATE 3d Enter the name of the country where your business is located.
49 fpicker%3AImageButton%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_NEWFOLDER 18 Creates a new directory.
34 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_ALL 23 Click to delete all selected files.
1b SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_INSERT_BTN 4b Inserts the selected file into the current document at the cursor position.
18 SVT_HID_FILEOPEN_VERSION 5e If there are multiple versions of the selected file, select the version that you want to open.
19 SVT_HID_FILEOPEN_READONLY 21 Opens the file in read-only mode.
47 fpicker%3AMenuButton%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_STANDARD 31 Displays the files in the default user directory.
1c SVT_HID_FILEVIEW_MENU_RENAME 3f To rename a file, right-click the file, and then choose Rename.
41 fpicker%3AMenuButton%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_UP 61 Move up one directory in the directory hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level directories.
20 SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_FOLDER_FILENAME 7a Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL that starts with the protocol name ftp, http, or https.
43 fpicker%3AListBox%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ALB_EXPLORERFILE_FILETYPE 7b Select the file type that you want to open, or select All Files (*) to display a list of all of the files in the directory.
34 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_YES 42 Click to delete the file with the name shown in this dialogue box.
23 FPICKER_HID_FILEDLG_AUTOCOMPLETEBOX 7a Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL that starts with the protocol name ftp, http, or https.
b .uno%3AOpen 18 Opens or imports a file.
1c SVT_HID_FILEVIEW_MENU_DELETE 3f To delete a file, right-click the file, and then choose Delete.
19 SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_STANDARD 44 Displays the files and directories in the directory that you are in.
33 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_NO 4e Click to cancel deletion of the file with the name shown in this dialogue box.
18 SVT_HID_EXPLORERDLG_FILE 18 Opens or imports a file.
19 SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_PATH_BTN 1b Selects the indicated path.
1e SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_PATH_FILENAME 27 Enter or select the path from the list.
2e uui%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTER_SELECT%3ALB_FILTERS 3c Select the import filter for the file that you want to open.
f .uno%3ACloseDoc 38 Closes the current document without exiting the program.
b .uno%3ASave 1b Saves the current document.
19 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_FILETYPE 3c Select the file format for the document that you are saving.
21 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_DEFAULTDIRECTORY 31 Displays the files in the default user directory.
17 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_DOSAVE f Saves the file.
18 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_FILEURL 42 Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL
1a SVT_HID_FILESAVE_SELECTION 9f Exports only the selected graphic objects in %PRODUCTNAME Draw and Impress to another format. If this check box is not marked, the entire document is exported.
18 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_LEVELUP 61 Move up one directory in the directory hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level directories.
20 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_CUSTOMIZEFILTER 4e Allows you to set the spreadsheet saving options for some types of data files.
21 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_SAVEWITHPASSWORD 57 Protects the file with a password that must be entered before a user can open the file.
d .uno%3ASaveAs 5f Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
d SID_SAVEASDOC 5f Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
17 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_DIALOG 5f Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
20 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_CREATEDIRECTORY 18 Creates a new directory.
19 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_FILEVIEW 44 Displays the files and directories in the directory that you are in.
f .uno%3AExportTo 5b Saves the current document with a different name and format to a location that you specify.
1c .uno%3ASetDocumentProperties 78 Displays the properties for the current file, including statistics such as word count and the date the file was created.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODESC%3AED_THEMA 61 Enter a subject for the document. You can use a subject to group documents with similar contents.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODESC%3AED_TITLE 1f Enter a title for the document.
2a sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODESC%3AED_KEYWORDS ad Enter the words that you want to use to index the content of your document. Keywords must be separated by commas. A keyword can contain white space characters or semicolons.
32 sfx2%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODESC%3AED_COMMENT 2d Enter comments to help identify the document.
14 SFX2_HID_DOCINFODESC 34 Contains descriptive information about the document.
2e sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_DOCINFODOC%3ABTN_DELETE a3 Resets the editing time to zero, the creation date to the current date and time, and the version number to 1. The modification and printing dates are also deleted.
2a sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODOC%3AED_FILE_NAME 17 Displays the file name.
31 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_DOCINFODOC%3ACB_USE_USERDATA 92 Saves the user's full name with the file. You can edit the name by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data.
13 SFX2_HID_DOCINFODOC 32 Contains basic information about the current file.
31 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_CUSTOMPROPERTIES%3ABTN_ADD 2e Click to add a new row to the Properties list.
1e SFX2_HID_CTRL_CUSTOMPROPERTIES ad Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFOUSER%3AED_INFO1 ad Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats.
14 SFX2_HID_DOCINFOUSER 40 Allows you to assign custom information fields to your document.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFOUSER%3AED_INFO4 ad Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFOUSER%3AED_INFO3 ad Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFOUSER%3AED_INFO2 ad Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats.
f SW_HID_DOC_STAT 29 Displays statistics for the current file.
1e sc%3ATabPage%3ARID_SCPAGE_STAT 29 Displays statistics for the current file.
16 SFX2_HID_DOCINFORELOAD 37 Sets the refresh and redirect options for an HTML page.
32 sfx2%3ANumericField%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3AED_RELOAD 40 Enter the number of seconds to wait before the page is reloaded.
33 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3APB_BROWSEURL 3b Locate the file that you want to open, and then click Open.
37 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3ARB_NOAUTOUPDATE 24 User must refresh the page manually.
38 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3ARB_FORWARDUPDATE 5c Loads a page that you specify after the number of seconds that you enter in the seconds box.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3AED_URL 38 Enter the URL address of the file that you want to open.
33 sfx2%3ANumericField%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3AED_FORWARD 57 Enter the number of seconds to wait before redirecting the browser to a different file.
2d sfx2%3AComboBox%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3ACB_FRAME 6f If the current HTML page uses frames, select the name of the target frame where you want the file to be loaded.
37 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3ARB_RELOADUPDATE 87 Reloads the HTML page after the number of seconds that you enter in the seconds box. To observe the result, open the page in a browser.
28 HID_SECURITYTAB_CONFIRM_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN 16 Re-enter the password.
2a HID_SECURITYTAB_CONFIRM_PASSWORD_TO_MODIFY 16 Re-enter the password.
1f SFX2_HID_SECURITYTAB_PROTECTION d7 Protects the change recording state with a password. If change recording is protected for the current document, the button is named Unprotect. Click Unprotect and type the correct password to disable the protection.
22 HID_SECURITYTAB_PASSWORD_TO_MODIFY 2e Type a password. A password is case-sensitive.
30 HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN 2e Type a password. A password is case-sensitive.
3a HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_CONFIRM_PASSWORD_TO_MODIFY 16 Re-enter the password.
23 SFX2_HID_SECURITYTAB_RECORD_CHANGES 50 Select to enable recording changes. This is the same as Edit - Changes - Record.
38 HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_CONFIRM_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN 16 Re-enter the password.
2d HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_FILE_READONLY 42 Select to allow this document to be opened in read-only mode only.
20 HID_SECURITYTAB_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN 2e Type a password. A password is case-sensitive.
32 HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_PASSWORD_TO_MODIFY 2e Type a password. A password is case-sensitive.
27 SFX2_HID_SECURITYTAB_OPEN_FILE_READONLY 42 Select to allow this document to be opened in read-only mode only.
13 .uno%3ATemplateMenu 5a Lets you organise and edit your templates, as well as save the current file as a template.
17 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_PRINT 47 Prints the name and properties of the styles that are used in the file.
1f SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_PRINTER_SETUP 3f Changes the printer and its settings for the selected document.
2b sfx2%3AMenuButton%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ABTN_EDIT 48 Contains commands for managing and editing your templates and documents.
18 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_DELETE 1e Deletes the current selection.
1b SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_COPY_FROM 98 Imports an additional template. To import a template, select a template folder from the list, click the Command button, and then select Import template.
2c sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ABTN_FILES 4d Locate a file that you want to add to the document list, and then click Open.
19 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_COPY_TO 1e Exports the selected template.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ALB_LEFT_TYP 5a Select Templates or Documents to change the contents that are displayed in the list above.
1b SFX2_HID_CTL_ORGANIZER_LEFT 9d Displays the available template categories or opened $[officename] files. To change the contents of the list, select Templates or Documents in the box below.
15 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_NEW 20 Creates a new template category.
2c sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ALB_RIGHT_TYP 5a Select Templates or Documents to change the contents that are displayed in the list above.
21 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_STDTEMPLATE_DEL 5c Select a $[officename] document type to reset the default template to the original template.
16 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_EDIT 28 Opens the selected template for editing.
1c SFX2_HID_CTL_ORGANIZER_RIGHT 9d Displays the available template categories or opened $[officename] files. To change the contents of the list, select Templates or Documents in the box below.
10 .uno%3AOrganizer 6c Opens the Template Management dialogue box in which you can organise templates and define default templates.
36 sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ABTN_ADDRESSTEMPLATE 4d Locate a file that you want to add to the document list, and then click Open.
18 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_RESCAN 22 Updates the contents of the lists.
21 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_STDTEMPLATE_ADD 71 Uses the selected template as the default template when you create a new $[officename] document of the same type.
22 SVT_HID_ADDRTEMPL_FIELD_ASSIGNMENT 4e Select the field in the data table that corresponds to the address book entry.
35 svtools%3AComboBox%3ADLG_ADDRESSBOOKSOURCE%3ACB_TABLE 2c Select the data table for your address book.
49 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_ADDRESSBOOKSOURCE%3APB_ADMINISTATE_DATASOURCES 36 Add a new data source to the Address Book Source list.
3a svtools%3AComboBox%3ADLG_ADDRESSBOOKSOURCE%3ACB_DATASOURCE 2d Select the data source for your address book.
18 .uno%3AAddressBookSource 45 Edit the field assignments and the data source for your address book.
2e sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ABT_EDIT 28 Opens the selected template for editing.
28 sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3AED_NAME 1e Enter a name for the template.
15 .uno%3ASaveAsTemplate 29 Saves the current document as a template.
2e sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ALB_SECTION 34 Select a category in which to save the new template.
32 sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ABT_ORGANIZE 5d Opens the Template Management dialogue box in which you can organise or create new templates.
32 sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ALB_STYLESHEETS 28 Lists the available template categories.
13 .uno%3AOpenTemplate 44 Opens a dialogue box in which you can select a template for editing.
32 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AJobPage%3AProperties 70 Opens the printer properties dialogue box. The printer properties vary according to the printer that you select.
35 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ASlidesPerPage%3AListBox 29 Select how many slides to print per page.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintDateTime%3ACheckBox 35 Specifies whether to print the current date and time.
33 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AJobPage%3APrinterList f9 The list box shows the installed printers. Click the printer to use for the current print job. Click the Printer details button to see some information about the selected printer. Click the Properties button to change some of the printer properties.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintHidden%3ACheckBox 3f Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden.
32 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AOptPage%3ASingleJobs 68 Check to not rely on the printer to create collated copies but create a print job for each copy instead.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A2 46 Prints only the selected area(s) or object(s) in the current document.
3a .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ASlidesPerPageOrder%3AListBox 32 Specify how to arrange slides on the printed page.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A1 42 Prints only the pages or slides that you specify in the Pages box.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A1 44 Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing.
2f .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3ARowsBox 16 Select number of rows.
20 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AOK 83 Prints the current document, selection, or the pages that you specify. You can also set the print options for the current document.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspectInclude%3AListBox 2a Select which pages of a brochure to print.
30 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3AOrderBox 2e Select order in which pages are to be printed.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A2 2e Specifies to print colours as black and white.
2e .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AJobPage%3ACopies 32 Enter the number of copies that you want to print.
35 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3APageMarginBox 3e Select margin between individual pages on each sheet of paper.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A0 3b Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size.
35 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3APagesPerSheet 28 Print multiple pages per sheet of paper.
2f .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ABorder%3ACheckBox 3a Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPageBackground%3ACheckBox 7c Specifies whether to print colours and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background).
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintBlackFonts%3ACheckBox 30 Specifies whether to always print text in black.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPaperFromSetup%3ACheckBox 86 For printers with multiple trays this option specifies whether the paper tray used is specified by the system settings of the printer.
3d .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintTextPlaceholder%3ACheckBox 78 Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspect%3ACheckBox 44 Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format.
34 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintName%3ACheckBox 37 Specifies whether to print the page name of a document.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintHiddenText%3ACheckBox 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A3 a8 Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper.
c HID_PRINTDLG 83 Prints the current document, selection, or the pages that you specify. You can also set the print options for the current document.
2f .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AJobPage%3ACollate 32 Preserves the page order of the original document.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 182 If this option is enabled automatically inserted blank pages are printed. This is best if you are printing double-sided. For example, in a book, a "chapter" paragraph style has been set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to print that even numbered page.
32 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3AColumnsBox 19 Select number of columns.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsIncludeEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 53 If checked, empty pages that have no cell contents or draw objects are not printed.
40 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPicturesAndObjects%3ACheckBox 5d Specifies whether the graphics and drawings or OLE objects of your text document are printed.
31 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3ABorderBox 28 Check to draw a border around each page.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A0 2c Specify how to scale slides in the printout.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintControls%3ACheckBox 4b Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3APagesPerSheetBox 32 Select how many pages to print per sheet of paper.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A1 28 Specifies to print colours as greyscale.
2e .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageRange%3AEdit c3 To print a range of pages, use a format like 3-6. To print single pages, use a format like 7;9;11. You can print a combination of page ranges and single pages, by using a format like 3-6;8;10;12.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A1 3c Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout.
31 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ATitleRow%3ACheckBox 53 Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3AOrientationBox 24 Select the orientation of the paper.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A0 27 Specifies to print in original colours.
c .uno%3APrint 83 Prints the current document, selection, or the pages that you specify. You can also set the print options for the current document.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A2 83 Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer so they fit on the paper in the printer.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AListBox 29 Specify where to print comments (if any).
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A0 1b Prints the entire document.
31 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AOptPage%3AToReverse 26 Check to print pages in reverse order.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintScale%3ANumericField 4a Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified factor.
3d .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AFixedText 29 Specify where to print comments (if any).
34 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AFormulaText%3ACheckBox 5f Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A2 4a Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified factor.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspectRTL%3AListBox 5e For brochure printing, you can select a left-to-right order of pages or a right-to-left order.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3ASheetMarginBox 37 Select margin between the printed pages and paper edge.
2e .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AOptPage%3AToFile 29 Prints to a file instead of to a printer.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintLeftRightPages%3AListBox 2d Specify which pages to include in the output.
32 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AJobPage%3ADetailsBtn 37 Show/Hide detailed information of the selected printer.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageContentType%3AListBox 35 Select which parts of the document should be printed.
32 svtools%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRNSETUPDLG 34 Select the default printer for the current document.
13 .uno%3APrinterSetup 34 Select the default printer for the current document.
39 svtools%3AListBox%3ADLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRNSETUPDLG%3ALB_NAMES 7a Lists the installed printers on your operating system. To change the default printer, select a printer name from the list.
42 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRNSETUPDLG%3ABTN_PROPERTIES 4f Changes the printer settings of your operating system for the current document.
16 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsMS 80 Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The Microsoft file format is used.
11 .uno%3ASendToMenu 3f Sends a copy of the current document to different applications.
17 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsOOo 83 Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The OpenDocument file format is used.
f .uno%3ASendMail 7e Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The current file format is used.
28 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_CONTROL_FILEVIEW 74 Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
13 .uno%3ANewGlobalDoc b1 Creates a master document from the current Writer document. A new sub-document is created at each occurrence of a chosen paragraph style or outline level in the source document.
28 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_LISTBOX_TEMPLATE 74 Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
19 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_TEMPLATE 74 Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
24 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_EDIT_FILEURL 74 Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
b .uno%3AQuit 47 Closes all $[officename] programs and prompts you to save your changes.
e .uno%3ASaveAll 2b Saves all modified $[officename] documents.
14 .uno%3AVersionDialog 89 Saves and organises multiple versions of the current document in the same file. You can also open, delete, and compare previous versions.
2c sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_DELETE 1d Deletes the selected version.
21 sfx2%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_VERSIONS 85 Lists the existing versions of the current document, the date and the time they were created, the author and the associated comments.
2a sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_OPEN 31 Opens the selected version in a read-only window.
2d sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_COMPARE 33 Compare the changes that were made in each version.
31 sfx2%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_COMMENTS%3AME_VERSIONS 83 Enter a comment here when you are saving a new version. If you clicked Show to open this dialogue box, you cannot edit the comment.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3ACB_SAVEONCLOSE 77 If you have made changes to your document, $[officename] automatically saves a new version when you close the document.
2a sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_SAVE ae Saves the current state of the document as a new version. If you want, you can also enter comments in the Insert Version Comment dialogue box before you save the new version.
2a sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_VIEW 35 Displays the entire comment for the selected version.
15 .uno%3ARecentFileList 53 Lists the most recently opened files. To open a file from the list, click its name.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_UNDO a1 Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar.
b .uno%3AUndo a1 Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar.
b .uno%3ARedo 9a Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_REDO 9a Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar.
d .uno%3ARepeat 47 Repeats the last command. This command is available in Writer and Calc.
13 .uno%3ARepeatAction 47 Repeats the last command. This command is available in Writer and Calc.
a .uno%3ACut 32 Removes and copies the selection to the clipboard.
b .uno%3ACopy 26 Copies the selection to the clipboard.
c .uno%3APaste 6f Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects.
17 SC_HID_SC_REPLCELLSWARN 6f Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects.
15 .uno%3AInsertContents 0 
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSNOTES 0 
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSOBJECTS 0 
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_MV_DOWN 0 
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_DIV 0 
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSATTRS 0 
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSDATETIME 0 
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSSTRINGS 0 
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_MV_NONE 0 
13 .uno%3APasteSpecial 5d Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_SKIP_EMPTY 0 
11 CUI_HID_PASTE_DLG 2e Displays the source of the clipboard contents.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_ADD 0 
15 .uno%3APasteClipboard 5d Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
30 cui%3AListBox%3AMD_PASTE_OBJECT%3ALB_INSERT_LIST 42 Select a format for the clipboard contents that you want to paste.
33 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_MV_RIGHT 0 
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_MUL 0 
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSNUMBERS 0 
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_NOOP 0 
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_TRANSPOSE 0 
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_SUB 0 
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_LINK 0 
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSFORMULAS 0 
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSALL 0 
10 .uno%3ASelectAll 46 Selects the entire content of the current file, frame, or text object.
d .uno%3ASelect 46 Selects the entire content of the current file, frame, or text object.
2e svx%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3AED_SEARCH 56 Enter the text that you want to search for, or select a previous search from the list.
34 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ALB_CALC_SEARCHIN 9b Searches for the characters that you specify in formulae and in fixed (not calculated) values. For example, you could look for formulae that contain 'SUM'.
2e svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_REGEXP 2b Allows you to use wildcards in your search.
34 svx%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ARB_CALC_ROWS 2c Searches from left to right across the rows.
2f svx%3AMoreButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_MORE 60 Shows more or fewer search options. Click this button again to hide the extended search options.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ACB_HALFFULLFORMS 40 Distinguishes between half-width and full-width character forms.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_ALL_SHEETS 43 Searches through all of the sheets in the current spreadsheet file.
31 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_SEARCH 63 Finds and selects the next occurrence of the text or format that you searching for in the document.
35 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_SEARCH_ALL 89 Finds and selects all instances of the text or the format that you are searching for in the document (only in Writer and Calc documents).
f .uno%3AFindText 50 Type the text to search in the current document. Press Enter to search the text.
17 .uno%3ASearchProperties 41 Searches for or replaces text or formats in the current document.
11 .uno%3ADownSearch 3b Click to search the next occurrence in downwards direction.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ACB_SOUNDSLIKECJK a1 Lets you specify the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. Mark this check box, and then click the ... button to specify the search options.
36 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_REPLACE_ALL 4f Replaces all of the occurrences of the text or format that you want to replace.
41 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_JAP_MATCH_FULL_HALF_WIDTH 40 Distinguishes between half-width and full-width character forms.
2d SVX%3ALISTBOX%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ALB_SEARCH 56 Enter the text that you want to search for, or select a previous search from the list.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3APB_SOUNDSLIKESETTINGS 43 Sets the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_SELECTIONS 29 Searches only the selected text or cells.
31 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_BACKWARDS 5d Search starts at the current cursor position and goes backwards to the beginning of the file.
13 .uno%3ASearchDialog 41 Searches for or replaces text or formats in the current document.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_LAYOUTS ce Searches for text formatted with the style that you specify. Mark this check box, and then select a style from the Search for list. To specify a replacement style, select a style from the Replace with list.
2f svx%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3AED_REPLACE 57 Enter the replacement text, or select a recent replacement text or style from the list.
37 svx%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ARB_CALC_COLUMNS 30 Searches from top to bottom through the columns.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_WHOLE_WORDS 48 Searches for whole words or cells that are identical to the search text.
32 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_REPLACE 66 Replaces the selected text or format that you searched for, and then searches for the next occurrence.
33 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_NOFORMAT 7b Click in the Search for or the Replace with box, and then click this button to remove the search criteria based on formats.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_JAP_SOUNDS_LIKE a1 Lets you specify the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. Mark this check box, and then click the ... button to specify the search options.
28 svx_ComboBox_RID_SVXDLG_SEARCH_ED_SEARCH 56 Enter the text that you want to search for, or select a previous search from the list.
f .uno%3AUpSearch 39 Click to search the next occurrence in upwards direction.
2e svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ALB_REPLACE 57 Enter the replacement text, or select a recent replacement text or style from the list.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_MATCH_CASE 3b Distinguishes between upper-case and lower-case characters.
35 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3APB_JAP_OPTIONS 43 Sets the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHSIMILARITY%3ANF_OTHER 48 Enter the number of characters in the search term that can be exchanged.
3d cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHSIMILARITY%3ANF_SHORTER 53 Enter the number of characters by which a word can be shorter than the search term.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHSIMILARITY%3ACB_RELAX 53 Searches for a term that matches any combination of the similarity search settings.
34 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3APB_SIMILARITY 2a Set the options for the similarity search.
1d CUI_HID_SEARCH_APPROXSETTINGS 88 Find terms that are similar to the Search for text. Mark this check box, and then click the ... button to define the similarity options.
3c cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHSIMILARITY%3ANF_LONGER 6e Enter the maximum number of characters by which a word can exceed the number of characters in the search term.
15 CUI_HID_SEARCH_APPROX 88 Find terms that are similar to the Search for text. Mark this check box, and then click the ... button to define the similarity options.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_SIMILARITY 88 Find terms that are similar to the Search for text. Mark this check box, and then click the ... button to define the similarity options.
1b CUI_HID_SEARCHATTR_CTL_ATTR 32 Select the attributes that you want to search for.
12 CUI_HID_SEARCHATTR 32 Select the attributes that you want to search for.
34 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_ATTRIBUTE 122 Choose the text attributes that you want to search for. For example, if you search for the Font attribute, all instances of text that do not use the default font are found. All text that has a directly coded font attribute, and all text where a style switches the font attribute, are found.
31 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_FORMAT 69 Finds specific text formatting features, such as font types, font effects, and text flow characteristics.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX18 be Edit the contents of the component selected in the Navigator list. If the selection is a file, the file is opened for editing. If the selection is an index, the index dialogue box is opened.
1c SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_NEW_FILE 27 Creates and inserts a new sub-document.
16 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPDATE 36 Click and choose the contents that you want to update.
16 SW_HID_GLBLTREEUPD_ALL 15 Updates all contents.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX19 36 Click and choose the contents that you want to update.
18 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_TEXT 93 Inserts a new paragraph in the master document in which you can enter text. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.
19 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_EDIT_LINK 32 Changes the link properties for the selected file.
17 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_IDX 41 Inserts an index or a table of contents into the master document.
18 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_LINK 12 Updates all links.
13 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_DEL 2e Deletes the selection from the Navigator list.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX20 45 Inserts a file, an index, or a new document into the master document.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX21 a7 Saves a copy of the contents of the linked files in the master document. This ensures that the current contents are available when the linked files cannot be accessed.
17 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_IDX 14 Updates all indexes.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX23 3c Moves the selection down one position in the Navigator list.
1e SW_HID_NAVIGATOR_GLOB_TREELIST b8 The Navigator lists the main components of the master document. If you rest the mouse pointer over a name of a sub-document in the list, the full path of the sub-document is displayed.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX22 3a Moves the selection up one position in the Navigator list.
18 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_FILE 3c Inserts one or more existing files into the master document.
14 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_EDIT be Edit the contents of the component selected in the Navigator list. If the selection is a file, the file is opened for editing. If the selection is an index, the index dialogue box is opened.
16 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INSERT 45 Inserts a file, an index, or a new document into the master document.
17 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_SEL 26 Updates the contents of the selection.
36 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3APB_UPDATE_NOW 7a Updates the selected link so that the most recently saved version of the linked file is displayed in the current document.
33 cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3ARB_MANUAL 37 Only updates the link when you click the Update button.
12 .uno%3AManageLinks c6 Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
36 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3APB_BREAK_LINK 99 Breaks the link between the source file and the current document. The most recently updated contents of the source file are kept in the current document.
36 cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3ARB_AUTOMATIC d1 Automatically updates the contents of the link when you open the file. Any changes made in the source file are then displayed in the file containing the link. Linked graphic files can only be updated manually.
10 .uno%3AEditLinks c6 Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
11 .uno%3ALinkDialog c6 Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
15 CUI_HID_LINKDLG_TABLB 71 Double-click a link in the list to open a file dialogue box in which you can select another object for this link.
39 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3APB_CHANGE_SOURCE 2d Change the source file for the selected link.
14 .uno%3APlugInsActive 123 Allows you to edit plug-ins in your file. Choose this command to enable or disable this feature. When enabled, a tick mark appears beside this command, and you find commands to edit the plug-in in its context menu. When disabled, you find commands to control the plug-in in its context menu.
13 .uno%3AOriginalSize 28 Resizes the object to the original size.
12 .uno%3AObjectMenue 60 Lets you edit a selected object in your file that you inserted with the Insert - Object command.
33 cui%3AEdit%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3AED_FRAMENAME 7b Enter a name for the floating frame. The name cannot contain spaces, special characters, or begin with an underscore ( _ ).
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_FRMBORDER_ON 2a Displays the border of the floating frame.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_FRMBORDER_OFF 27 Hides the border of the floating frame.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ACB_MARGINHEIGHTDEFAULT 1c Applies the default spacing.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_SCROLLINGON 2e Displays the scrollbar for the floating frame.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_SCROLLINGOFF 2b Hides the scrollbar for the floating frame.
3e cui%3ANumericField%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ANM_MARGINHEIGHT dc Enter the amount of vertical space that you want to leave between the top and bottom edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_SCROLLINGAUTO 59 Mark this option if the currently active floating frame can have a scrollbar when needed.
38 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ABT_FILEOPEN 5d Locate the file that you want to display in the selected floating frame, and then click Open.
3d cui%3ANumericField%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ANM_MARGINWIDTH e2 Enter the amount of horizontal space that you want to leave between the right and the left edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents.
2d cui%3AEdit%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3AED_URL a7 Enter the path and the name of the file that you want to display in the floating frame. You can also click the ... button and locate the file that you want to display.
2a svx%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAP%3ACBB_URL 55 Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot.
15 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_APPLY 33 Applies the changes that you made to the image map.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_PROPERTY 3c Allows you to define the properties of the selected hotspot.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_OPEN 5b Loads an existing image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_CIRCLE b3 Draws an elliptical hotspot where you drag in the graphic. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_SELECT 2f Selects a hotspot in the image map for editing.
27 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAP%3AEDT_TEXT 59 Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser.
1a SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYDELETE 22 Deletes the selected anchor point.
15 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_MACRO 53 Lets you assign a macro that runs when you click the selected hotspot in a browser.
1a SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYINSERT 43 Adds an anchor point where you click on the outline of the hotspot.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_GRAPHWND 0 
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_RECT b3 Draws a rectangular hotspot where you drag in the graphic. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_ACTIVE 5e Disables or enables the hyperlink for the selected hotspot. A disabled hotspot is transparent.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYEDIT 4f Lets you change the shape of the selected hotspot by editing the anchor points.
15 .uno%3AImageMapDialog 93 Allows you to attach URLs to specific areas, called hotspots, on a graphic or a group of graphics. An image map is a group of one or more hotspots.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_SAVEAS 53 Saves the image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYMOVE 43 Lets you move the individual anchor points of the selected hotspot.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLY 1bb Draws a polygonal hotspot in the graphic. Click this icon, drag in the graphic, and then click to define one side of the polygon. Move to where you want to place the end of the next side, and then click. Repeat until you have drawn all of the sides of the polygon. When you are finished, double-click to close the polygon. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_FREEPOLY 124 Draws a hotspot that is based on a free-form polygon. Click this icon and move to where you want to draw the hotspot. Drag a free-form line and release to close the shape. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
29 SVX%3AEDIT%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL%3AEDT_URL 55 Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot.
34 SVX_MULTILINEEDIT_RID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL_EDT_DESCRIPTION 24 Enter a description for the hotspot.
26 SVX%3AMODALDIALOG%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL 2e Lists the properties for the selected hotspot.
2a SVX%3AEDIT%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL%3AEDT_NAME 1b Enter a name for the image.
31 SVX%3ACOMBOBOX%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL%3ACBB_TARGETS a0 Enter the name of the target frame that you want to open the URL in. You can also select a standard frame name that is recognised by all browsers from the list.
34 SVX%3AEDIT%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL%3AEDT_URLDESCRIPTION 59 Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser.
12 .uno%3AChangesMenu 48 Lists the commands that are available for tracking changes in your file.
16 .uno%3ATraceChangeMode 4b Tracks each change that is made in the current document by author and date.
13 .uno%3ATrackChanges 4b Tracks each change that is made in the current document by author and date.
1d .uno%3AProtectTraceChangeMode 87 Prevents a user from deactivating the record changes feature, or from accepting or rejecting changes unless the user enters a password.
12 SC_HID_CHG_PROTECT 87 Prevents a user from deactivating the record changes feature, or from accepting or rejecting changes unless the user enters a password.
12 .uno%3AShowChanges 20 Shows or hides recorded changes.
19 .uno%3AShowTrackedChanges 20 Shows or hides recorded changes.
14 .uno%3ACommentChange 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
1c .uno%3ACommentChangeTracking 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
16 CUI_HID_REDLINING_EDIT 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
1b .uno%3AAcceptTrackedChanges 22 Accept or reject recorded changes.
14 .uno%3AAcceptChanges 22 Accept or reject recorded changes.
15 SC_HID_SC_SORT_ACTION 31 Lists the changes that were made in the document.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_ACCEPT 59 Accepts the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
13 SW_HID_SORT_COMMENT 4a Sorts the list according to the comments that are attached to the changes.
23 SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_ACCEPTALL 4a Accepts all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document.
23 SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_REJECTALL 4a Rejects all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document.
1e SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_DG_VIEW b0 Lists the changes that were recorded in the document. When you select an entry in the list, the change is highlighted in the document. To sort the list, click a column heading.
13 SC_HID_SC_SORT_DATE 31 Lists the date and time that the change was made.
19 .uno%3ARejectTracedChange 59 Rejects the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_REJECT 59 Rejects the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
10 SW_HID_SORT_DATE 2e Sorts the list according to the date and time.
15 SC_HID_SC_SORT_AUTHOR 23 Lists the user who made the change.
1e SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_UNDO 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
13 SW_HID_EDIT_COMMENT 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
19 .uno%3AAcceptTracedChange 59 Accepts the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
1b SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PAGE 24 Accept or reject individual changes.
16 SC_HID_SC_SORT_COMMENT 33 Lists the comments that are attached to the change.
12 SW_HID_SORT_AUTHOR 27 Sorts the list according to the Author.
12 SW_HID_SORT_ACTION 2f Sorts the list according to the type of change.
14 SC_HID_SORT_POSITION 82 Sorts the list in a descending order according to the position of the changes in the document. This is the default sorting method.
19 SC_HID_SC_CHANGES_COMMENT 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_DF_DATE 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_LB_AUTOR 5e Filters the list of changes according to the name of the author that you select from the list.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_AUTOR 5e Filters the list of changes according to the name of the author that you select from the list.
3a sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_HIGHLIGHT_CHANGES%3ARB_ASSIGN 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_TF_DATE 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
22 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_LB_ACTION 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_LB_DATE 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_IB_CLOCK 3e Enters the current date and time into the corresponding boxes.
22 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_ACTION 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_BTN_REF 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
22 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_IB_CLOCK2 3e Enters the current date and time into the corresponding boxes.
23 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_COMMENT 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_DF_DATE2 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
23 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_ED_COMMENT 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_ED_RANGE 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_RANGE 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_DATE 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_TF_DATE2 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
32 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SIMPLEREF%3ARB_ASSIGN 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
15 .uno%3AMergeDocuments 92 Imports changes made to copies of the same document into the original document. Changes made to footnotes, headers, frames and fields are ignored.
17 .uno%3ACompareDocuments 3e Compares the current document with a document that you select.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_IDENTIFIER_POS 6a Enter a short name for the record. The short name appears in the Identifier column in the list of records.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FremoveFilter 47 To display all of the records in a table, click the Remove Filter icon.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_YEAR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
13 .uno%3ABib%2Fsource 73 Lists the available tables in the current database. Click a name in the list to display the records for that table.
15 SVX_HID_FM_DELETEROWS 1c Deletes the selected record.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_EDITION_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
17 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEW 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_EDITOR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_LAST 23 Go to the last record in the table.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_URL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEXT 23 Go to the next record in the table.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_TITLE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_NUMBER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_SCHOOL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_CHAPTER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
16 .uno%3ABib%2Fsdbsource 35 Select the data source for the bibliography database.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_VOLUME_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_REPORTTYPE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
14 .uno%3ABib%2FMapping bd Lets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record Object Bar.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FInsertRecord 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_PUBLISHER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_BOOKTITLE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_PAGES_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_MAPPINGDLG bd Lets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record Object Bar.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_JOURNAL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_AUTHORITYTYPE_POS a5 Select the type of record that you want to create. $[officename] inserts a number in the Type column of the record that corresponds to the type that you select here.
1c .uno%3ABibliographyComponent 48 Insert, delete, edit, and organise records in the bibliography database.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_INSTITUTION_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_MONTH_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_SERIES_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FDeleteRecord 1b Deletes the current record.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_HOWPUBLISHED_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_NOTE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
19 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_FIRST 24 Go to the first record in the table.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_ABSOLUTE 4d Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter.
1b .uno%3ABib%2FstandardFilter 4b Use the Standard Filter to refine and to combine AutoFilter search options.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ORGANIZATIONS_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
17 .uno%3ABib%2FautoFilter 96 Long-click to select the data field that you want to search using the term that you entered in the Search Key box. You can only search one data field.
12 .uno%3ABib%2Fquery 180 Type the information that you want to search for, and then press Enter. To change the filter options for the search, long-click the AutoFilter icon, and then select a different data field. You can use wildcards such as % or * for any number of characters, and _ or ? for one character in your search. To display all of the records in the table, clear this field, and then press Enter.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_PREV 27 Go to the previous record in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ANNOTE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_AUTHOR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ADDRESS_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_DB_TBX 48 Insert, delete, edit, and organise records in the bibliography database.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ISBN_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
2a SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVXDLG_ZOOM_BTN_SINGLE 56 The single page view layout displays pages beneath each other, but never side by side.
2d SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVXDLG_ZOOM_BTN_AUTOMATIC 59 The automatic view layout displays pages side by side, as many as the zoom factor allows.
34 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ZOOM%3ABTN_PAGE_WIDTH 6a Displays the complete width of the document page. The top and bottom edges of the page may not be visible.
18 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_OPTIMAL 45 Resizes the display to fit the width of the text in the document at .
b .uno%3AZoom 37 Reduces or enlarges the screen display of %PRODUCTNAME.
34 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ZOOM%3ABTN_WHOLE_PAGE 28 Displays the entire page on your screen.
25 SVX_CHECKBOX_RID_SVXDLG_ZOOM_CHK_BOOK 83 In book mode view layout you see two pages side by side as in an open book. The first page is a right page with an odd page number.
14 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_150 3e Displays the document at one and a half times its actual size.
2a SVX_METRICFIELD_RID_SVXDLG_ZOOM_ED_COLUMNS 6c In columns view layout you see pages in a given number of columns side by side. Enter the number of columns.
28 SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVXDLG_ZOOM_BTN_USER 5f Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box.
13 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_75 30 Displays the document at 75% of its actual size.
2e cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ZOOM%3ABTN_USER 5f Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box.
14 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_200 33 Displays the document at two times its actual size.
31 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ZOOM%3ABTN_OPTIMAL 45 Resizes the display to fit the width of the text in the document at .
14 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_100 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
13 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_50 31 Displays the document at half of its actual size.
1b SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_WHOLE_PAGE 28 Displays the entire page on your screen.
27 SVX_METRICFIELD_RID_SVXDLG_ZOOM_ED_USER 5f Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box.
b SID_VIEW050 31 Displays the document at half of its actual size.
1b SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_PAGE_WIDTH 6a Displays the complete width of the document page. The top and bottom edges of the page may not be visible.
2b SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVXDLG_ZOOM_BTN_COLUMNS 6c In columns view layout you see pages in a given number of columns side by side. Enter the number of columns.
b SID_VIEW200 33 Displays the document at two times its actual size.
2d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_ZOOM%3AED_USER 5f Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box.
2d cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ZOOM%3ABTN_100 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
e .uno%3AView100 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
19 .uno%3AFunctionBarVisible 20 Shows or hides the Standard Bar.
1a .uno%3AShowImeStatusWindow 3b Shows or hides the Input Method Engine (IME) status window.
15 .uno%3AToolBarVisible 1d Shows or hides the Tools bar.
17 .uno%3AStatusBarVisible 3f Shows or hides the Status Bar at the bottom edge of the window.
15 .uno%3ATaskBarVisible 3f Shows or hides the Status Bar at the bottom edge of the window.
1a SFX2_HID_FULLSCREENTOOLBOX 7d In Writer and Calc, you can also use the shortcut keys CommandCtrl+Shift+J to switch between the normal and full screen mode.
11 .uno%3AFullScreen 7b Shows or hides the menus and toolbars in Writer or Calc. To exit the full screen mode, click the Full Screen On/Off button.
13 .uno%3AColorControl 8e Show or hides the Colour Bar. To modify or change the colour table that is displayed, choose Format - Area, and then click on the Colours tab.
18 SVX_HID_COLOR_CTL_COLORS 14c Click the colour that you want to use. To change the fill colour of an object in the current file, select the object and then click a colour. To change the line colour of the selected object, right-click a colour. To change the colour of text in a text object, double-click the text-object, select the text, and then click a colour.
18 .uno%3AAvailableToolbars 2b Opens a sub-menu to show and hide toolbars.
18 .cmd%3ARestoreVisibility ab Choose View - Toolbars - Reset to reset the toolbars to their default context sensitive behaviour. Now some toolbars will be shown automatically, dependent on the context.
15 .uno%3ADeleteAllNotes 2c Delete all comments in the current document.
17 .uno%3AInsertAnnotation 12 Inserts a comment.
17 .uno%3ADeleteAnnotation 1b Delete the current comment.
16 .uno%3AShowAnnotations 49 Use View - Comments to show or hide all comments (not available in Calc).
22 .uno%3ADeleteAllAnnotationByAuthor 3b Delete all comments by this author in the current document.
13 .uno%3ADeleteAuthor 3b Delete all comments by this author in the current document.
11 .uno%3ADeleteNote 1b Delete the current comment.
1a .uno%3ADeleteAllAnnotation 2c Delete all comments in the current document.
b .uno%3AScan 2b Inserts a scanned image into your document.
12 .uno%3ATwainSelect 29 Selects the scanner that you want to use.
14 .uno%3ATwainTransfer 88 Scans an image, and then inserts the result into the document. The scanning dialogue box is provided by the manufacturer of the scanner.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_CHARMAP%3ABTN_DELETE 4b Clears the current selection of special characters that you want to insert.
d .uno%3ABullet 34 Inserts special characters from the installed fonts.
1b CUI_HID_CHARMAP_CTL_SHOWSET 4a Click the special character(s) that you want to insert, and then click OK.
13 .uno%3AInsertSymbol 34 Inserts special characters from the installed fonts.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_CHARMAP%3ALB_FONT 4c Select a font to display the special characters that are associated with it.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_CHARMAP%3ALB_SUBSET 2f Select a Unicode category for the current font.
1a SVT_HID_FILEDLG_PREVIEW_CB 30 Displays a preview of the selected graphic file.
1f SVT_HID_FILEOPEN_IMAGE_TEMPLATE 27 Select the frame style for the graphic.
15 HID_IMPGRF_CB_PREVIEW 30 Displays a preview of the selected graphic file.
17 SVT_HID_FILEDLG_LINK_CB 2c Inserts the selected graphic file as a link.
1d SVX_HID_OFA_HYPERLINK_URL_TXT 2c Inserts the selected graphic file as a link.
14 .uno%3AInsertGraphic 2c Inserts a picture into the current document.
11 .uno%3AObjectMenu 62 Inserts an object into your document. For movies and sounds, use Insert - Movie and Sound instead.
13 .uno%3AInsertObject 6c Inserts an OLE object into the current document. The OLE object is inserted as a link or an embedded object.
13 .uno%3AInsertPlugin 2c Inserts a plug-in into the current document.
12 .uno%3AInsertSound 2f Inserts a sound file into the current document.
12 .uno%3AInsertVideo 2f Inserts a video file into the current document.
1b .uno%3AInsertObjectStarMath 2c Inserts a formula into the current document.
11 .uno%3AInsertMath 2c Inserts a formula into the current document.
20 .uno%3AInsertObjectFloatingFrame 87 Inserts a floating frame into the current document. Floating frames are used in HTML documents to display the contents of another file.
11 .uno%3ADataImport 6c Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME and lets you manage the contents of those databases.
1c .uno%3AViewDataSourceBrowser 6c Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME and lets you manage the contents of those databases.
12 .uno%3AGraphicMenu 38 Select the source for a picture that you want to insert.
11 .uno%3ASetDefault 50 Removes direct formatting and formatting by character styles from the selection.
16 .uno%3AResetAttributes 50 Removes direct formatting and formatting by character styles from the selection.
1d .uno%3AStandardTextAttributes 50 Removes direct formatting and formatting by character styles from the selection.
11 .uno%3AFontDialog 45 Changes the font and the font formatting for the selected characters.
19 CUI_HID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME 3b Specify the formatting and the font that you want to apply.
36 cui%3AMetricBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_EAST_SIZE 6c Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values.
35 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_NAME 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
3a cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_LANG_NOCJK 9c Sets the language that the spell checker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a tick mark in front of them.
36 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_STYLE 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
35 cui%3AMetricBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_CTL_SIZE 6c Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values.
36 cui%3AMetricBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_SIZE 6c Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values.
36 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_EAST_STYLE 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_LANG 9c Sets the language that the spell checker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a tick mark in front of them.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_EAST_LANG 9c Sets the language that the spell checker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a tick mark in front of them.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_CTL_LANG 9c Sets the language that the spell checker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a tick mark in front of them.
3c cui%3AMetricBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_SIZE_NOCJK 6c Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values.
3c cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_STYLE_NOCJK 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
35 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_CTL_STYLE 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
35 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_EAST_NAME 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
3b cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_NAME_NOCJK 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
34 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_CTL_NAME 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
3d cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_UNDERLINE_COLOR 26 Select the colour for the underlining.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_EFFECTS2 e1 Select a relief effect to apply to the selected text. The embossed relief makes the characters appear as if they are raised above the page. The engraved relief makes the characters appear as if they are pressed into the page.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ACB_INDIVIDUALWORDS 3d Applies the selected effect only to words and ignores spaces.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_STRIKEOUT 33 Select a strikethrough style for the selected text.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_UNDERLINE 7d Select the underlining style that you want to apply. To apply the underlining to words only, select the Individual Words box.
c .uno%3AColor d2 Click to apply the current font colour to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text colour. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font colour toolbar.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_POSITION 2c Specify where to display the emphasis marks.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_RELIEF e1 Select a relief effect to apply to the selected text. The embossed relief makes the characters appear as if they are raised above the page. The engraved relief makes the characters appear as if they are pressed into the page.
1c CUI_HID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS 2e Specify the font effects that you want to use.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_EMPHASIS 53 Select a character to display over or below the entire length of the selected text.
f .uno%3AOverline 81 Overlines or removes overlining from the selected text. If the cursor is not in a word, the new text that you enter is overlined.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_FONTCOLOR 98 Sets the colour for the selected text. If you select Automatic, the text colour is set to black for light backgrounds and to white for dark backgrounds.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_COLOR2 98 Sets the colour for the selected text. If you select Automatic, the text colour is set to black for light backgrounds and to white for dark backgrounds.
3c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_OVERLINE_COLOR 25 Select the colour for the overlining.
10 .uno%3AFontColor d2 Click to apply the current font colour to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text colour. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font colour toolbar.
38 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ACB_SHADOW 4b Adds a shadow that casts below and to the right of the selected characters.
39 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ACB_OUTLINE 5b Displays the outline of the selected characters. This effect does not work with every font.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_OVERLINE 7b Select the overlining style that you want to apply. To apply the overlining to words only, select the Individual Words box.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ALB_LANGUAGE 100 Specifies the language setting for the selected fields. With the language set to Automatic, $[officename] automatically applies the number formats associated with the system default language. Select any language to fix the settings for the selected fields.
3d cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3AED_LEADZEROES 4b Enter the maximum number of zeros to display in front of the decimal point.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3AED_FORMAT 5c Displays the number format code for the selected format. You can also enter a custom format.
36 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ABTN_NEGRED 33 Changes the font colour of negative numbers to red.
1d CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT_TBI_INFO 2d Adds a comment to the selected number format.
1e CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT_LB_FORMAT 49 Select how you want the contents of the selected cell(s) to be displayed.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ALB_CATEGORY 56 Select a category from the list, and then select a formatting style in the Format box.
1c CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT_TBI_ADD 4a Adds the number format code that you entered to the user-defined category.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ABTN_THOUSAND 6c Inserts a separator between thousands. The type of separator that is used depends on your language settings.
32 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3AED_COMMENT 4f Enter a comment for the selected number format and then click outside this box.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3AED_DECIMALS 3c Enter the number of decimal places that you want to display.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ACB_SOURCEFORMAT 4b Uses the same number format as the cells containing the data for the chart.
1f CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT_TBI_REMOVE 23 Deletes the selected number format.
1e .uno%3ATableNumberFormatDialog 38 Specify the formatting options for the selected cell(s).
14 CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT 38 Specify the formatting options for the selected cell(s).
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ALB_CURRENCY 71 Select a currency, and then scroll to the top of the Format list to view the formatting options for the currency.
28 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3APB_EVENT 3c Specify an event that triggers when you click the hyperlink.
f SW_HID_CHAR_URL 38 Assigns a new hyperlink or edits the selected hyperlink.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3ALB_VISITED c5 Select a formatting style to use for visited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialogue box, and click the Styles and Formatting icon on the Formatting toolbar.
21 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3AED_NAME 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
20 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3AED_URL 4c Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3ALB_NOT_VISITED c7 Select a formatting style to use for unvisited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialogue box, and click the Styles and Formatting icon on the Formatting toolbar.
21 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3AED_TEXT 3a Enter the text that you want to display for the hyperlink.
19 .uno%3AInsertHyperlinkDlg 38 Assigns a new hyperlink or edits the selected hyperlink.
27 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3ALB_TARGET 72 Enter the name of the frame in which you want the linked file to open, or select a predefined frame from the list.
26 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3APB_URL 3e Locate the file that you want to link to, and then click Open.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3ARB_NORMALPOS 2c Removes superscript or subscript formatting.
3a cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3ARB_HIGHPOS 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline.
10 .uno%3ASubScript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3ACB_PAIRKERNING 4c Automatically adjust the character spacing for specific letter combinations.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3AED_KERNING2 65 Enter the amount by which you want to expand or condense the character spacing for the selected text.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3ARB_LOWPOS 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3AMF_SCALE_WIDTH 66 Enter the percentage of the font width by which to horizontally stretch or compress the selected text.
12 .uno%3ASuperScript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3ALB_KERNING2 b2 Specifies the spacing between the characters of the selected text. For expanded or condensed spacing, enter the amount that you want to expand or condense the text in the by box.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3AED_FONTSIZE 50 Enter the amount by which you want to reduce the font size of the selected text.
3a cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3AED_HIGHLOW 9e Enter the amount by which you want to raise or to lower the selected text in relation to the baseline. One hundred percent is equal to the height of the font.
1d CUI_HID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION 44 Specify the position, scaling, rotation, and spacing for characters.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3ACB_HIGHLOW 6a Automatically sets the amount by which the selected text is raised or lowered in relation to the baseline.
3b cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_TWOLINES%3AED_STARTBRACKET 89 Select the character to define the beginning of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters.
39 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_TWOLINES%3AED_ENDBRACKET 83 Select the character to define the end of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_TWOLINES%3ACB_TWOLINES 5a Allows you to write in double lines in the area that you selected in the current document.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PARA_ASIAN%3ACB_AS_HANG_PUNC 8b Prevents commas and full stops from breaking the line. Instead, these characters are added to the end of the line, even in the page margin.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PARA_ASIAN%3ACB_AS_FORBIDDEN 89 Prevents the characters in the list from starting or ending a line. The characters are relocated to either the previous or the next line.
3f cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PARA_ASIAN%3ACB_AS_SCRIPT_SPACE 3c Inserts a space between Asian, Latin and complex characters.
10 .uno%3AEditStyle 50 Modifies the format of the current paragraph, for example indents and alignment.
16 .uno%3AParagraphDialog 50 Modifies the format of the current paragraph, for example indents and alignment.
42 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_LINEDISTPERCENT 2c Enter the value to use for the line spacing.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_LEFTINDENT 184 Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin.
1c CUI_HID_FORMAT_PARAGRAPH_STD 3d Sets the indenting and the spacing options for the paragraph.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_BOTTOMDIST 51 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave below the selected paragraph(s).
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_RIGHTINDENT 184 Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin.
3a cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_TOPDIST 51 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave above the selected paragraph(s).
41 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_LINEDISTMETRIC 2c Enter the value to use for the line spacing.
34 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3ACB_AUTO 51 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave above the selected paragraph(s).
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_FLINEINDENT 12a Indents the first line of a paragraph by the amount that you enter. To create a hanging indent enter a positive value for "Before text" and a negative value for "First line". To indent the first line of a paragraph that uses numbering or bullets, choose "Format - Bullets and Numbering - Position".
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_LINEDIST 4a Specify the amount of space to leave between lines of text in a paragraph.
33 cui%3AMetricBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3AED_TABPOS fa Select a tab stop type, enter a new measurement, and then click New. If you want, you can also specify the measurement units to use for the tab (cm for centimetre, or " for inches). Existing tabs to the left of the first tab that you set are removed.
36 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3AED_FILLCHAR_OTHER 56 Allows you to specify a character to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
35 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_DELALL 80 Removes all of the tab stops that you defined under Position. Sets Left tab stops at regular intervals as the default tab stops.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_TABTYPE_RIGHT 63 Aligns the right edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the left of the tab stop.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_NEW 3c Adds the tab stop that you defined to the current paragraph.
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_DASHLINE 3e Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dashes.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_TABTYPE_LEFT 53 Aligns the left edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the right.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_TABTYPE_DECIMAL 63 Aligns the decimal point of a number to the centre of the tab stop and text to the left of the tab.
37 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3AED_TABTYPE_DECCHAR 4e Enter a character that you want the decimal tab to use as a decimal separator.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_OTHER 56 Allows you to specify a character to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_TABTYPE_CENTER 2e Aligns the centre of the text to the tab stop.
11 CUI_HID_TABULATOR 2e Set the position of a tab stop in a paragraph.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_NO 5c Inserts no fill characters, or removes existing fill characters to the left of the tab stop.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_POINTS 3c Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dots.
43 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_UNDERSCORE 41 Draws a line to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3ALB_LINECOLOR 47 Select the line colour that you want to use for the selected border(s).
32 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AMF_BOTTOM 65 Enter the distance that you want to have between the bottom border and the contents of the selection.
1a CUI_HID_BORDER_CTL_PRESETS 2a Select a predefined border style to apply.
2d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3ACB_SYNC 5f Applies the same spacing to contents setting to all four borders when you enter a new distance.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AED_SHADOWSIZE 1e Enter the width of the shadow.
30 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AMF_LEFT 63 Enter the distance that you want to have between the left border and the contents of the selection.
1a CUI_HID_BORDER_CTL_SHADOWS 2e Click a shadow style for the selected borders.
31 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AMF_RIGHT 64 Enter the distance that you want to have between the right border and the contents of the selection.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3ALB_SHADOWCOLOR 1f Select a colour for the shadow.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3ALB_LINESTYLE 6b Click the border style that you want to apply. The style is applied to the borders selected in the preview.
2f cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AMF_TOP 62 Enter the distance that you want to have between the top border and the contents of the selection.
e CUI_HID_BORDER 43 Sets the border options for the selected objects in Writer or Calc.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ALB_SELECTOR 35 Select the type of background that you want to apply.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ALB_PARA_BOX 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
22 CUI_HID_BACKGROUND_CTL_BGDCOLORSET 64 Click the colour that you want to use as a background. To remove a background colour, click No Fill.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_POSITION 43 Select this option, and then click a location in the position grid.
35 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_PREVIEW 34 Displays or hides a preview of the selected graphic.
18 SVX_HID_POPUP_COLOR_CTRL 74 Click a colour. Click No Fill to remove a background or highlighting colour. Click Automatic to reset a font colour.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ALB_TBL_BOX 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
1f CUI_HID_BACKGROUND_CTL_POSITION 43 Select this option, and then click a location in the position grid.
12 CUI_HID_BACKGROUND 25 Set the background colour or graphic.
32 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_LINK 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_BROWSE 52 Locate the graphic file that you want to use as a background, and then click Open.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3AMF_COL_TRANS 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
35 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_AREA 4b Stretches the graphic to fill the entire background of the selected object.
35 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_TILE 53 Repeats the graphic so that it covers the entire background of the selected object.
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_CENTERALIGN 32 Centres the contents of the paragraph on the page.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_LEFTALIGN 2d Aligns the paragraph to the left page margin.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_COLUMN%3ALB_TEXTDIRECTION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
1e CUI_HID_FORMAT_PARAGRAPH_ALIGN 44 Sets the alignment of the paragraph relative to the margins of page.
42 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_JUSTIFYALIGN 3f Aligns the paragraph to the left and to the right page margins.
33 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ALB_TEXTORIENTATION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
3e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_TEXTDIRECTION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_RIGHTALIGN 2e Aligns the paragraph to the right page margin.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ACB_EXPAND 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
39 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_LASTLINE 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3APB_ORGSIZE 32 Returns the selected graphic to its original size.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_HEIGHT 28 Enter a height for the selected graphic.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_HEIGHTZOOM 39 Enter the height of the selected graphic as a percentage.
31 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_LEFT 161 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the left edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the left of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic.
32 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_WIDTH 27 Enter a width for the selected graphic.
36 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3ARB_ZOOMCONST 68 Maintains the original scale of the graphic when you crop, so that only the size of the graphic changes.
36 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3ARB_SIZECONST 123 Maintains the original size of the graphic when you crop, so that only the scale of the graphic changes. To reduce the scale of the graphic, select this option and enter negative values in the cropping boxes. To increase the scale of the graphic, enter positive values in the cropping boxes.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_WIDTHZOOM 39 Enter the width for the selected graphic as a percentage.
32 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_RIGHT 163 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the right edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the right of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_BOTTOM 151 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the bottom of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space below the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic.
30 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_TOP 14e If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the top of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space above the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3ALB_NEXT 102 Select an existing style that you want to follow the current style in your document. For paragraph styles, the next style is applied to the paragraph that is created when you press Enter. For page styles, the next style is applied when a new page is created.
31 sfx2%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3AED_DESC 3c Describes the relevant formatting used in the current style.
16 SFX2_HID_MANAGE_STYLES 27 Set the options for the selected style.
28 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3AED_NAME a7 Displays the name of the selected style. If you are creating or modifying a custom style, enter a name for the style. You cannot change the name of a predefined style.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3ALB_BASE 69 Select an existing style that you want to base the new style on, or select none to define your own style.
2c sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3ACB_AUTO b0 Updates the style when you apply direct formatting to a paragraph using this style in your document. The formatting of all paragraphs using this style is automatically updated.
2d sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3ALB_REGION 7f Displays the category for the current style. If you are creating or modifying a new style, select 'Custom Style' from the list.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_PAPER_HEIGHT 61 Displays the height of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a height here.
2c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ACB_ADAPT 86 Resizes the drawing objects so that they fit on the paper format that you select. The arrangement of the drawing objects is preserved.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_TEXT_FLOW 40 Select the text direction that you want to use in your document.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_BOTTOM_MARGIN 5c Enter the amount of space to leave between the lower edge of the page and the document text.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_PAPER_TRAY ea Select the paper source for your printer. If you want, you can assign different paper trays to different page styles. For example, assign a different tray to the First Page style and load the tray with your company's letterhead paper.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_LEFT_MARGIN e7 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the inner text margin and the inner edge of the page.
13 CUI_HID_FORMAT_PAGE 73 Allows you to define page layouts for single and multiple-page documents, as well as a numbering and paper formats.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_PAPER_SIZE 81 Select a predefined paper size, or create a custom format by entering the dimensions for the paper in the Height and Width boxes.
33 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ARB_LANDSCAPE 4e Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented horizontally.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ACB_HORZ 33 Centres the cells horizontally on the printed page.
2f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ACB_REGISTER 43 Aligns the text on the selected Page Style to a vertical page grid.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_REGISTER dd Select the Paragraph Style that you want to use as a reference for lining up the text on the selected Page style. The height of the font that is specified in the reference style sets the spacing of the vertical page grid.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ACB_VERT 31 Centres the cells vertically on the printed page.
34 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_TOP_MARGIN 5c Enter the amount of space to leave between the upper edge of the page and the document text.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_RIGHT_MARGIN e8 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the outer text margin and the outer edge of the page.
32 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ARB_PORTRAIT 4c Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented vertically.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_NUMBER_FORMAT 51 Select the page numbering format that you want to use for the current page style.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_LAYOUT 60 Specify whether the current style should show odd pages, even pages, or both odd and even pages.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_PAPER_WIDTH 5f Displays the width of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a width here.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ACB_SHARED 2a Even and odd pages share the same content.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3AED_RMARGIN 67 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the header.
15 SC_HID_SC_HEADER_EDIT 18 Add or edit header text.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ACB_HEIGHT_DYN 51 Automatically adjusts the height of the header to fit the content that you enter.
15 SVX_HID_FORMAT_HEADER 7b Adds a header to the current page style. A header is an area in the top page margin, in which you can add text or graphics.
32 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3AED_HEIGHT 2e Enter the height that you want for the header.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ACB_TURNON 28 Adds a header to the current page style.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3AED_LMARGIN 65 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the header.
30 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3AED_DIST 80 Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the header and the top edge of the document text.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ACB_DYNSPACING 76 Overrides the Spacing setting, and allows the header to expand into the area between the header and the document text.
32 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ABTN_EXTRAS 4e Defines a border, a background colour, or a background pattern for the header.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_SHARED 2a Even and odd pages share the same content.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_TURNON 28 Adds a footer to the current page style.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_RMARGIN 67 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the footer.
30 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_DIST 80 Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the document text and the top edge of the footer.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_HEIGHT_DYN 4c Automatically adjusts the height of the footer to fit the content you enter.
32 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_HEIGHT 29 Enter the height you want for the footer.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_DYNSPACING 71 Overrides the Spacing setting and allows the footer to expand into the area between the footer and document text.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_LMARGIN 65 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the footer.
15 SC_HID_SC_FOOTER_EDIT 18 Add or edit footer text.
32 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ABTN_EXTRAS 4e Defines a border, a background colour, or a background pattern for the footer.
15 SVX_HID_FORMAT_FOOTER 7e Adds a footer to the current page style. A footer is an area in the bottom page margin, in which you can add text or graphics.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToFullWidth 3f Changes the selected Asian characters to full width characters.
1d .uno%3AChangeCaseToToggleCase 30 Toggles case of all selected western characters.
1a SID_TRANSLITERATE_SENTENCE 57 Changes the first letter of the selected western characters to an upper-case character.
1c SID_TRANSLITERATE_CAPITALIZE 68 Changes the first character of every word of the selected western characters to an upper-case character.
18 .uno%3AChangeCaseToUpper 40 Changes the selected western characters to upper-case characters
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToTitleCase 68 Changes the first character of every word of the selected western characters to an upper-case character.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToHalfWidth 3f Changes the selected Asian characters to half-width characters.
18 .uno%3ATransliterateMenu 86 Changes the case of characters in the selection, or if the cursor is in a word, changes the case of all of the characters in the word.
18 .uno%3AChangeCaseToLower 41 Changes the selected western characters to lower-case characters.
1f .uno%3AChangeCaseToSentenceCase 57 Changes the first letter of the selected western characters to an upper-case character.
18 SID_TRANSLITERATE_TOGGLE 30 Toggles case of all selected western characters.
1b .uno%3AChangeCaseToKatakana 3d Changes the selected Asian characters to Katakana characters.
1b .uno%3AChangeCaseToHiragana 3d Changes the selected Asian characters to Hiragana characters.
29 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_RIGHT_3 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
2d svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3ALB_POSITION 2d Select where you want to place the ruby text.
29 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_RIGHT_4 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
28 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_LEFT_2 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
2f svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3APB_STYLIST 65 Opens the Styles and Formatting window from which you can select a character style for the ruby text.
2f svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3ALB_CHAR_STYLE 2b Select a character style for the ruby text.
29 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_RIGHT_1 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
28 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_LEFT_1 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
11 .uno%3ARubyDialog 54 Allows you to add comments above Asian characters to serve as a pronunciation guide.
28 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_LEFT_3 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
28 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_LEFT_4 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
29 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_RIGHT_2 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
2b svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3ALB_ADJUST 32 Select the horizontal alignment for the Ruby text.
15 .uno%3AAlignFrameMenu 34 Aligns selected objects with respect to one another.
10 .uno%3AAlignLeft a1 Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the left edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.
16 .uno%3AObjectAlignLeft a1 Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the left edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.
1c .uno%3AAlignHorizontalCenter a7 Horizontally centres the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the centre of the object is aligned to the horizontal centre of the page.
12 .uno%3AAlignCenter a7 Horizontally centres the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the centre of the object is aligned to the horizontal centre of the page.
11 .uno%3AAlignRight a4 Aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Impress or Draw, the right edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin.
17 .uno%3AObjectAlignRight a4 Aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Impress or Draw, the right edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin.
e .uno%3AAlignUp ab Vertically aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin.
f .uno%3AAlignTop ab Vertically aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin.
12 .uno%3AAlignMiddle a3 Vertically centres the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the centre of the object is aligned to the vertical centre of the page.
1a .uno%3AAlignVerticalCenter a3 Vertically centres the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the centre of the object is aligned to the vertical centre of the page.
12 .uno%3AAlignBottom b1 Vertically aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin.
10 .uno%3AAlignDown b1 Vertically aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin.
f .uno%3ALeftPara 39 Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left page margin.
10 .uno%3ARightPara 3a Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the right page margin.
11 .uno%3ACenterPara 2e Centres the selected paragraph(s) on the page.
12 .uno%3AJustifyPara cd Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left and the right page margins. If you want, you can also specify the alignment options for the last line of a paragraph by choosing Format - Paragraph - Alignment.
11 .uno%3AMergeCells 45 Combines the contents of the selected table cells into a single cell.
10 .uno%3ASplitCell 65 Splits the cell or group of cells horizontally or vertically into the number of cells that you enter.
12 .uno%3ACellVertTop 3c Aligns the contents of the cell to the top edge of the cell.
15 .uno%3ACellVertCenter 44 Centres the contents of the cell between top and bottom of the cell.
15 .uno%3ACellVertBottom 3f Aligns the contents of the cell to the bottom edge of the cell.
b .uno%3ABold 9c Makes the selected text bold. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made bold. If the selection or word is already bold, the formatting is removed.
d .uno%3AItalic a2 Makes the selected text italic. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made italic. If the selection or word is already italic, the formatting is removed.
16 .uno%3AUnderlineDouble 2c Underlines the selected text with two lines.
10 .uno%3AUnderline 39 Underlines or removes underlining from the selected text.
10 .uno%3AStrikeout 57 Draws a line through the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, the entire word.
f .uno%3AShadowed 56 Adds a shadow to the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, to the entire word.
15 .uno%3ADistributeRows 60 Adjusts the height of the selected rows to match the height of the tallest row in the selection.
11 .uno%3ASpacePara1 52 Applies single line spacing to the current paragraph. This is the default setting.
12 .uno%3ASpacePara15 45 Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to one and half lines.
11 .uno%3ASpacePara2 3c Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to two lines.
18 .uno%3ADistributeColumns 63 Adjusts the width of the selected columns to match the width of the widest column in the selection.
18 .uno%3AStyleNewByExample 1f Enter a name for the new Style.
33 sfx2%3AComboBox%3ADLG_NEW_STYLE_BY_EXAMPLE%3ALB_COL 1f Enter a name for the new Style.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_SWDLG_STRINPUT%3AED_INPUT 37 Enter a name for the new AutoFormat, and then click OK.
13 .uno%3ARenameObject 60 Assigns a name to the selected object, so that you can quickly find the object in the Navigator.
32 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_OBJECT_NAME%3ANTD_EDT_NAME 50 Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator.
1e SW_HID_FORMAT_NAME_OBJECT_NAME 50 Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator.
1b SD_HID_SD_NAMEDIALOG_OBJECT 50 Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator.
10 .uno%3ANameGroup 60 Assigns a name to the selected object, so that you can quickly find the object in the Navigator.
39 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_OBJECT_TITLE_DESC%3ANTD_EDT_TITLE 7c Enter a title text. This short name is visible as an alternative tag in HTML format. Accessibility tools can read this text.
1d .uno%3AObjectTitleDescription 9c Assigns a title and a description to the selected object. These are accessible for accessibility tools and as alternative tags when you export the document.
41 cui%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_OBJECT_TITLE_DESC%3ANTD_EDT_DESC e3 Enter a description text. The long description text can be entered to describe a complex object or group of objects to users with screen reader software. The description is visible as an alternative tag for accessibility tools.
11 .uno%3AFormatLine 32 Sets the formatting options for the selected line.
11 .uno%3AXLineColor 1d Select a colour for the line.
11 .uno%3AXLineStyle 2b Select the line style that you want to use.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ACB_SYMBOL_RATIO 53 Maintains the proportions of the symbol when you enter a new height or width value.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_END_STYLE 41 Select the arrowhead that you want to apply to the selected line.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_START_STYLE 41 Select the arrowhead that you want to apply to the selected line.
11 CUI_HID_LINE_LINE 93 Set the formatting options for the selected line or the line that you want to draw. You can also add arrowheads to a line, or change chart symbols.
2b cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_COLOR 1d Select a colour for the line.
36 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMB_SYMBOL_BITMAP 3b Select the symbol style that you want to use in your chart.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMF_SYMBOL_WIDTH 1d Enter a width for the symbol.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMTR_LINE_TRANSPARENT 71 Enter the transparency of the line, where 100% corresponds to completely transparent and 0% to completely opaque.
37 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ATSB_CENTER_START 4e Places the centre of the arrowhead(s) on the endpoint(s) of the selected line.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ACBX_SYNCHRONIZE 8a Automatically updates both arrowhead settings when you enter a different width, select a different arrowhead style,or centre an arrowhead.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMF_SYMBOL_HEIGHT 1e Enter a height for the symbol.
35 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ATSB_CENTER_END 4e Places the centre of the arrowhead(s) on the endpoint(s) of the selected line.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMTR_FLD_LINE_WIDTH 99 Select the width for the line. You can append a measurement unit. A zero line width results in a hairline with a width of one pixel of the output medium.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_LINE_STYLE 2b Select the line style that you want to use.
10 .uno%3ALineWidth 99 Select the width for the line. You can append a measurement unit. A zero line width results in a hairline with a width of one pixel of the output medium.
3a cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMTR_FLD_START_WIDTH 20 Enter a width for the arrowhead.
38 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMTR_FLD_END_WIDTH 20 Enter a width for the arrowhead.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3AMTR_FLD_LENGTH_2 1d Enter the length of the dash.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_MODIFY 8a Updates the selected line style using the current settings. To change the name of the selected line style, enter a new name when prompted.
29 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAME%3AEDT_STRING d Enter a name.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3AMTR_FLD_LENGTH_1 1d Enter the length of the dash.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ALB_LINESTYLES 31 Select the style of line that you want to create.
35 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ANUM_FLD_2 50 Enter the number of times that you want a dot or a dash to appear in a sequence.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_ADD 34 Creates a new line style using the current settings.
35 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ANUM_FLD_1 50 Enter the number of times that you want a dot or a dash to appear in a sequence.
10 CUI_HID_LINE_DEF 2c Edit or create dashed or dotted line styles.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_SAVE 4b Saves the current list of line styles, so that you can load it again later.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 48 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between dots or dashes.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ACBX_SYNCHRONIZE 45 Automatically adjusts the entries relative to the length of the line.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ALB_TYPE_1 38 Select the combination of dashes and dots that you want.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_LOAD 1e Imports a list of line styles.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ALB_TYPE_2 38 Select the combination of dashes and dots that you want.
36 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_SAVE 46 Saves the current list of arrow styles, so that you can load it later.
2f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3AEDT_NAME 2e Displays the name of the selected arrow style.
13 CUI_HID_LINE_ENDDEF 1c Edit or create arrow styles.
36 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_LOAD 1f Imports a list of arrow styles.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_ADD 5d To define a custom arrow style, select a drawing object in the document, and then click here.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_MODIFY 2d Changes the name of the selected arrow style.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ALB_LINEENDS 39 Choose a predefined arrow style symbol from the list box.
11 .uno%3AFormatArea 38 Sets the fill properties of the selected drawing object.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_GRADIENT 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_HATCHBCKGRDCOLOR 58 Click the colour that you want to use as a background for the selected hatching pattern.
2b cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_COLOR 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
2e cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ARBT_ROW 63 Horizontally offsets the original bitmap relative to the bitmap tiles by the amount that you enter.
34 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_STEPCOUNT 5e Automatically determines the number of steps for blending the two end colours of the gradient.
11 CUI_HID_AREA_AREA 35 Set the fill options for the selected drawing object.
2f cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_TILE 2d Tiles the bitmap to fill the selected object.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_Y_SIZE 1e Enter a height for the bitmap.
10 .uno%3AFillStyle 4e Select the type of fill that you want to apply to the selected drawing object.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_OFFSET 33 Enter the percentage to offset the rows or columns.
33 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_ORIGINAL 8f Retains the original size of the bitmap when filling the selected object. To resize the bitmap, unmark this check box, and then click Relative.
30 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_SCALE fe Rescales the bitmap relative to the size of the selected object by the percentage values that you enter in the Width and Height boxes. Unmark this check box to resize the selected object with the measurements that you enter in the Width and Height boxes.
31 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ARBT_COLUMN 61 Vertically offsets the original bitmap relative to the bitmap tiles by the amount that you enter.
32 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_STRETCH 61 Stretches the bitmap to fill the selected object. To use this feature, unmark the Tile check box.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_HATCHING 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
39 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ANUM_FLD_STEPCOUNT 4b Enter the number of steps for blending the two end colours of the gradient.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_X_OFFSET 32 Enter the horizontal offset for tiling the bitmap.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_X_SIZE 1d Enter a width for the bitmap.
32 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ACB_HATCHBCKGRD 71 Applies a background colour to the hatching pattern. Mark this check box, and then choose a colour from the list.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_Y_OFFSET 30 Enter the vertical offset for tiling the bitmap.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_BITMAP 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
15 CUI_HID_AREA_GRADIENT 42 Set the properties of a gradient, or save and load gradient lists.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_COLOR_FROM 74 Enter the intensity for the colour in the From box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected colour.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_LOAD 23 Load a different list of gradients.
34 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_ANGLE 31 Enter a rotation angle for the selected gradient.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_ADD 6f Adds a custom gradient to the current list. Specify the properties of your gradient, and then click this button
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ALB_COLOR_FROM 38 Select a colour for the beginning point of the gradient.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ALB_GRADIENT_TYPES 2b Select the gradient that you want to apply.
32 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ALB_COLOR_TO 31 Select a colour for the endpoint of the gradient.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_SAVE 43 Saves the current list of gradients, so that you can load it later.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_CENTER_X cf Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current horizontal location of the endpoint colour in the gradient. The endpoint colour is the colour that is selected in the To box.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_CENTER_Y cb Enter the vertical offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current vertical location of the endpoint colour in the gradient. The endpoint colour is the colour that is selected in the To box.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_COLOR_TO 72 Enter the intensity for the colour in the To box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected colour.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_BORDER 9f Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the area of the endpoint colour on the gradient. The endpoint colour is the colour that is selected in the To box.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ALB_GRADIENTS 3d Select the type of gradient that you want to apply or create.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_MODIFY 80 Applies the current gradient properties to the selected gradient. If you want, you can save the gradient under a different name.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ALB_LINE_TYPE 34 Select the type of hatch lines that you want to use.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_ADD 80 Adds a custom hatching pattern to the current list. Specify the properties of your hatching pattern, and then click this button.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3AMTR_FLD_ANGLE 54 Enter the rotation angle for the hatch lines, or click a position in the angle grid.
12 CUI_HID_AREA_HATCH 4a Set the properties of a hatching pattern, or save and load hatching lists.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ALB_HATCHINGS 6c Lists the available hatching patterns. Click the hatching pattern that you want to apply, and then click OK.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_SAVE 4b Saves the current list of hatching patterns, so that you can load it later.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_LOAD 2c Loads a different list of hatching patterns.
14 CUI_HID_TPHATCH_CTRL 4e Click a position in the grid to define the rotation angle for the hatch lines.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_MODIFY 87 Applies the current hatching properties to the selected hatching pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name.
38 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 48 Enter the amount of space that you want to have between the hatch lines.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ALB_LINE_COLOR 25 Select the colour of the hatch lines.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_MODIFY 97 Replaces a bitmap that you created in the Pattern Editor with the current bitmap pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name.
31 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_LOAD 22 Loads a different list of bitmaps.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ALB_BACKGROUND_COLOR 33 Select a background colour for your bitmap pattern.
31 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_SAVE 41 Saves the current list of bitmaps, so that you can load it later.
2d cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ALB_COLOR 55 Select a foreground colour, and then click in the grid to add a pixel to the pattern.
13 CUI_HID_AREA_BITMAP 95 Select a bitmap that you want to use as a fill pattern, or create your own pixel pattern. You can also import bitmaps, and save or load bitmap lists.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_IMPORT 80 Locate the bitmap that you want to import, and then click Open. The bitmap is added to the end of the list of available bitmaps.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ALB_BITMAPS 5d Select a bitmap from the list, and then click OK to apply the pattern to the selected object.
2f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_ADD 49 Adds a bitmap that you created in the Pattern Editor to the current list.
15 CUI_HID_TPSHADOW_CTRL 28 Click where you want to cast the shadow.
11 .uno%3AFillShadow c9 Adds a shadow to the selected object. If the object already has a shadow, the shadow is removed. If you click this icon when no object is selected, the shadow is added to the next object that you draw.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3ALB_SHADOW_COLOR 1f Select a colour for the shadow.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 52 Enter the distance that you want the shadow to be offset from the selected object.
3f cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3AMTR_SHADOW_TRANSPARENT 64 Enter a percentage from 0% (opaque) to 100% (transparent) to specify the transparency of the shadow.
38 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3ATSB_SHOW_SHADOW 2d Adds a shadow to the selected drawing object.
13 CUI_HID_AREA_SHADOW 55 Add a shadow to the selected drawing object, and define the properties of the shadow.
40 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_CENTER_X 2d Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient.
41 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_END_VALUE 74 Enter a transparency value for the endpoint of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_ANGLE 28 Enter a rotation angle for the gradient.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3ARBT_TRANS_LINEAR 8d Turns on colour transparency. Select this option, and then enter a number in the box, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3ARBT_TRANS_OFF 1e Turns off colour transparency.
43 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_START_VALUE 7b Enter a transparency value for the beginning point of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
41 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3ALB_TRGR_GRADIENT_TYPES 40 Select the type of transparency gradient that you want to apply.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRANSPARENT 6f Adjusts the transparency of the current fill colour. Enter a number between 0% (opaque) and 100% (transparent).
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3ARBT_TRANS_GRADIENT 75 Applies a transparency gradient to the current fill colour. Select this option, and then set the gradient properties.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_BORDER 6b Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the transparent area of the gradient. The default value is 0%.
40 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_CENTER_Y 2b Enter the vertical offset for the gradient.
15 .uno%3ATextAttributes 59 Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object.
15 CUI_HID_PAGE_TEXTATTR 59 Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object.
3e cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_HEIGHT 63 Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3AMTR_FLD_TOP 77 Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the drawing or text object and the upper border of the text.
1d CUI_HID_TEXTATTR_CTL_POSITION 36 Click where you want to place the anchor for the text.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3AMTR_FLD_BOTTOM 7a Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom edge of the drawing or text object and the lower border of the text.
3a cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_FIT_TO_SIZE 46 Resizes the text to fit the entire area of the drawing or text object.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_WORDWRAP_TEXT 59 Wraps the text that you add after double-clicking a custom shape to fit inside the shape.
38 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3AMTR_FLD_RIGHT 79 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the drawing or text object and the right border of the text.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_SIZE 56 Resizes a custom shape to fit the text that you enter after double-clicking the shape.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3AMTR_FLD_LEFT 77 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the drawing or text object and the left border of the text.
3d cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_WIDTH 61 Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
36 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_CONTOUR 54 Adapts the text flow so that it matches the contours of the selected drawing object.
39 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_FULL_WIDTH 48 Anchors the text to the full width of the drawing object or text object.
16 .uno%3ATransformDialog 37 Resizes, moves, rotates, or slants the selected object.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ALB_ANCHOR 0 
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3AMTR_FLD_POS_X 6f Enter the horizontal distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid.
42 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_WIDTH 39 Resizes the text to fit the width of the selected object.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3AMTR_FLD_WIDTH 26 Enter a width for the selected object.
13 CUI_HID_TPSIZE_CTRL 7d Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the new size dimensions for the selected object in the Width and Height boxes.
36 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ACBX_SCALE 3a Maintains proportions when you resize the selected object.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ALB_ORIENT 0 
3e cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ATSB_POSPROTECT 44 Prevents changes to the position or the size of the selected object.
17 CUI_HID_TPPOSITION_CTRL f2 Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the amount that you want to shift the object relative to the base point that you selected in the Position Y and Position X boxes. The base points correspond to the selection handles on an object.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3AMTR_FLD_HEIGHT 27 Enter a height for the selected object.
3f cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ATSB_SIZEPROTECT 26 Prevents you from resizing the object.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3AMTR_FLD_POS_Y 6d Enter the vertical distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid.
43 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_HEIGHT 3a Resizes the text to fit the height of the selected object.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ANGLE%3AMTR_FLD_ANGLE 48 Enter the number of degrees that you want to rotate the selected object.
18 CUI_HID_TPROTATION_CTRL2 3f Click to specify the rotation angle in multiples of 45 degrees.
18 CUI_HID_TPROTATION_CTRL1 2e Click where you want to place the pivot point.
13 CUI_HID_TRANS_ANGLE 1c Rotates the selected object.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ANGLE%3AMTR_FLD_POS_Y 4d Enter the vertical distance from the top edge of the page to the pivot point.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ANGLE%3AMTR_FLD_POS_X 50 Enter the horizontal distance from the left edge of the page to the pivot point.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SLANT%3AMTR_FLD_ANGLE 22 Enter the angle of the slant axis.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SLANT%3AMTR_FLD_RADIUS 49 Enter the radius of the circle that you want to use to round the corners.
13 CUI_HID_TRANS_SLANT 4a Slants the selected object, or rounds the corners of a rectangular object.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ACB_LAENGE 3d Click here to display a single-angled line in an optimal way.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ALB_ANSATZ 56 Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ALB_WINKEL 47 Click the Callout style that you want to apply to the selected callout.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3AMF_ANSATZ 56 Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ALB_ANSATZ_REL 56 Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3AMF_LAENGE 73 Enter the length of the callout line segment that extends from the callout box to the inflection point of the line.
34 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3AMF_ABSTAND 6a Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the end of the callout line, and the callout box.
18 CUI_HID_CAPTION_CTL_TYPE 47 Click the Callout style that you want to apply to the selected callout.
f .uno%3AFlipMenu 36 Flips the selected object horizontally, or vertically.
1b .uno%3AObjectMirrorVertical 3b Flips the selected object(s) vertically from top to bottom.
11 .uno%3AMirrorVert 3b Flips the selected object(s) vertically from top to bottom.
1d .uno%3AObjectMirrorHorizontal 3d Flips the selected object(s) horizontally from left to right.
11 .uno%3AMirrorHorz 3d Flips the selected object(s) horizontally from left to right.
15 .uno%3AObjectPosition 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
12 .uno%3AArrangeMenu 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
17 .uno%3AArrangeFrameMenu 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
13 .uno%3ABringToFront 64 Moves the selected object to the top of the stacking order, so that it is in front of other objects.
e .uno%3AForward 5e Moves the selected object up one level, so that it is closer to the top of the stacking order.
17 .uno%3AObjectForwardOne 5e Moves the selected object up one level, so that it is closer to the top of the stacking order.
f .uno%3ABackward 63 Moves the selected object down one level, so that it is closer to the bottom of the stacking order.
14 .uno%3AObjectBackOne 63 Moves the selected object down one level, so that it is closer to the bottom of the stacking order.
11 .uno%3ASendToBack 66 Moves the selected object to the bottom of the stacking order, so that it is behind the other objects.
1c .uno%3ASetObjectToForeground 2b Moves the selected object in front of text.
1c .uno%3ASetObjectToBackground 26 Moves the selected object behind text.
11 .uno%3AAnchorMenu 33 Sets the anchoring options for the selected object.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToPage 2e Anchors the selected item to the current page.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToPara 33 Anchors the selected item to the current paragraph.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToCell 24 Anchors the selected item to a cell.
17 .uno%3ASetAnchorToFrame 33 Anchors the selected item to the surrounding frame.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorAsChar c0 Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToChar c0 Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased.
1d .uno%3AToggleObjectBezierMode 39 Lets you change the shape of the selected drawing object.
1f SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHADOW_OFF 38 Removes the shadow effects that you applied to the text.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_ROTATE 4c Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline.
24 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_AUTOSIZE 38 Resizes the text to fit the length of the text baseline.
20 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_LEFT 35 Aligns the text to the left end of the text baseline.
f .uno%3AFontWork 6c Edits Fontwork effects of the selected object that has been created with the previous Fontwork dialogue box.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_SHADOW_X 55 Enter the horizontal distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_SLANTX 36 Horizontally slants the characters in the text object.
36 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3ACLB_SHADOW_COLOR 24 Select a colour for the text shadow.
1c SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_OUTLINE 44 Shows or hides the borders of the individual characters in the text.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_CENTER 26 Centres the text on the text baseline.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 75 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the text baseline and the base of the individual characters.
3b svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_TEXTSTART 6d Enter the amount of space to leave between the beginning of the text baseline, and the beginning of the text.
1e SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_OFF 1c Removes baseline formatting.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_SHADOW_Y 53 Enter the vertical distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHADOW_SLANT a2 Adds a slant shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_RIGHT 36 Aligns the text to the right end of the text baseline.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHADOW_NORMAL 9c Adds a shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes.
1a SVX_HID_FONTWORK_CTL_FORMS 42 Click the shape of the baseline that you want to use for the text.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_SLANTY 34 Vertically slants the characters in the text object.
1d SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHOWFORM 46 Shows or hides the text baseline, or the edges of the selected object.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_MIRROR 9c Reverses the text flow direction, and flips the text horizontally or vertically. To use this command, you must first apply a different baseline to the text.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_UPRIGHT 97 Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline and preserves the original vertical alignment of the individual characters.
10 .uno%3AGroupMenu 61 Groups keep together selected objects, so that they can be moved or formatted as a single object.
12 .uno%3AFormatGroup 4a Groups the selected objects, so that they can be moved as a single object.
14 .uno%3AFormatUngroup 38 Breaks apart the selected group into individual objects.
11 .uno%3AEnterGroup a1 Opens the selected group, so that you can edit the individual objects. If the selected group contains nested group, you can repeat this command on the subgroups.
11 .uno%3ALeaveGroup 54 Exits the group, so that you can no longer edit the individual objects in the group.
3f cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_STOP_INSIDE 31 Text remains visible after the effect is applied.
3b cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_ENDLESS 9c Plays the animation effect continuously. To specify the number of times to play the effect, unmark this check box, and enter a number in the Continuous box.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ALB_EFFECT 8f Select the animation effect that you want to apply to the text in the selected drawing object. To remove an animation effect, select No Effect.
39 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ABTN_RIGHT 20 Scrolls text from left to right.
40 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_START_INSIDE 49 Text is visible and inside the drawing object when the effect is applied.
38 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ABTN_DOWN 20 Scrolls text from top to bottom.
39 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_PIXEL 23 Measures increment value in pixels.
38 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ABTN_LEFT 20 Scrolls text from right to left.
36 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ABTN_UP 20 Scrolls text from bottom to top.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3AMTR_FLD_DELAY 3d Enter the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3AMTR_FLD_AMOUNT 3b Enter the number of increments by which to scroll the text.
38 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_AUTO c7 $[officename] automatically determines the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect. To manually assign the delay period, unmark this check box, and then enter a value in the Automatic box.
29 cui%3ATabPage%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION 44 Adds an animation effect to the text in the selected drawing object.
3e cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ANUM_FLD_COUNT 47 Enter the number of times that you want the animation effect to repeat.
1e DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_ROWHEIGHT 3c Changes the height of the current row, or the selected rows.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ROW_MAN%3ABTN_DEFVAL c1 Adjusts the row height to the size based on the default template. Existing contents may be shown vertically cropped. The height no longer increases automatically when you enter larger contents.
2f sc%3AMetricField%3ARID_SCDLG_ROW_MAN%3AED_VALUE 2a Enter the row height that you want to use.
31 dbaccess%3AMetricField%3ADLG_ROWHEIGHT%3AMF_VALUE 2a Enter the row height that you want to use.
10 .uno%3ARowHeight 3c Changes the height of the current row, or the selected rows.
31 dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ROWHEIGHT%3ACB_STANDARD c1 Adjusts the row height to the size based on the default template. Existing contents may be shown vertically cropped. The height no longer increases automatically when you enter larger contents.
30 dbaccess%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLWIDTH%3AMF_VALUE 2c Enter the column width that you want to use.
12 .uno%3AColumnWidth 41 Changes the width of the current column, or the selected columns.
2f sc%3AMetricField%3ARID_SCDLG_COL_MAN%3AED_VALUE 2c Enter the column width that you want to use.
30 dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_COLWIDTH%3ACB_STANDARD 41 Automatically adjusts the column width based on the current font.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_COL_MAN%3ABTN_DEFVAL 41 Automatically adjusts the column width based on the current font.
20 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_COLUMNWIDTH 41 Changes the width of the current column, or the selected columns.
11 CUI_HID_ALIGNMENT 57 Sets the alignment options for the contents of the current cell, or the selected cells.
3e cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_ASIAN_VERTICAL 133 Aligns Asian characters one below the other in the selected cell(s). If the cell contains more than one line of text, the lines are converted to text columns that are arranged from right to left. Western characters in the converted text are rotated 90 degrees to the right. Asian characters are not rotated.
37 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ANF_DEGREES a2 Enter the rotation angle for the text in the selected cell(s). A positive number rotates the text to the left and a negative number rotates the text to the right.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ALB_VERALIGN 50 Select the vertical alignment option that you want to apply to the cell content.
36 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_SHRINK aa Reduces the apparent size of the font so that the contents of the cell fit into the current cell width. You cannot apply this command to a cell that contains line breaks.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ALB_HORALIGN 52 Select the horizontal alignment option that you want to apply to the cell content.
34 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_HYPH 3c Enables word hyphenation for text wrapping to the next line.
1a CUI_HID_ALIGNMENT_CTR_DIAL 2e Click in the dial to set the text orientation.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3AED_INDENT 44 Indents from the left edge of the cell by the amount that you enter.
34 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_WRAP 66 Wraps text onto another line at the cell border. The number of lines depends on the width of the cell.
21 CUI_HID_ALIGNMENT_CTR_BORDER_LOCK 3b Specify the cell edge from which to write the rotated text.
3a cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_TXTSTACKED 17 Aligns text vertically.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_PREV 27 Go to the previous record in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_LAST 23 Go to the last record in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEXT 23 Go to the next record in the table.
1b DBACCESS_HID_CTL_TABBROWSER 87 Select database records. Drag-and-drop rows or cells to the document to insert contents. Drag-and-drop column headers to insert fields.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_ABSOLUTE 4d Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_NUMBEROFRECORDS b7 Displays the number of records. For example, "Record 7 of 9(2)" indicates that two records (2) are selected in a table containing 9 records, and that the cursor is in record number 7.
19 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_FIRST 24 Go to the first record in the table.
17 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEW 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
20 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLEFORMAT 1c Formats the selected row(s).
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_COLUMNFORMAT 1f Formats the selected column(s).
f .uno%3AWindow3D 42 Specifies the properties of 3-D object(s) in the current document.
33 svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ANUM_VERTICAL 50 Enter the number of vertical segments to use in the selected 3-D rotation object
2d svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_GEO 10f Adjusts the shape of the selected 3-D object. You can only modify the shape of a 3-D object that was created by converting a 2-D object. To convert a 2-D object to 3-D, select the object, right-click, and then choose Convert - To 3-D, or Convert - To 3-D Rotation Object.
35 svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ANUM_HORIZONTAL 53 Enter the number of horizontal segments to use in the selected 3-D rotation object.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_INVERT 19 Inverts the light source.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_END_ANGLE 53 Enter the angle in degrees to use for rotation in the selected 3-D rotation object.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_PERCENT_DIAGONAL 53 Enter the amount by which you want to round the corners of the selected 3-D object.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_FLAT 24 Renders the 3-D surface as polygons.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_SPHERE 1d Renders a smooth 3-D surface.
3c svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TWO_SIDED_LIGHTING 8f Lights the object from the outside and the inside. To use an ambient light source, click this button, and then click the Invert Normals button.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_DOUBLE_SIDED 63 Closes the shape of a 3-D object that was created by extruding a free-form line (Convert - To 3-D).
35 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_OBJ 81 Renders the 3-D surface according to the shape of the object. For example, a circular shape is rendered with a spherical surface.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_BACKSCALE 68 Enter the amount by which to increase or decrease the area of the front side of the selected 3-D object.
2f svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_DEPTH 69 Enter the extrusion depth for the selected 3-D object. This option is not valid for 3-D rotation objects.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_REPRESENTATION 40 Sets the shading and shadow options for the selected 3-D object.
36 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_FOCAL_LENGTH 81 Enter the focal length of the camera, where a small value corresponds to a "fisheye" lens, and a large value to a telephoto lens.
2f svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_SLANT 3b Enter an angle from 0 to 90 degrees for casting the shadow.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_SHADOW_3D 36 Adds or removes a shadow from the selected 3-D object.
32 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_DISTANCE 55 Enter the distance to leave between the camera and the centre of the selected object.
2e svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_SHADEMODE 138 Select the shading method that you want to use. Flat shading assigns a single colour to a single polygon on the surface of the object. Gouraud shading blends colours across the polygons. Phong shading averages the colour of each pixel based on the pixels that surround it, and requires the most processing power.
35 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_COLOR 26 Select a colour for the ambient light.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_2 d3 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a colour for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the colour of the surrounding light, by selecting a colour from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_4 d3 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a colour for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the colour of the surrounding light, by selecting a colour from the Ambient light box.
2f svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT 34 Define the light source for the selected 3-D object.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_1 d3 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a colour for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the colour of the surrounding light, by selecting a colour from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_6 d3 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a colour for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the colour of the surrounding light, by selecting a colour from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_7 d3 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a colour for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the colour of the surrounding light, by selecting a colour from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_3 d3 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a colour for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the colour of the surrounding light, by selecting a colour from the Ambient light box.
2c svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_LIGHT_1 2d Select a colour for the current light source.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_8 d3 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a colour for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the colour of the surrounding light, by selecting a colour from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_5 d3 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a colour for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the colour of the surrounding light, by selecting a colour from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_AMBIENTLIGHT 26 Select a colour for the ambient light.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_COLOR 1f Converts the texture to colour.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEXTURE 137 Sets the properties of the surface texture for the selected 3-D object. This feature is only available after you apply a surface textures to the selected object. To quickly apply a surface texture, open the Gallery, hold down Shift+Ctrl (Mac: Shift+Command), and then drag an image onto the selected 3-D object.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_PARALLEL_X 34 Applies the texture parallel to the horizontal axis.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_OBJECT_X 4c Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object.
35 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_REPLACE 24 Applies the texture without shading.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_PARALLEL_Y 32 Applies the texture parallel to the vertical axis.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_CIRCLE_X 41 Wraps the horizontal axis of the texture pattern around a sphere.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_OBJECT_Y 4c Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object.
34 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_FILTER 37 Blurs the texture slightly to remove unwanted speckles.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_CIRCLE_Y 3f Wraps the vertical axis of the texture pattern around a sphere.
37 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_LUMINANCE 28 Converts the texture to black and white.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_MODULATE 7f Applies the texture with shading. To define the shading options for the texture, click the Shading button in this dialogue box.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_SPECULAR_COLOR 2b Enter the intensity of the specular effect.
32 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_MATERIAL 31 Changes the colouring of the selected 3-D object.
31 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_SPECULAR 36 Select the colour that you want the object to reflect.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_EMISSION_COLOR 36 Select the colour that you want the object to reflect.
31 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_EMISSION 2b Select the colour to illuminate the object.
40 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_MAT_SPECULAR_INTENSITY 2b Enter the intensity of the specular effect.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_MAT_COLOR 2b Select the colour to illuminate the object.
2e svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_COLOR 37 Select the colour that you want to apply to the object.
32 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_FAVORITES 5b Select a predefined colour scheme, or select User-defined to define a custom colour scheme.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_DISTANCE 64 Distributes the selected objects vertically, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_LEFT 6b Distributes the selected objects, so that the left edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
38 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_TOP 6a Distributes the selected objects, so that the top edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
1a .uno%3ADistributeSelection 9d Distributes three or more selected objects evenly along the horizontal axis or the vertical axis. You can also evenly distribute the spacing between objects.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_BOTTOM 6d Distributes the selected objects, so that the bottom edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
3a cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_RIGHT 6c Distributes the selected objects, so that the right edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_NONE 2b Does not distribute the objects vertically.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_CENTER 71 Distributes the selected objects, so that the vertical centres of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_CENTER 73 Distributes the selected objects, so that the horizontal centres of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_NONE 2d Does not distribute the objects horizontally.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_DISTANCE 66 Distributes the selected objects horizontally, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
1f CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_CHANGEALL 49 Replaces all occurrences of the unknown word with the current suggestion.
20 CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_IGNORERULE 74 While performing a grammar check, click Ignore Rule to ignore the rule that is currently flagged as a grammar error.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3ALB_LANGUAGE 34 Specifies the language to use to check the spelling.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3ACB_CHECK_GRAMMAR 54 Mark Check grammar to work first on all spelling errors, then on all grammar errors.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3APB_UNDO 74 Click to undo the last change in the current sentence. Click again to undo the previous change in the same sentence.
37 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3AMB_ADDTODICT 33 Adds the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3ALB_SUGGESTION 7e Lists suggested words to replace the misspelt word. Select the word that you want to use, and then click Change or Change All.
1f .uno%3ASpellingAndGrammarDialog a0 Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. If a grammar checking extension is installed, the dialogue box also checks for grammar errors.
1c CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_CHANGE 88 Replaces the unknown word with the current suggestion. If you changed more than just the misspelt word, the entire sentence is replaced.
38 cui%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3AED_NEWWORD 8f Displays the sentence with the misspelt word highlighted. Edit the word or the sentence, or click one of the suggestions in the text box below.
f .uno%3ASpelling a0 Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. If a grammar checking extension is installed, the dialogue box also checks for grammar errors.
35 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3APB_OPTIONS 75 Opens a dialogue box, in which you can select the user-defined dictionaries, and set the rules for checking spelling.
1f CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_IGNOREALL 64 Skips all occurrences of the unknown word in the entire document and continues with the spell check.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3APB_AUTOCORR 75 Opens a dialogue box, in which you can select the user-defined dictionaries, and set the rules for checking spelling.
1c CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_IGNORE 3a Skips the unknown word and continues with the spell check.
17 .uno%3AMoreDictionaries 3d Opens the default browser on the dictionaries extension page.
13 .uno%3ALanguageMenu 46 Opens a sub-menu from which you can choose language-specific commands.
18 .uno%3AChineseConversion 8a Converts the selected Chinese text from one Chinese writing system to the other. If no text is selected, the entire document is converted.
35 svx%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_THESAURUS%3AMB_LANGUAGE 24 Select a language for the thesaurus.
16 .uno%3AThesaurusDialog 53 Opens a dialogue box to replace the current word with a synonym, or a related term.
2b svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_THESAURUS%3AED_REPL af The word or words in the "Replace with" text box will replace the original word in the document when you click the Replace button. You can also type text directly in this box.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_THESAURUS%3ABTN_LEFT 3d Recalls the previous contents of the "Current word" text box.
10 .uno%3AThesaurus 53 Opens a dialogue box to replace the current word with a synonym, or a related term.
2f svx%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_THESAURUS%3ACB_WORD b6 Displays the current word, or the related term that you selected by double-clicking a line in the Alternatives list. You can also type text directly in this box to look up your text.
1c CUI_HID_CT_THES_ALTERNATIVES c8 Click an entry in the Alternatives list to copy the related term to the "Replace with" text box. Double-click an entry to copy the related term to the "Current word" text box and to look up that term.
30 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ABTN_EXEC 76 Replaces the selected source colours in the current image with the colours that you specify in the Replace with boxes.
1b SVX_HID_BMPMASK_TBI_PIPETTE 8f Select one of the four source colour boxes. Move the mouse pointer over the selected image, and then click the colour that you want to replace.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_3 d7 Set the tolerance for replacing a source colour in the source image. To replace colours that are similar to the colour that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colours, enter a higher value.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_1 99 Lists the available replacement colours. To modify the current list of colours, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colours tab.
1b SVX_HID_BMPMASK_CTL_PIPETTE a7 Displays the colour in the selected image that directly underlies the current mouse pointer position. This features only works if the Colour Replacer tool is selected.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_4 d7 Set the tolerance for replacing a source colour in the source image. To replace colours that are similar to the colour that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colours, enter a higher value.
1a SVX_HID_BMPMASK_CTL_QCOL_1 b3 Displays the colour in the selected image that you want to replace. To set the source colour, click here, click the Colour Replacer, and then click a colour in the selected image.
2d svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_TRANS 48 Select the colour to replace the transparent areas in the current image.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_4 72 Mark this check box to replace the current Source colour with the colour that you specify in the Replace with box.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_3 72 Mark this check box to replace the current Source colour with the colour that you specify in the Replace with box.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_2 d7 Set the tolerance for replacing a source colour in the source image. To replace colours that are similar to the colour that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colours, enter a higher value.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_2 72 Mark this check box to replace the current Source colour with the colour that you specify in the Replace with box.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_1 72 Mark this check box to replace the current Source colour with the colour that you specify in the Replace with box.
e .uno%3ABmpMask 67 Opens the Colour Replacer dialogue box, where you can replace colours in bitmap and meta file graphics.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_TRANS 50 Replaces transparent areas in the current image with the colour that you select.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_3 99 Lists the available replacement colours. To modify the current list of colours, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colours tab.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_4 99 Lists the available replacement colours. To modify the current list of colours, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colours tab.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_1 d7 Set the tolerance for replacing a source colour in the source image. To replace colours that are similar to the colour that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colours, enter a higher value.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_2 99 Lists the available replacement colours. To modify the current list of colours, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colours tab.
15 .uno%3AAutoCorrectDlg 3e Sets the options for automatically replacing text as you type.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOFMT_APPLY%3APB_EDIT 29 Modifies the selected AutoCorrect option.
20 CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_OPTIONS 56 Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK.
1c CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_CLB 56 Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK.
1e CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOFORMAT_CLB 56 Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK.
1f CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOFMT_OPTIONS 56 Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK.
20 CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE 6e Edits the replacement table for automatically correcting or replacing words or abbreviations in your document.
1f CUI_HID_OFACTL_AUTOCORR_REPLACE 12f Lists the entries for automatically replacing words or abbreviations while you type. To add an entry, enter text in the Replace and With boxes, and then click New. To edit an entry, select it, change the text in the With box, and then click Replace. To delete an entry, select it, and then click Delete.
34 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3AED_SHORT 47 Enter the word or abbreviation that you want to replace while you type.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3APB_NEW_REPLACE 33 Adds or replaces an entry in the replacement table.
36 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3AED_REPLACE f3 Enter the replacement text, graphic, frame, or OLE object that you want to replace the text in the Replace box. If you have selected text, a graphic, a frame, or an OLE object in your document, the relevant information is already entered here.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3ACB_TEXT_ONLY 85 Saves the entry in the With box without formatting. When the replacement is made, the text uses the same format as the document text.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3APB_NEWDOUBLECAPS 31 Adds the current entry to the list of exceptions.
34 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3AED_ABBREV d9 Type an abbreviation followed by a full stop, and then click New. This prevents $[officename] from automatically capitalising the first letter of the word that comes after the full stop at the end of the abbreviation.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3APB_NEWABBREV 31 Adds the current entry to the list of exceptions.
1f CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT 6d Specify the abbreviations or letter combinations that you do not want $[officename] to correct automatically.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3ACB_AUTOABBREV 134 Automatically adds abbreviations or words that start with two capital letters to the corresponding list of exceptions. This feature only works if the Correct TWo INitial CApitals option or the Capitalise first letter of every sentence option are selected in the [T] column onOptions tab of this dialogue box.
39 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3AED_DOUBLE_CAPS ce Type the word or abbreviation that starts with two capital letters that you do not want $[officename] to change to one initial capital. For example, enter PC to prevent $[officename] from changing PC to Pc.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3ACB_AUTOCAPS 134 Automatically adds abbreviations or words that start with two capital letters to the corresponding list of exceptions. This feature only works if the Correct TWo INitial CApitals option or the Capitalise first letter of every sentence option are selected in the [T] column onOptions tab of this dialogue box.
3c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3ALB_DOUBLE_CAPS b3 Lists the words or abbreviations that start with two initial capitals that are not automatically corrected. All words which start with two capital letters are listed in the field.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3ALB_ABBREV 3d Lists the abbreviations that are not automatically corrected.
19 CUI_HID_AUTOCORR_LANGUAGE 4f Select the language for which you want to create or edit the replacement rules.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_DBL_STD 32 Resets the quotation marks to the default symbols.
39 cui%3ACheckbox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3ACB_SGL_TYPO 78 Automatically replaces the default system symbol for single quotation marks with the special character that you specify.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_STARTQUOTE 9e Select the special character that will automatically replace the current opening quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_SGL_STD 32 Resets the quotation marks to the default symbols.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_SGL_STARTQUOTE 9e Select the special character that will automatically replace the current opening quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply.
1c CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_QUOTE_SW_CLB 5a Select to apply the replacements while you type [T], or when you modify existing text [M].
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_ENDQUOTE 9e Select the special character that will automatically replace the current closing quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_SGL_ENDQUOTE 9e Select the special character that will automatically replace the current closing quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply.
35 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3ACB_TYPO 78 Automatically replaces the default system symbol for single quotation marks with the special character that you specify.
1a SW_HID_LINGU_WORD_LANGUAGE 63 Changes the language settings for the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary.
15 SW_HID_LINGU_ADD_WORD 37 Adds the highlighted word to a user-defined dictionary.
19 SW_HID_LINGU_SPELLING_DLG 23 Opens the Spell Check dialogue box.
22 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_IGNORE 46 Ignores all instances of the highlighted word in the current document.
23 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_ADDWORD 37 Adds the highlighted word to a user-defined dictionary.
1a SW_HID_LINGU_PARA_LANGUAGE 7e Changes the language setting for the paragraph that contains the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary.
27 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_AUTOCORRECT a2 To always replace the highlighted word, choose a word from the list. The word pair is stored in the replacement table under Tools - AutoCorrect Options - Replace.
14 SW_HID_LINGU_REPLACE 67 Click the word to replace the highlighted word. Use the AutoCorrect sub-menu for permanent replacement.
15 SW_HID_LINGU_AUTOCORR a2 To always replace the highlighted word, choose a word from the list. The word pair is stored in the replacement table under Tools - AutoCorrect Options - Replace.
21 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_START 23 Opens the Spell Check dialogue box.
18 SW_HID_LINGU_IGNORE_WORD 46 Ignores all instances of the highlighted word in the current document.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_APPEND_SPACE 49 If you do not add punctuation after the word, $[officename] adds a space.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_ACTIV 92 Stores frequently used words, and automatically completes a word after you type three letters that match the first three letters of a stored word.
42 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_REMOVE_LIST f3 When marked, the list is cleared upon closing the current document. When cleared, makes the current Word Completion list available to other documents after you close the current document. The list remains available until you exit %PRODUCTNAME.
46 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ANF_MAX_ENTRIES 55 Enter the maximum number of words that you want to store in the Word Completion list.
42 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ALB_ENTRIES ec Lists the collected words. The list is valid until you close the current document. To make the list available to other documents in the current session, unmark "When closing a document, remove the words collected from it from the list".
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_AS_TIP 2a Displays the completed word as a Help Tip.
46 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ANF_MIN_WORDLEN 5c Enter the minimum word length for a word to become eligible for the word completion feature.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_COLLECT 87 Adds the frequently used words to a list. To remove a word from the Word Completion list, select the word, and then click Delete Entry.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3APB_ENTRIES 41 Removes the selected word or words from the Word Completion list.
41 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ADCB_EXPAND_KEY 4c Select the key that you want to use to accept the automatic word completion.
38 SVX_PUSHBUTTON_RID_OFAPAGE_SMARTTAG_OPTIONS_PB_SMARTTAGS 78 To configure a Smart Tag, select the name of the Smart Tag, then click Properties. Not all Smart Tags can be configured.
36 SVX_CHECKBOX_RID_OFAPAGE_SMARTTAG_OPTIONS_CB_SMARTTAGS 43 Enables Smart Tags to be evaluated and shown in your text document.
14 .uno%3AOutlineBullet 69 Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets.
20 .uno%3ABulletsAndNumberingDialog 69 Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets.
17 CUI_HID_VALUESET_BULLET 2c Click the bullet style that you want to use.
1a CUI_HID_VALUESET_SINGLENUM 2f Click the numbering style that you want to use.
14 CUI_HID_VALUESET_NUM 2d Click the outline style that you want to use.
31 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PICK_BMP%3ACB_LINKED 6c If enabled, the graphics are inserted as links. If not enabled, the graphics are embedded into the document.
17 CUI_HID_VALUESET_NUMBMP 33 Click the graphics that you want to use as bullets.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AED_PREFIX 4c Enter a character or the text to display in front of the number in the list.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ACB_RATIO 2e Maintains the size proportions of the graphic.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3APB_BULLET 55 Opens the Special Characters dialogue box, from which you can select a bullet symbol.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_BUL_COLOR 30 Select a colour for the current numbering style.
37 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AED_START 32 Enter a new starting number for the current level.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_ORIENT 2c Select the alignment option for the graphic.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_CHARFMT 32 Enter a new starting number for the current level.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ANF_ALL_LEVEL 32 Enter a new starting number for the current level.
36 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AMB_BITMAP 50 Select the graphic, or locate the graphic file that you want to use as a bullet.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AMF_WIDTH 1e Enter a width for the graphic.
37 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_LEVEL 47 Select the level(s) that you want to define the formatting options for.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AMF_BUL_REL_SIZE 7b Enter the amount by which you want to resize the bullet character with respect to the font height of the current paragraph.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AMF_HEIGHT 1f Enter a height for the graphic.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AED_SUFFIX a0 Enter a character or the text to display behind the number in the list. If you want to create a numbered list that uses the style "1.)", enter ".)" in this box.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_FMT 31 Select a numbering style for the selected levels.
2f sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_NUMDIST 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
38 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_INDENT 6f Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_ALIGN 124 Set the alignment of the numbering symbols. Select "Left" to align the numbering symbol to start directly at the "Aligned at" position. Select "Right" to align the symbol to end directly before the "Aligned at" position. Select "Centred" to centre the symbol around the "Aligned at" position.
2e sw%3AMultiListBox%3ATP_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_LEVEL 2c Select the level(s) that you want to modify.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_INDENT_AT 80 Enter the distance from the left page margin to the beginning of all lines in the numbered paragraph that follow the first line.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ACB_RELATIVE 4f Indents the current level relative to the previous level in the list hierarchy.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_NUMDIST 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
3c cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_BORDERDIST f1 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin (or the left edge of the text object) and the left edge of the numbering symbol. If the current paragraph style uses an indent, the amount you enter here is added to the indent.
2e sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_INDENT 6f Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text.
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_BORDERDIST f1 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin (or the left edge of the text object) and the left edge of the numbering symbol. If the current paragraph style uses an indent, the amount you enter here is added to the indent.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_NUM_POSITION%3ACB_RELATIVE 4f Indents the current level relative to the previous level in the list hierarchy.
38 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_LEVEL 2c Select the level(s) that you want to modify.
3c cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_ALIGNED_AT 5b Enter the distance from the left page margin at which the numbering symbol will be aligned.
2f sw%3APushButton%3ATP_NUM_POSITION%3APB_STANDARD 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_ALIGN_2 124 Set the alignment of the numbering symbols. Select "Left" to align the numbering symbol to start directly at the "Aligned at" position. Select "Right" to align the symbol to end directly before the "Aligned at" position. Select "Centred" to centre the symbol around the "Aligned at" position.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_LISTTAB 6e If you select a tab stop to follow the numbering, you can enter a non-negative value as the tab stop position.
3f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_LABEL_FOLLOWED_BY 53 Select the element that will follow the numbering: a tab stop, a space, or nothing.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_ALIGN 124 Set the alignment of the numbering symbols. Select "Left" to align the numbering symbol to start directly at the "Aligned at" position. Select "Right" to align the symbol to end directly before the "Aligned at" position. Select "Centred" to centre the symbol around the "Aligned at" position.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3APB_STANDARD 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_NEWDLG 2a Opens the editor and creates a new dialog.
18 BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_LIBS ab Lists the libraries and the modules where you can open or save your macros. To save a macro with a particular document, open the document, and then open this dialogue box.
34 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_PB_EDIT 59 Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro or dialog for editing.
12 .uno%3AMacroDialog 28 Opens a dialogue box to organise macros.
33 basctl%3AEdit%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_ED_MACRONAME 67 Displays the name of the selected macro. To create or to change the name of a macro, enter a name here.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_EDIT 2f Opens the selected macro or dialog for editing.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_NEWLIB 16 Creates a new library.
36 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_PB_NEWMOD 29 Saves the recorded macro in a new module.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_PASSWORD 37 Assigns or edits the password for the selected library.
2f basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_EDIT 51 Opens the $[officename] Basic editor so that you can modify the selected library.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_PB_RUN 20 Runs or saves the current macro.
2f basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_DLGS%3ARID_PB_EDIT 59 Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro or dialog for editing.
2e basctl%3AListBox%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_LB_BASICS 60 Select the application or the document containing the macro libraries that you want to organise.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_DLGS%3ARID_PB_NEWDLG 2a Opens the editor and creates a new dialog.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_PB_ORG 7c Opens the Macro Organiser dialogue box, in which you can add, edit or delete existing macro modules, dialogs, and libraries.
36 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_PB_ASSIGN 88 Opens the Customise dialogue box, in which you can assign the selected macro to a menu command, a shortcut key combination, or an event.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_DEL 2a Prompts you to delete the selected script.
2f basctl%3AEdit%3ARID_DLG_NEWLIB%3ARID_ED_LIBNAME 2b Enter a name for the new library or module.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_CREATE 15 Creates a new script.
1d BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_LIBS_TREE 56 Lists the existing macro libraries for the current application and any open documents.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_RENAME 4d Opens a dialogue box in which you can change the name of the selected script.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_APPEND 65 Locate the $[officename] Basic library that you want to add to the current list, and then click Open.
36 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_PB_NEWLIB 2a Saves the recorded macro in a new library.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_EDIT 3a Opens the default script editor for your operating system.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_PB_DEL 33 Creates a new macro, or deletes the selected macro.
12 CUI_HID_SCRIPTSBOX 83 Select a macro or script from "user", "share", or an open document. To view the available macros or scripts, double-click an entry.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_NEWMOD 2a Opens the editor and creates a new module.
20 BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_MODULES_TREE 26 Lists the existing macros and dialogs.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_RUN 41 To run a script, select a script in the list, and then click Run.
1a BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_MACROS 52 Lists the macros that are contained in the module selected in the Macro from list.
15 .uno%3AMacroSignature 74 Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your macros. You can also use the dialogue box to view certificates.
f .uno%3ARunMacro 36 Opens a dialogue box with which you can start a macro.
27 .uno%3AMacroOrganizer%3FTabId%3Ashort=1 32 Opens the Dialogs tab page of the Macro Organiser.
14 .uno%3AMacroRecorder 14 Records a new macro.
14 .uno%3AStopRecording 18 Stops recording a macro.
33 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_PASSWORD%3AED_REPEAT_PASSWD 33 Re-enter the new password for the selected library.
10 SVX_HID_PASSWORD 2e Protects the selected library with a password.
30 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_PASSWORD%3AED_OLD_PASSWD 34 Enter the current password for the selected library.
30 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_PASSWORD%3AED_NEW_PASSWD 2e Enter a new password for the selected library.
44 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer%3FScriptOrganizer.Language%3Astring=BeanShell 37 Opens a dialogue box in which you can organise scripts.
16 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer 5b Opens a sub-menu with links to dialogue boxes in which you can organise macros and scripts.
45 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer%3FScriptOrganizer.Language%3Astring=JavaScript 37 Opens a dialogue box in which you can organise scripts.
20 BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_LIBSDLG_TREE 6d Enter a name or the path to the library that you want to append. You can also select a library from the list.
2e basctl%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_LIBS%3ARID_CB_REPL 43 Replaces a library that has the same name with the current library.
2d basctl%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_LIBS%3ARID_CB_REF 6d Adds the selected library as a read-only file. The library is reloaded each time that you start %PRODUCTNAME.
16 .uno%3AConfigureDialog 59 Customises $[officename] menus, shortcut keys, toolbars, and macro assignments to events.
12 .uno%3ALoadToolBox 59 Customises $[officename] menus, shortcut keys, toolbars, and macro assignments to events.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_ADD_COMMANDS b5 Opens the Add Commands dialogue box. Select the command that you want to add to the menu, and then click Add. You can also drag-and-drop the command into the Customise dialogue box.
31 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_CHANGE 2a Opens a sub-menu with additional commands.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_NEW 7a Opens the New Menu dialogue box in which you can enter the name of a new menu as well as select the location for the menu.
1b CUI_HID_SELECTOR_CATEGORIES 60 Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customise dialogue box.
35 cui%3AImageButton%3AMD_MENU_ORGANISER%3ABTN_MENU_DOWN 2a Moves the selected item down one position.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3AMD_MENU_ORGANISER%3ABTN_MENU_UP 28 Moves the selected item up one position.
37 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_CHANGE_ENTRY 2f Opens a menu that contains additional commands.
19 CUI_HID_SELECTOR_COMMANDS 60 Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customise dialogue box.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ALB_MENUS 33 Select the menu and sub-menu that you want to edit.
2d cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ALB_SAVEIN 4a Select the application or open document to which you want to add the menu.
2f cui%3AEdit%3AMD_MENU_ORGANISER%3AEDIT_MENU_NAME 76 Enter a name for the menu. To specify a letter in the name as an accelerator key, enter a tilde (~) before the letter.
1f CUI_HID_SVX_CONFIG_MENU_LISTBOX 6e Moves the selected menu entry up one position or down one position in the menu when you click an arrow button.
34 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ARB_MODULE 41 Displays shortcut keys for the current $[officename] application.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_SAVE 4c Saves the current shortcut key configuration, so that you can load it later.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_ACC_CHANGE 6c Assigns the key combination selected in the Shortcut keys list to the command selected in the Function list.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_RESET 32 Resets modified values back to the default values.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_LOAD 4b Replaces the shortcut key configuration with one that was previously saved.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_ACC_REMOVE 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
22 CUI_HID_CONFIGFUNCTION_ACC_LISTBOX dd Select a function that you want to assign a shortcut key to, click a key combination in the Shortcut keys list, and then click Modify. If the selected function already has a shortcut key, it is displayed in the Keys list.
34 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ARB_OFFICE 49 Displays shortcut keys that are common to all $[officename] applications.
1b CUI_HID_ACCELCONFIG_LISTBOX be Lists the shortcut keys and the associated commands. To assign or modify the shortcut key for the command selected in the Function list, click a shortcut in this list, and then click Modify.
14 CUI_HID_CONFIG_ACCEL 5d Assigns or edits the shortcut keys for $[officename] commands, or $[officename] Basic macros.
1f CUI_HID_CONFIGGROUP_ACC_LISTBOX 63 Lists the available function categories. To assign shortcuts to Styles, open the "Styles" category.
13 CUI_HID_SVX_SAVE_IN 3d Select the location for loading and saving the configuration.
1f CUI_HID_SVX_MODIFY_TOOLBAR_ITEM 22 The Modify button opens a sub-menu
2e cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_UP 27 Moves the selected item up in the list.
1a CUI_HID_SVX_MODIFY_TOOLBAR 23 The Toolbar button opens a sub-menu
17 CUI_HID_SVX_NEW_TOOLBAR 77 Opens the Name dialogue box, with which you enter the name of a new toolbar and select the location of the new toolbar.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_DOWN 29 Moves the selected item down in the list.
1c CUI_HID_SVX_NEW_TOOLBAR_ITEM 85 Opens the Add Commands dialogue box. Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customise dialogue box.
2f cui%3APushButton%3AMD_ICONSELECTOR%3ABTN_DELETE 58 Click to remove the selected icon from the list. Only user-defined icons can be removed.
2f cui%3APushButton%3AMD_ICONSELECTOR%3ABTN_IMPORT a4 Adds new icons to the list of icons. You will see a file open dialogue box that imports the selected icon or icons into the internal icon directory of %PRODUCTNAME.
12 .uno%3ATableEvents 6d Assigns macros to program events. The assigned macro runs automatically every time the selected event occurs.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EVENTS%3APB_ASSIGN 41 Opens the Macro Selector to assign a macro to the selected event.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EVENTS%3APB_DELETE 34 Deletes the macro assignment for the selected event.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MACROASSIGN%3APB_ASSIGN 41 Opens the Macro Selector to assign a macro to the selected event.
1a CUI_HID_SVX_MACRO_LB_EVENT b1 The big list box lists the events and the assigned macros. After you selected the location in the Save In list box, select an event in the big list box. Then click Assign Macro.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MACROASSIGN%3APB_DELETE 34 Deletes the macro assignment for the selected event.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EVENTS%3ALB_SAVEIN 59 Select first where to save the event binding, in the current document or in %PRODUCTNAME.
25 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_SETTINGS_DIALOG 2d Displays the help page for this dialogue box.
1a FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_SAVE 5c Displays a Save as dialogue box to save the selected file as an XSLT filter package (*.jar).
1a FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST 38 Opens a dialogue box with the name of the selected file.
1c FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_DELETE 4a Deletes the selected file after you confirm the dialogue box that follows.
1c .uno%3AOpenXMLFilterSettings 85 Opens the XML Filter Settings dialogue box, in which you can create, edit, delete and test filters to import and to export XML files.
1b FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_CLOSE 18 Closes the dialogue box.
1a FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_OPEN 53 Displays an Open dialogue box to open a filter from an XSLT filter package (*.jar).
1a FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_EDIT 38 Opens a dialogue box with the name of the selected file.
19 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_NEW 33 Opens a dialogue box with the name of a new filter.
1a FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_LIST 3a Select one or more filters, then click one of the buttons.
23 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TABPAGE_BASIC 34 Enter or edit general information for an XML filter.
1f FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_EXTENSION 99 Enter the file extension to use when you open a file without specifying a filter. $[officename] uses the file extension to determine which filter to use.
1a FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_NAME 60 Enter the name that you want to display in the list box of the XML Filter Settings dialogue box.
21 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_DESCRIPTION 1b Enter a comment (optional).
21 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_APPLICATION 3c Select the application that you want to use with the filter.
24 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_INTERFACE_NAME 54 Enter the name that you want to display in the File type box in file dialogue boxes.
1d FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_DOCTYPE 22 Enter the DOCTYPE of the XML file.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_IMPORT_XSLT_BROWSE 24 Opens a file selection dialogue box.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_EXPORT_XSLT_BROWSE 24 Opens a file selection dialogue box.
21 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_IMPORT_XSLT 6b If this is an import filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for importing.
19 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_DTD 6e If you want, enter the public or system identifier of the DTD (Document Type Definition) that you want to use.
25 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_IMPORT_TEMPLATE 7b Enter the name of the template that you want to use for importing. In the template, styles are defined to display XML tags.
21 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_EXPORT_XSLT 6b If this is an export filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for exporting.
2c FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_IMPORT_TEMPLATE_BROWSE 24 Opens a file selection dialogue box.
20 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_DTD_BROWSE 24 Opens a file selection dialogue box.
2b FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_XSLT_FILE 5a Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_RECENT 42 Re-opens the document that was last opened with this dialogue box.
29 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_CURRENT d9 The front-most open file that matches the XML filter criteria will be used to test the filter. The current XML export filter transforms the file and the resulting XML code is displayed in the XML Filter output window.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_BROWSE 94 Locate the file to which you want to apply the XML export filter. The XML code of the transformed file is displayed in the XML Filter output window.
2d FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_RECENT_FILE 42 Re-opens the document that was last opened with this dialogue box.
2f FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_TEMPLATE_FILE 57 Displays the file name of the template that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
30 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_DISPLAY_SOURCE 8f Opens the XML Filter output window, where the XML source of the selected document is displayed. The document is used to test the import filter.
2b FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_XSLT_FILE 5a Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_BROWSE 65 Opens a file selection dialogue box. The selected file is opened using the current XML import filter.
23 FILTER_HID_XML_SOURCE_FILE_VALIDATE 37 Validates the contents of the XML Filter output window.
23 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_OUTPUT_WINDOW 28 Lists the test results of an XML filter.
29 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_VALIDATE_OUPUT 28 Lists the test results of an XML filter.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_IGNOREALL 86 No changes will be made to the current selection, and every time that the same selection is detected it will be skipped automatically.
1f CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_IGNORE 6d No changes will be made to the current selection. The next word or character will be selected for conversion.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ACB_REPLACE_BY_CHARACTER 75 Mark this check box to move character-by-character through the selected text. If not marked, full words are replaced.
1f CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CHANGE 5d Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options.
43 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_SIMPLE_CONVERSION 41 The original characters are replaced by the suggested characters.
48 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANJA_HANGUL_BRACKETED 43 The Hangul part will be displayed in brackets after the Hanja part.
20 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_OPTIONS 2c Opens the Hangul/Hanja Options dialogue box.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANJA_HANGUL_ABOVE 44 The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hanja part.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANJA_HANGUL_BELOW 44 The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hanja part.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_SUGGESTIONS_GRID 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
1e CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CLOSE 18 Closes the dialogue box.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANGUL_HANJA_ABOVE 44 The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hangul part.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_SUGGESTIONS_LIST 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ACB_HANJA_ONLY 41 Mark this check box to convert only Hanja. Do not convert Hangul.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ACB_HANGUL_ONLY 41 Mark this check box to convert only Hangul. Do not convert Hanja.
1d CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_SUGGESTIONS 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CHANGEALL af Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options. Every time that the same selection is detected it will be replaced automatically.
48 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANGUL_HANJA_BRACKETED 43 The Hanja part will be displayed in brackets after the Hangul part.
1c .uno%3AHangulHanjaConversion 4f Converts the selected Korean text from Hangul to Hanja or from Hanja to Hangul.
35 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3APB_FIND 57 Finds your Hangul input in the dictionary and replaces it with the corresponding Hanja.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANGUL_HANJA_BELOW 44 The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hangul part.
18 CUI_HID_SPELLDLG_SETWORD 1f Displays the current selection.
1e CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_EDIT_NEWWORD 3e Displays the first replacement suggestion from the dictionary.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3APB_HHO_DELETE 2d Deletes the selected user-defined dictionary.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3APB_HHO_EDIT 60 Opens the Edit Custom Dictionary dialogue box in which you can edit any user-defined dictionary.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3APB_HHO_NEW 50 Opens the New dictionary dialogue box, in which you can create a new dictionary.
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3ACB_IGNOREPOST 56 Ignores positional characters at the end of Korean words when you search a dictionary.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3ACB_SHOWRECENTLYFIRST 60 Shows the replacement suggestion that you selected the last time as the first entry on the list.
20 CUI_HID_HANGULHANJA_OPT_DICTS_LB ad Lists all user-defined dictionaries. Mark the check box next to the dictionary that you want to use. Unmark the check box next to the dictionary that you do not want to use.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3ACB_AUTOREPLACEUNIQUE 4b Automatically replaces words that only have one suggested word replacement.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_NEWDICT%3AED_DICTNAME 20 Enter a name for the dictionary.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3APB_HHE_DELETE 1b Deletes the selected entry.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_4 95 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_3 95 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_2 95 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_1 95 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3ALB_BOOK 39 Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3APB_HHE_NEW 3a Adds the current replacement definition to the dictionary.
3c cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3ALB_ORIGINAL 79 Select the entry in the current dictionary that you want to edit. If you want, you can also type a new entry in this box.
12 .uno%3ASpellDialog 19 Checks spelling manually.
10 .uno%3ANewWindow 44 Opens a new window that displays the contents of the current window.
33 padmin%3APushButton%3ARID_PADIALOG%3ARID_PA_BTN_STD 2a Opens the Select Certificate dialogue box.
3e xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECDLG_DIGSIG%3ABTN_VIEWCERT 28 Opens the View Certificate dialogue box.
33 padmin%3APushButton%3ARID_PADIALOG%3ARID_PA_BTN_DEL 2a Removes the selected source from the list.
29 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_SIGNATURESDLG 36 Lists the digital signatures for the current document.
31 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_DOCINFODOC%3ABTN_SIGNATURE 76 Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialogue box to view certificates.
10 .uno%3ASignature 76 Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialogue box to view certificates.
46 desktop%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE_DESCRIPTIONS 9b While checking for updates, you see a progress indicator. Wait for some messages to show up in the dialogue box, or click Cancel to abort the update check.
21 DESKTOP_HID_DEPLOYMENT_GUI_UPDATE ec Click the Check for Updates button in the Extension Manager to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update.
28 DESKTOP_HID_DEPLOYMENT_GUI_UPDATEINSTALL ec Click the Check for Updates button in the Extension Manager to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update.
38 desktop%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE_ALL 92 By default, only the downloadable extensions are shown in the dialogue box. Mark Show all Updates to see also other extensions and error messages.
39 desktop%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE_OK 5a When you click the Install button the Download and Installation dialogue box is displayed.
13 .uno%3AInsertZWNBSP 94 Inserts an invisible space within a word that will keep the word together at the end of a line. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
17 .uno%3AInsertHardHyphen 4d Inserts a hyphen that will keep bordering characters together on line breaks.
1d .uno%3AInsertNonBreakingSpace 4c Inserts a space that will keep bordering characters together on line breaks.
10 .uno%3AInsertRLM 92 Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
10 .uno%3AInsertLRM 92 Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
19 .uno%3AFormattingMarkMenu 52 Opens a sub-menu to insert special formatting marks. Enable CTL for more commands.
11 .uno%3AInsertZWSP a9 Inserts an invisible space within a word that will insert a line break once it becomes the last character in a line. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
17 .uno%3AInsertSoftHyphen 80 Inserts an invisible hyphen within a word that will appear and create a line break once it becomes the last character in a line.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_LISTVIEW 55 Displays the contents of the Gallery as small icons, with title and path information.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_NEWTHEME 56 Adds a new theme to the Gallery and lets you choose the files to include in the theme.
16 SVX_HID_GALLERY_WINDOW 52 To insert a Gallery object, select the object, and then drag it into the document.
e .uno%3AGallery 5e Opens the Gallery, from which you can select graphics and sounds to insert into your document.
19 SVX_HID_GALLERY_THEMELIST 3c Click a theme to view the objects associated with the theme.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_ICONVIEW 2e Displays the contents of the Gallery as icons.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ABTN_SEARCH 52 Locate the directory containing the files that you want to add, and then click OK.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ABTN_TAKE 2f Adds the selected file(s) to the current theme.
40 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ACBX_PREVIEW 31 Displays or hides a preview of the selected file.
42 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ABTN_TAKEALL 37 Adds all of the files in the list to the current theme.
42 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ALBX_FOUND 8b Lists the available files. Select the file(s) that you want to add, and then click Add. To add all of the files in the list, click Add All.
41 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ACBB_FILETYPE 2d Select the type of file that you want to add.
f .uno%3AGridMenu 26 Sets the display properties of a grid.
14 .uno%3ASnapLinesMenu 2d Specifies the display options for snap lines.
14 .uno%3AAVMediaPlayer 85 Opens the Media Player window in which you can preview movie and sound files as well as insert these files into the current document.
14 .uno%3AInsertAVMedia 31 Inserts a video or sound file into your document.
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3APB_CHANGEPATH 2f Click to select a folder to download the files.
36 desktop%3ACheckBox%3ATP_UPDATE_CHECK%3ACB_UPDATE_CHECK 34 You can check for updates manually or automatically.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ACB_AUTODOWNLOAD 92 Mark to enable the automatic check for updates. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialogue box to disable or enable this feature.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DLG f2 Checks for available updates to your version of %PRODUCTNAME. If a newer version is available, you can choose to download the update. After downloading, if you have write permissions for the installation directory, you can install the update.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DOWNLOAD2 9e Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialogue box.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_CANCEL 3b Aborts the download and deletes the partly downloaded file.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_RESUME 1c Continues a paused download.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_PAUSE 40 Pauses the download. Later click Resume to continue downloading.
21 SFX2_HID_DLG_CHECKFORONLINEUPDATE f2 Checks for available updates to your version of %PRODUCTNAME. If a newer version is available, you can choose to download the update. After downloading, if you have write permissions for the installation directory, you can install the update.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_INSTALL 1f Installs the downloaded update.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DOWNLOAD 9e Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialogue box.
2d DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_DISABLE 20 Enable or disable the extension.
1b DESKTOP_HID_PACKAGE_MANAGER 5b The Extension Manager adds, removes, disables, enables and updates %PRODUCTNAME extensions.
2d DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_OPTIONS 5d Select an installed extension, then click to open the Options dialogue box for the extension.
2c DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_REMOVE 44 Select the extension that you want to remove, and then click Remove.
39 service%3Acom.sun.star.deployment.ui.PackageManagerDialog 5b The Extension Manager adds, removes, disables, enables and updates %PRODUCTNAME extensions.
36 desktop%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_DLG_LICENSE%3AML_LICENSE 87 Read the licence. Click the Scroll Down button to scroll down if necessary. Click Accept to continue the installation of the extension.
27 DESKTOP_HID_PACKAGE_MANAGER_TREELISTBOX 81 Select the extension that you want to remove, enable, or disable. For some extensions, you can also open an Options dialogue box.
25 DESKTOP_HID_PACKAGE_MANAGER_MENU_ITEM 5b The Extension Manager adds, removes, disables, enables and updates %PRODUCTNAME extensions.
38 desktop%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_LICENSE%3APB_LICENSE_DOWN 87 Read the licence. Click the Scroll Down button to scroll down if necessary. Click Accept to continue the installation of the extension.
36 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_PASSWORD_CRT%3AED_PASSWORD_REPEAT 16 Re-enter the password.
11 SC_HID_PASSWD_DOC 16 Re-enter the password.
13 SC_HID_PASSWD_TABLE 2e Type a password. A password is case-sensitive.
10 sfx.Edit.2316.28 16 Re-enter the password.
10 sfx.Edit.2316.26 2e Type a password. A password is case-sensitive.
2c sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWD%3AED_PASSWD_CONFIRM 16 Re-enter the password.
24 HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_MORE 38 Click to show or hide the file sharing password options.
2b uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_PASSWORD%3AED_PASSWORD 2e Type a password. A password is case-sensitive.
2d sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWD%3AED_PASSWD_PASSWORD 2e Type a password. A password is case-sensitive.
33 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_PASSWORD_CRT%3AED_PASSWORD_CRT 2e Type a password. A password is case-sensitive.
43 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_ALLOWDUPLICATEFIELDNAMES 98 Allows to use the same field name for multiple fields in the generated PDF file. If disabled, field names will be exported using generated unique names.
3c filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_MAGNF_VISIBLE 86 Select this option to generate a PDF file that shows the text and graphics on the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window.
3e filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_TRANSITIONEFFECTS 4d Selects to export Impress slide transition effects to respective PDF effects.
3e filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_VIEW_PDF_BROWSER 94 Cross-document links are opened with the Internet browser. The Internet browser must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink.
36 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EXPORTNOTES 45 Selects to export comments of Writer and Calc documents as PDF notes.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EXPORTEMPTYPAGES 190 If switched on, automatically inserted blank pages are being exported to pdf file. This is best if you are printing the pdf file double-sided. Example: In a book a chapter paragraph style is set to always start with an odd numbered page. The previous chapter ends on an odd page. %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to export that even numbered page or not.
3a filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EXPORTBOOKMARKS f0 Selects to export bookmarks of Writer documents as PDF bookmarks. Bookmarks are created for all outline paragraphs (Tools - Outline Numbering) and for all table of contents entries for which you did assign hyperlinks in the source document.
3d filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_NONE 28 No changes of the content are permitted.
39 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ACB_ENAB_ACCESS 41 Select this option to enable text access for accessibility tools.
39 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_PDFA_1B_SELECT ea Converts to the PDF/A-1a format. This is defined as an electronic document file format for long term preservation. All fonts that were used in the source document will be embedded into the generated PDF file. PDF tags will be written.
3e filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_VIEW_PDF_DEFAULT 6c Links from your PDF document to other documents will be handled as it is specified in your operating system.
35 filter%3AListBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ALB_FORMSFORMAT 3f Select the format of submitting forms from within the PDF file.
3f filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_INSDEL 3a Only inserting, deleting, and rotating pages is permitted.
34 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_ADDSTREAM 68 This setting enables you to export the document as a .pdf file containing two file formats: PDF and ODF.
40 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_REDUCEIMAGERESOLUTION 51 Selects to resample or down-size the images to a lower number of pixels per inch.
3c filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_MAGNF_DEFAULT c3 Select this option to generate a PDF file that shows the page contents without zooming. If the reader software is configured to use a zoom factor by default, the page shows with that zoom factor.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EXPORTFORMFIELDS 60 Choose to create a PDF form. This can be filled out and printed by the user of the PDF document.
3d FILTER_NUMERICFIELD_RID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR_NUM_MAGNF_INITIAL_PAGE 4d Select this option to show the given page when the reader opens the PDF file.
3e filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_PRINT_HIGHRES 2f The document can be printed in high resolution.
43 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_ANY_NOCOPY 33 All changes are permitted, except extracting pages.
3a FILTER_NUMERICFIELD_RID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER_NUM_BOOKMARKLEVELS 69 Select this option to show bookmark levels down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file.
3a filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_PGLY_SINGPG 48 Select this option to generate a PDF file that shows one page at a time.
3f FILTER_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER_RB_VISIBLEBOOKMARKLEVELS 69 Select this option to show bookmark levels down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file.
3a filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ACB_PGLY_FIRSTLEFT 10f Select this option to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the left. You must enable support for complex text layout on Language settings - Languages in the Options dialogue box.
41 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_LOSSLESSCOMPRESSION 43 Selects a lossless compression of images. All pixels are preserved.
41 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_FILLFORM 29 Only filling in form fields is permitted.
3b filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_PRINT_NONE 27 Printing the document is not permitted.
39 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_MAGNF_WIND 6e Select this option to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit entirely into the reader's window.
3d filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_PRINT_LOWRES 66 The document can only be printed in low resolution (150 dpi). Not all PDF readers honour this setting.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_WNDOPT_OPNFULL 75 Select this option to generate a PDF file that is shown in a full screen reader window in front of all other windows.
40 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_COMMENT 38 Only commenting and filling in form fields is permitted.
3d filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_JPEGCOMPRESSION ca Selects a JPEG compression of images. With a high quality level, almost all pixels are preserved. With a low quality level, some pixels get lost and artefacts are introduced, but file sizes are reduced.
3d filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_OPNMODE_THUMBS 60 Select this option to generate a PDF file that shows a thumbnails palette and the page contents.
3a filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_MAGNF_WIDTH 6d Select this option to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window.
3e filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_OPNMODE_OUTLINE 53 Select to generate a PDF file that shows a bookmarks palette and the page contents.
40 filter%3AComboBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACO_REDUCEIMAGERESOLUTION 2c Select the target resolution for the images.
39 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_DISPDOCTITLE 6a Select this option to generate a PDF file that is shown with the document title in the reader's title bar.
3d filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_UOP_HIDEVTOOLBAR 4c Select this option to hide the reader's toolbar when the document is active.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_WNDOPT_RESINIT 66 Select this option to generate a PDF file that is shown in a window displaying the whole initial page.
3d filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EMBEDSTANDARDFONTS fd Normally the 14 standard Postscript fonts are not embedded in a PDF file, because every PDF reader software already contains these fonts. Enable this option to embed the standard fonts that are installed on your system and that are used in the document.
3b filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_PGLY_DEFAULT 76 Select this option to generate a PDF file that shows the pages according to the layout setting of the reader software.
2c filter%3AEdit%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3AED_PAGES 26 Exports the pages you type in the box.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_CNV_OOO_DOCTOPDF d1 Mark this check box to convert the URLs referencing other ODF files to PDF files with the same name. In the referencing URLs the extensions .odt, .odp, .ods, .odg, and .odm are converted to the extension .pdf.
33 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_RANGE 26 Exports the pages you type in the box.
3f filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_OPNMODE_PAGEONLY 4c Select this option to generate a PDF file that shows only the page contents.
12 .uno%3AExportToPDF 45 Saves the current file to Portable Document Format (PDF) version 1.4.
31 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_ALL 5c Exports all defined print ranges. If no print range is defined, exports the entire document.
37 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_SELECTION 1e Exports the current selection.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_WNDOPT_CNTRWIN 5d Select this option to generate a PDF file that is shown in a reader window centred on screen.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_EXP_BMRK_TO_DEST 140 The bookmarks (targets of references) in PDF files can be defined as rectangular areas. Additionally, bookmarks to named objects can be defined by their names. Mark the check box to export the names of objects in your document as valid bookmark targets. This allows to link to those objects by name from other documents.
38 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_PGLY_CONT 5b Select this option to generate a PDF file that shows pages in a continuous vertical column.
3b FILTER_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER_RB_ALLBOOKMARKLEVELS 52 Select this option to show all bookmark levels when the reader opens the PDF file.
33 FILTER_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR_RB_MAGNF_ZOOM 3e Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file.
35 filter%3AMetricField%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ANF_QUALITY 2f Specify the quality level for JPEG compression.
34 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_TAGGEDPDF 78 Select this option to export special tags into the corresponding PDF tags. This can increase file sizes by huge amounts.
3d filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_UOP_HIDEVMENUBAR 4d Select this option to hide the reader's menu bar when the document is active.
3d filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_UOP_HIDEVWINCTRL 4d Select this option to hide the reader's controls when the document is active.
38 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ACB_ENDAB_COPY 41 Select this option to enable copying of content to the clipboard.
3b filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_PGLY_CONTFAC a2 Select this option to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the right.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_ENAB_RELLINKFSYS 81 Mark this check box to export URLs to other documents as relative URLs in the file system. See "relative hyperlinks" in the Help.
34 filter%3APushButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ABTN_PWD 3b Click to open a dialogue box where you enter the passwords.
34 FILTER_METRICFIELD_RID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR_NUM_MAGNF_ZOOM 3e Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file.
42 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_VIEW_PDF_APPLICATION c2 Cross-document links are opened with the PDF reader application that currently shows the document. The PDF reader application must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink.
17 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsPDF ac Shows the Export as PDF dialogue box, exports the current document to Portable Document Format (PDF), and then opens an e-mail sending window with the PDF as an attachment.
1b UUI_HID_XMLSECDLG_MACROWARN 6c Enable or disable the macros. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Security in the Options dialogue box to set the options.
23 SFX2_HID_WARNING_SECURITY_HYPERLINK 6c Enable or disable the macros. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Security in the Options dialogue box to set the options.
43 xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECDLG_CERTCHOOSER%3ABTN_VIEWCERT 5a Opens the View Certificate dialogue box in which you can examine the selected certificate.
2c XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_CHOOSESIGNATURES 51 Select the certificate that you want to digitally sign the current document with.
3f xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_CERTPATH%3ABTN_VIEWCERT 5a Opens the View Certificate dialogue box in which you can examine the selected certificate.
e .uno%3AWebHtml 95 Creates a temporary copy of the current document in HTML format, opens the system default Web browser, and displays the HTML file in the Web browser.
20 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_EDIT 5c Opens a dialogue box to edit the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding).
1f SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_MODELS_REMOVE 43 Deletes the selected XForm model. You cannot delete the last model.
3c svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_MODEL%3ACB_MODIFIES_DOCUMENT d4 When enabled, the document status will be set to "modified" when you change any form control that is bound to any data in the model. When not enabled, such a change does not set the document status to "modified".
16 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX 3c Specifies the data structure of the current XForms document.
18 .uno%3AShowDataNavigator 3c Specifies the data structure of the current XForms document.
1a SVX_HID_XFORMS_MODELS_LIST 2e Selects the XForms model that you want to use.
1e SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_SHOW_DETAILS 2d Switches the display to show or hide details.
29 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD_ATTRIBUTE 76 Opens a dialogue box to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
22 SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_INSTANCES_REMOVE 42 Deletes the current instance. You cannot delete the last instance.
20 SVX_HID_XFORMS_INSTANCES_MENUBTN 43 This button has sub-menus to add, to edit, and to remove instances.
30 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_MODEL%3AED_INST_NAME f Enter the name.
27 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD_ELEMENT 76 Opens a dialogue box to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
19 SVX_HID_XFORMS_ITEMS_LIST 34 Lists the items that belong to the current instance.
22 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_REMOVE 47 Deletes the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding).
1f SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_INSTANCES_ADD 39 Opens a dialogue box in which you can add a new instance.
1d SVX_HID_XFORMS_MODELS_MENUBTN 28 Adds, renames and removes XForms models.
20 SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_INSTANCES_EDIT 42 Opens a dialogue box in which you can modify the current instance.
1d SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_MODELS_EDIT 21 Renames the selected Xform model.
1a SVX_HID_XFORMS_TAB_CONTROL 3c Specifies the data structure of the current XForms document.
1f SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD 76 Opens a dialogue box to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
1c SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_MODELS_ADD 45 Opens the Add Model dialogue box in which you can add an XForm model.
38 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
3a svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_CONSTRAINT 1f Declares the item as read-only.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
38 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_REQUIRED 1e Declares the item as relevant.
38 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_RELEVANT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_READONLY 1f Declares the item as read-only.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
35 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ALB_DATATYPE 2b Select the data type for the selected item.
38 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_READONLY 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
2e svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3AED_NAME 1b Enter the name of the item.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_CALCULATE 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_READONLY 1f Declares the item as read-only.
31 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3AED_DEFAULT 2c Enter a default value for the selected item.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CALCULATION 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_RELEVANT 1e Declares the item as relevant.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_RELEVANT 1e Declares the item as relevant.
3d svx%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_CONDITION%3AED_CONDITION 12 Enter a condition.
40 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_CONDITION%3APB_EDIT_NAMESPACES 57 Opens the Form Namespaces dialogue box in which you can add, edit or delete namespaces.
21 SVX_HID_XFORMS_NAMESPACEITEM_LIST 34 Lists the currently defined namespaces for the form.
3f svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAMESPACE_ITEM%3APB_ADD_NAMESPACE 21 Adds a new namespace to the list.
42 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAMESPACE_ITEM%3APB_DELETE_NAMESPACE 1f Deletes the selected namespace.
40 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAMESPACE_ITEM%3APB_EDIT_NAMESPACE 1d Edits the selected namespace.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MIN_EXCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an exclusive lower bound for values.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XML_DATA_MODEL 43 Select a model from the list of all models in the current document.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BINDING_NAME d1 Select or enter the name of a binding. Selecting the name of an existing binding associates the binding with the form control. Entering a new name creates a new binding and associates it with the form control.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_DATA_TYPE 41 Select a data type which the control should be validated against.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MIN_INCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an inclusive lower bound for values.
21 EXTENSIONS_UID_PROP_ADD_DATA_TYPE b5 Click the button to open a dialogue box in which you can enter the name of a new user-defined data type. The new data type inherits all facets from the currently selected data type.
27 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_FRACTION_DIGITS 66 Specifies the maximum total number of fractional digits that values of the decimal data type can have.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_WHITESPACES f1 Specifies how whitespace is to be handled when a string of the current data type is being processed. Possible values are Preserve, Replace, and Collapse. The semantics follow the definition at http://www.w3.org/TR/xmlschema-2/#rf-whiteSpace.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_TOTAL_DIGITS 5b Specifies the maximum total number of digits that values of the decimal data type can have.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_EXCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an exclusive upper bound for values.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_PATTERN 12a Specifies a regular expression pattern. Strings validated against the data type must conform to this pattern to be valid. The XSD data type syntax for regular expressions is different from the regular expression syntax used elsewhere in %PRODUCTNAME, for example in the Find & Replace dialogue box.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_LENGTH 30 Specifies the number of characters for a string.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_LENGTH 38 Specifies the maximum number of characters for a string.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_INCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an inclusive upper bound for values.
24 EXTENSIONS_UID_PROP_REMOVE_DATA_TYPE 5a Select a user-defined data type and click the button to delete the user-defined data type.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_READONLY 1f Declares the item as read-only.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BIND_EXPRESSION 77 Enter the DOM node to bind the control model to. Click the ... button for a dialogue box to enter the XPath expression.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CALCULATION 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_RELEVANT 1e Declares the item as relevant.
13 .uno%3APrintDefault 68 Click the Print File Directly icon to print the active document with the current default print settings.
16 .uno%3ABezier_Unfilled 15d Draws a smooth Bézier curve. Click where you want the curve to start, drag, release, and then move the pointer to where you want the curve to end and click. Move the pointer and click again to add a straight line segment to the curve. Double-click to finish drawing the curve. To create a closed shape, double-click the starting point of the curve.
10 .uno%3ACircleCut 1a6 Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of a circle and a diameter line in the current document. To draw a circle segment, drag a circle to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the diameter line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint of the diameter line and click. You do not need to click on the circle. To draw an ellipse segment, hold down Shift while you drag.
18 .uno%3AFreeline_Unfilled bf Draws a free-form line where you drag in the current document. To end the line, release the mouse button. To draw a closed shape, release the mouse button near the starting point of the line.
e .uno%3AEllipse ad Draws an oval where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the oval, and drag to the size you want. To draw a circle, hold down Shift while you drag.
b .uno%3ALine 82 Draws a straight line where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag.
a .uno%3AArc 145 Draws an arc in the current document. To draw an arc, drag an oval to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the arc. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint and click. You do not need to click on the oval. To draw an arc that is based on a circle, hold down Shift while you drag.
11 .uno%3AInsertDraw 79 Click to open or close the Drawing bar, with which you can add shapes, lines, text, and callouts to the current document.
17 .uno%3APolygon_Unfilled 125 Draws a line composed of a series of straight line segments. Drag to draw a line segment, click to define the endpoint of the line segment, and then drag to draw a new line segment. Double-click to finish drawing the line. To create a closed shape, double-click the starting point of the line.
12 .uno%3ADrawCaption 176 Draws a line that ends in a rectangular callout with horizontal text direction from where you drag in the current document. Drag a handle of the callout to resize the callout. To add text, click the edge of the callout, and then type or paste your text. To change a rectangular callout to a rounded callout, drag the largest corner handle when the pointer changes to a hand.
13 .uno%3AText_Marquee ca Inserts animated text with horizontal text direction into the current document. Drag a text frame, and then type or paste your text. To assign an animation effect, choose Format - Text - Text Animation.
b .uno%3ARect c3 Draws a rectangle where you drag in the current document. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. Click where you want to place a corner of the rectangle, and drag to the size you want.
13 .uno%3AVerticalText 14a Draws a text box with vertical text direction where you click or drag in the current document. Click anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. You can also move the cursor to where you want to add the text, drag a text box, and then type or paste your text. Only available when Asian language support is enabled.
f .uno%3ADrawText e1 Draws a text box with horizontal text direction where you drag in the current document. Drag a text box to the size you want anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. Rotate the text box to get rotated text.
16 .uno%3AVerticalCaption 1ab Draws a line that ends in a rectangular callout with vertical text direction from where you drag in the current document. Drag a handle of the callout to resize the callout. To add text, click the edge of the callout, and then type or paste your text. To change a rectangular callout to a rounded callout, drag the largest corner handle when the pointer changes to a hand. Only available when Asian language support is enabled.
a .uno%3APie 17e Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of an oval and two radius lines in the current document. To draw an ellipse pie, drag an oval to the size you want, and then click to define the first radius line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the second radius line and click. You do not need to click on the oval. To draw a circle pie, hold down Shift while you drag.
11 .uno%3ASpinButton 16 Creates a spin button.
c .uno%3ALabel 24 Creates a field for displaying text.
10 .uno%3ATimeField 15 Creates a time field.
13 .uno%3AMoreControls 20 Opens the More Controls toolbar.
10 .uno%3AScrollBar 14 Creates a scrollbar.
12 .uno%3AFileControl 2d Creates a button that enables file selection.
b .uno%3AGrid 34 Creates a table control to display a database table.
b .uno%3AEdit 13 Creates a text box.
12 .uno%3AImagebutton 27 Creates a button displayed as an image.
12 .uno%3ARadioButton 19 Creates an option button.
13 .uno%3AImageControl 4c Creates an image control. It can only be used to add images from a database.
10 .uno%3ADateField 15 Creates a date field.
15 .uno%3AFormattedField 1a Creates a formatted field.
f .uno%3ACheckBox 14 Creates a check box.
f .uno%3AGroupBox 33 Creates a frame to visually group several controls.
11 .uno%3APushbutton 16 Creates a push button.
13 .uno%3ANumericField 18 Creates a numeric field.
17 .uno%3AAutoControlFocus 107 If Automatic Control Focus is activated, the first form control will be selected when you open the document. If the button is not activated, the text will be selected after opening. The Tab Order that you have specified determines which is the first form control.
f .uno%3AComboBox 14 Creates a combo box.
12 .uno%3ARadiobutton 19 Creates an option button.
f .uno%3ACombobox 14 Creates a combo box.
f .uno%3AGroupbox 33 Creates a frame to visually group several controls.
14 .uno%3ACurrencyField 19 Creates a currency field.
16 .uno%3AFormDesignTools 1e Opens the Form Design toolbar.
14 .uno%3ANavigationBar 19 Creates a navigation bar.
e .uno%3AListBox 13 Creates a list box.
d .uno%3AConfig 55 The Form Controls toolbar contains tools that you need to create an interactive form.
13 .uno%3APatternField 18 Creates a pattern field.
f .uno%3ACheckbox 14 Creates a check box.
11 .uno%3ASpinbutton 16 Creates a spin button.
14 .uno%3AConvertToEdit 34 The selected control is transformed into a text box.
18 .uno%3AConvertToCheckBox 35 The selected control is transformed into a check box.
17 .uno%3AConvertToNumeric 39 The selected control is transformed into a numeric field.
15 .uno%3AConvertToFixed 31 The selected control is transformed into a label.
18 .uno%3AConvertToCurrency 3a The selected control is transformed into a currency field.
18 .uno%3AChangeControlType 6a Calls a sub-menu from which you can choose a control type to replace the control selected in the document.
15 .uno%3AConvertToRadio 3a The selected control is transformed into an option button.
14 .uno%3AConvertToList 34 The selected control is transformed into a list box.
1c .uno%3AConvertToImageControl 3a The selected control is transformed into an image control.
18 .uno%3AConvertToImageBtn 39 The selected control is transformed into an image button.
16 .uno%3AConvertToButton 32 The selected control is transformed into a button.
17 .uno%3AConvertToPattern 39 The selected control is transformed into a pattern field.
1b .uno%3AConvertToFileControl 3a The selected control is transformed into a file selection.
19 .uno%3AConvertToFormatted 3b The selected control is transformed into a formatted field.
14 .uno%3AConvertToDate 36 The selected control is transformed into a date field.
15 .uno%3AConvertToCombo 35 The selected control is transformed into a combo box.
14 .uno%3AConvertToTime 36 The selected control is transformed into a time field.
18 SVX_HID_FM_SHOWCOLS_MORE 24 Calls the Show Columns dialogue box.
14 SVX_HID_FM_DELETECOL 26 Deletes the currently selected column.
12 SVX_HID_FM_HIDECOL 1a Hides the selected column.
14 SVX_HID_FM_CHANGECOL 60 Opens a sub-menu to select a data field to replace the data field selected in the table control.
16 SVX_HID_FM_SHOWALLCOLS 2a Click All if you want to show all columns.
14 SVX_HID_FM_INSERTCOL 49 Calls a sub-menu to select a data field to adopt it in the table control.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_DLG_SHOWGRIDCOLUMNS%3A1 93 In the Show Columns dialogue box you can select the columns to be shown. Hold down the Shift or Ctrl (Mac: Command) key to select multiple entries.
13 SVX_HID_FM_SHOWCOLS 45 Calls a sub-menu from which you can choose the columns to show again.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_FM_PROPDLG_TABCTR 46 Opens a dialogue box for editing the properties of a selected control.
18 .uno%3AControlProperties 46 Opens a dialogue box for editing the properties of a selected control.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUEMIN 67 You can determine here a value for the control field to prevent the user from entering a smaller value.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WIDTH 21 Defines the width of the control.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SELECT_SEQ 3a Specifies the list box entry to mark as the default entry.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEMIN 33 Determines the earliest date that a user can enter.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCROLLVALUE_MIN 31 Specify the minimum value of a scrollbar control.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_TIME 16 Sets the default time.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VISUALEFFECT 66 Specifies whether Check boxes and Option buttons are displayed in a 3-D look (default) or a flat look.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VISIBLESIZE bb Specifies the size of scrollbar thumb in "value units". A value of ("Scroll value max." minus "Scroll value min." ) / 2 would result in a thumb which occupies half of the background area.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_STRICTFORMAT 5b If the strict format function is activated (Yes), only the allowed characters are accepted.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FORMATKEY 5a Specifies the format code for the control. Click the ... button to select the format code.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HIDDEN_VALUE 3f You can enter the data that is inherited by the hidden control.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEMIN 67 You can determine here a value for the control field to prevent the user from entering a smaller value.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_POSITION 55 Specifies to show or hide the positioning items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ICONSIZE 52 Specifies whether the icons in a selected Navigation Bar should be small or large.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAME 9f On the Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the control field. On the Form Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the form.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TABINDEX 75 The Tab order property determines the order in which the controls are focused in the form when you press the Tab key.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUESTEP 21 Determines spin button intervals.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ANCHOR_TYPE 2b Defines where the control will be anchored.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_NAVIGATION 54 Specifies to show or hide the navigation items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TARGET_URL 59 Specifies the URL address that opens when you click an "Open document / web page" button.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_DATE 16 Sets the default date.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WHEEL_BEHAVIOR 165 Sets whether the value changes when the user scrolls a mouse wheel. Never: No change of the value. When focused: (default) The value changes when the control has the focus and the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled. Always: The value changes when the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled, no matter which control has the focus.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TRISTATE 77 Specifies whether a check box can also represent ZERO values of a linked database apart from the TRUE and FALSE values.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEMAX 54 Determines a time which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ENABLED 69 If a control field has the property "Enabled" (Yes), the form user will be able to use the control field.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FONT 3a Select the font for the text that is in the control field.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINEINCREMENT 5a Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks the arrow icon on the scrollbar.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MULTISELECTION 36 Allows you to select more than one item in a list box.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LABEL 55 The Label property sets the label of the control field that is displayed in the form.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SPINVALUE 2d Sets the default value for the control field.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BORDERCOLOR 55 Specifies the border colour for controls that have the Border property set to "flat".
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURRSYM_POSITION 65 Determines if the currency symbol is displayed before or after the number when using currency fields.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HEIGHT 22 Defines the height of the control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_PRINTABLE 50 Specifies whether you want the control field to appear in a document's printout.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TABSTOP 55 The Tab stop property determines if a control field can be selected with the tab key.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ORIENTATION 50 Specifies the horizontal or vertical orientation for a scrollbar or spin button.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_STRINGITEMLIST 105 Defines the list entries visible in the document. Open this list and type your text. Use Shift+Enter for a new line. With list and combo boxes, you can define the list entries that will be visible in the document. Open the List entries field and type your text.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_AUTOCOMPLETE 2d Assigns the AutoFill function to a combo box.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOWTHOUSANDSEP 1e Inserts a thousands separator.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPIN 6e The "Yes" option transforms the control field into a spin button, where corresponding arrow buttons are added.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LITERALMASK 76 Defines the literal mask. The literal mask contains the initial values and is always visible after downloading a form.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MAXTEXTLEN 41 Defines the maximum number of characters that the user can enter.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULTVALUE 2d Sets the default value for the control field.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TOGGLE 126 Specifies if a Push Button behaves as a Toggle Button. If you set Toggle to "Yes", you can switch between the "selected" and "not selected" control states when you click the button or press the spacebar while the the control has the focus. A button in the "selected" state appears "pressed in".
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_RECORDMARKER 73 Specifies whether the first column is displayed with row labels, in which the current record is marked by an arrow.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ENABLE_VISIBLE 68 Defines whether the control will be visible in live mode. In design mode, the control is always visible.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ROWHEIGHT 32 Specifies the row height of a table control field.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEMAX 54 Determines a date which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURRENCYSYMBOL 3e You can enter a character or a string for the currency symbol.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VSCROLL 37 Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_READONLY 49 Determines if the control is read-only (Yes) or if it can be edited (No).
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WORDBREAK 24 Displays text on more than one line.
29 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HIDEINACTIVESELECTION 6c Specifies whether a text selection on a control remains selected when a the focus is no longer on a control.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEFORMAT 3f Here you can determine the desired format for the date readout.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_POSITIONY 3e Defines the Y position of the control, relative to the anchor.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_IMAGEPOSITION 4f Specifies the alignment option for text or graphics that are used on a control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_IMAGE_URL 6f The Graphics property specifies the graphic's path and file name that you want to have displayed on the button.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SYMBOLCOLOR 54 Specifies the colour for symbols on controls, for example the arrows on a scrollbar.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HSCROLL 37 Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCROLLVALUE_MAX 31 Specify the maximum value of a scrollbar control.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HELPURL 83 Specifies a batch label in URL spelling which refers to a help document and which can be called with the help of the control field.
17 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TAG 4d Specifies additional information or a descriptive text for the control field.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_BUTTON 73 The Default button property specifies that the corresponding button will be operated when you press the Return key.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_FILTERSORT 5f Specifies to show or hide the filtering and sorting items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCALEIMAGE 31 Resizes the image to fit the size of the control.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REPEAT_DELAY 3d Specifies the delay in milliseconds between repeating events.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEDEFAULT 2d Sets the default value for the control field.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BORDER 62 Determines if the field's border should be displayed "Without frame", with a "3-D look" or "Flat".
27 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SCROLLVALUE 29 Sets the default value for the scrollbar.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_SCROLLBARS 37 Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPININCREMENT 58 Determines intervals to add or subtract with each activation of the spin button control.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FOCUSONCLICK 5e If you set this option to "Yes", the Push Button receives the focus when you click the button.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPINVALUE_MAX 68 Defines a value for the control field which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HELPTEXT 5b Provides the option of entering a help text that will be displayed as a tip on the control.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REPEAT 8c Specifies if the action of a control such as a spin button or a scrollbar repeats when you click the control and hold the mouse button down.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BUTTONTYPE 51 The Action property determines the action that occurs when you activate a button.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TEXTTYPE cf Allows you to use line breaks and formatting in a control field, such as a text box or label. To manually enter a line break, press the Enter key. Select "Multi-line with formatting" to enter formatted text.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALIGN 4f Specifies the alignment option for text or graphics that are used on a control.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAVIGATIONBAR 59 Specifies whether to display the navigation bar on the lower border of the table control.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPINVALUE_MIN 67 You can determine here a value for the control field to prevent the user from entering a smaller value.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEMAX 68 Defines a value for the control field which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BLOCKINCREMENT 5e Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks next to the slider on the scrollbar.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EDITMASK 75 Defines the edit mask. By specifying a character code you can determine what the user can enter in the control field.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MULTILINE cf Allows you to use line breaks and formatting in a control field, such as a text box or label. To manually enter a line break, press the Enter key. Select "Multi-line with formatting" to enter formatted text.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TARGET_FRAME 6b Specifies the target frame to display the document that is opened by the "Open document / web page" action.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ECHO_CHAR b5 If the text box is used as a password input, enter the ASCII-code of the display character. This character is displayed instead of the characters typed by the user for the password.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_RECORDACTIONS 50 Specifies to show or hide the action items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_POSITIONX 3e Defines the X position of the control, relative to the anchor.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUEMAX 68 Defines a value for the control field which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BACKGROUNDCOLOR 30 Sets the background colour of the control field.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEMIN 32 Determines the minimum time that a user can enter.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEFORMAT 37 You can define the desired format for the time display.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CONTROLLABEL 32 Specifies the source for the label of the control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINECOUNT 8d Specifies how many lines should be displayed in the drop-down list. This setting is only active if you chose "Yes" in the "Drop-down" option.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINEEND_FORMAT 5e For text fields, select the line end code to be used when writing text into a database column.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DECIMAL_ACCURACY 4c Determines the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TEXT 34 Sets the default text for a text box or a combo box.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DROPDOWN 43 Specifies whether the combo box should drop-down (Yes) or not (No).
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FILTERPROPOSAL ff While designing your form, you can set the "Filter proposal" property for each text box in the Data tab of the corresponding Properties dialogue box. In subsequent searches in the filter mode, you can select from all information contained in these fields.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CONTROLSOURCE 49 Specifies the field of the data source table to which the control refers.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EMPTY_IS_NULL c9 Defines how an empty string input should be handled. If set to Yes, an input string of length zero will be treated as a value NULL. If set to No, any input will be treated as-is without any conversion.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REFVALUE d3 You can enter a reference value for the web form, which will be remitted to a server when sending the form. With database forms, the value entered is written in the database field, assigned to the control field.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CELL_EXCHANGE_TYPE 4a Select the mode of linking a list box with a linked cell on a spreadsheet.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BOUND_CELL 84 Specifies the reference to a linked cell on a spreadsheet. The live state or contents of the control are linked to the cell content.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LISTSOURCETYPE 3e Determines the data to fill the lists in list and combo boxes.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LISTSOURCE b3 With database forms, specifies the data source for the list content of the form-element. This field can be used to define a value list for documents without a database connection.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LIST_CELL_RANGE 5a Enter a cell range that contains the entries for a list box or combo box on a spreadsheet.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_UNCHECKEDREFVALUE 112 Check boxes and radio buttons in spreadsheets can be bound to cells in the current document. If the control is enabled, the value you enter in Reference value (on) is copied to the cell. If the control is disabled, the value from Reference value (off) is copied to the cell.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BOUNDCOLUMN a9 Use an index to specify the table field or table SQL query to link to the field that is provided under Data field. Valid values for this property are 1, 2, 3, and so on.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_CHANGED 82 The Changed event takes place when the control loses the focus and the content of the control has changed since it lost the focus.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEENTERED 4c The Mouse inside event takes place if the mouse is inside the control field.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_FOCUSLOST 4b The When losing focus event takes place if a control field loses the focus.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_KEYUP 5d The Key released event occurs when the user releases any key while the control has the focus.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_FOCUSGAINED 51 The When receiving focus event takes place if a control field receives the focus.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ACTIONPERFORMED 3a The Execute action event occurs when an action is started.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_TEXTCHANGED 52 The Text modified event takes place if you enter or modify text in an input field.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ITEMSTATECHANGED 58 The Item status changed event takes place if the status of the control field has changed
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEDRAGGED 65 The Mouse moved while key pressed event takes place when the mouse is dragged while a key is pressed.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEEXITED 50 The Mouse outside event takes place when the mouse is outside the control field.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEPRESSED 6f The Mouse button pressed event occurs if the mouse button is pressed while the mouse pointer is on the control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEMOVED 41 The Mouse moved event occurs if the mouse moves over the control.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_KEYTYPED 5b The Key pressed event occurs when the user presses any key while the control has the focus.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSERELEASED 71 The Mouse button released event occurs if the mouse button is released while the mouse pointer is on the control.
29 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEACTIONPERFORMED 4d This event takes place before an action is triggered by clicking the control.
15 .uno%3AFormProperties 66 In this dialogue box you can specify, among others, the data source and the events for the whole form.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SUBMIT_ENCODING 32 Specifies the type for encoding the data transfer.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SUBMIT_METHOD 40 Specifies the method to transfer the completed form information.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_POSITIONING 53 The Before record change event occurs before the current record pointer is changed.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_SUBMITTED 40 The Before submitting event occurs before the form data is sent.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEPARAMETER 63 The Fill parameters event occurs when the form to be loaded has parameters that must be filled out.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RELOADED 49 TheWhen reloading event occurs directly after the form has been reloaded.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RESETTED 3d The After resetting event occurs after a form has been reset.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_CONFIRMDELETE 4b The Confirm deletion event occurs as soon as data is deleted from the form.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ERROROCCURRED 58 The Error occurred event is activated if an error occurs when accessing the data source.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_AFTERUPDATE 66 The After update event occurs after the changed control content has been written into the data source.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ROWCHANGE 58 The After record action event occurs directly after the current record has been changed.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_POSITIONED 60 The After record change event occurs directly after the current record pointer has been changed.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RELOADING 3e The Before reloading event occurs before the form is reloaded.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVERESETTED 37 The Prior to reset event occurs before a form is reset.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_UNLOADED 73 The When unloading event occurs directly after the form has been unloaded; that is, separated from its data source.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_UNLOADING 67 The Before unloading event occurs before the form is unloaded; that is, separated from its data source.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_LOADED 46 The When loading event occurs directly after the form has been loaded.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEROWCHANGE 4b The Before record action event occurs before the current record is changed.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_EDITS 27 Determines if the data can be modified.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAVIGATION 4d Specifies whether the navigation functions in the lower form bar can be used.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATAENTRY 70 Determines if the form only allows the addition of new data (Yes) or if it allows other properties as well (No).
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MASTERFIELDS 82 If you create a sub-form, enter the data field of the parent form responsible for the synchronisation between parent and sub-form.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CYCLE 3f Determines how the navigation should be done using the tab key.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_DELETIONS 26 Determines if the data can be deleted.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_ADDITIONS 20 Determines if data can be added.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SLAVEFIELDS 6c If you create a sub-form, enter the variable where possible values from the parent form field can be stored.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATASOURCE 37 Defines the data source to which the form should refer.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SORT_CRITERIA 9c Specifies the conditions to sort the data in the form. The specification of the sorting conditions follows SQL rules without the use of the ORDER BY clause.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURSORSOURCE ff Determines the content to be used for the form. The content can be an existing table or a query (previously created in the database), or it can be defined by an SQL statement. Before you enter the content you have to define the exact type in Content type.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURSORSOURCETYPE 8a Defines whether the data source is to be an existing database table or query, or if the form is to be generated based on an SQL statement.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ESCAPE_PROCESSING 46 Specifies whether the SQL statement is to be analysed by %PRODUCTNAME.
15 HID_TABORDER_CONTROLS 76 Lists all controls in the form. These controls can be selected with the tab key in the given order from top to bottom.
10 .uno%3ATabDialog 83 In the Tab Order dialogue box you can modify the order in which control fields acquire the focus when the user presses the tab key.
f .uno%3AAddField 55 Opens a window in which you can select a database field to add to the form or report.
11 SVX_HID_FIELD_SEL 88 The field selection window lists all database fields of the table or query that was specified as the data source in the Form Properties.
1e .uno%3ASwitchControlDesignMode b1 Toggles the Design mode on or off. This function is used to switch quickly between Design and User mode. Activate to edit the form controls, deactivate to use the form controls.
1d .uno%3ASwitchXFormsDesignMode b1 Toggles the Design mode on or off. This function is used to switch quickly between Design and User mode. Activate to edit the form controls, deactivate to use the form controls.
15 SVX_HID_FM_NEW_HIDDEN bc Creates a hidden control in the selected form that is not visible on screen and is hidden from the user. A hidden control serves to include data that is transmitted together with the form.
e SVX_HID_FM_NEW 6f Adds new elements to the form. The Add function can only be called if a form is selected in the Form Navigator.
16 SVX_HID_FORM_NAVIGATOR 68 The Form Navigator contains a list of all created (logical) forms with the corresponding control fields.
1a .uno%3AShowPropertyBrowser 3a Starts the Properties dialogue box for the selected entry.
13 SVX_HID_FM_NEW_FORM 23 Creates a new form in the document.
15 .uno%3AShowFmExplorer 85 Opens the Form Navigator. The Form Navigator displays all forms and sub-forms of the current document with their respective controls.
18 SVX_HID_FM_RENAME_OBJECT 1c Renames the selected object.
11 SVX_HID_FM_DELETE 1b Deletes the selected entry.
13 .uno%3AOpenReadOnly 3a Opens forms in Design Mode so that the form can be edited.
11 .uno%3AUseWizards 51 Specifies whether to start the wizard automatically when inserting a new control.
15 .uno%3ADesignerDialog 70 Specifies whether to show or hide the Styles and Formatting window, in which you can assign and organise Styles.
11 .uno%3AStyleApply 57 Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object.
16 .uno%3AStyleApplyState 57 Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object.
15 SVX_HID_STYLE_LISTBOX 57 Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object.
13 .uno%3ACharFontName 4d Allows you to select a font name from the list or enter a font name directly.
11 .uno%3AFontHeight 5d Allows you to choose between different font sizes from the list, or to enter a size manually.
1f .uno%3ATextdirectionLeftToRight 2f Specifies the horizontal direction of the text.
1f .uno%3ATextdirectionTopToBottom 2d Specifies the vertical direction of the text.
16 .uno%3ADecrementIndent 92 Click the Decrease Indent icon to reduce the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the previous default tab position.
16 .uno%3AIncrementIndent 90 Click the Increase Indent icon to increase the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the next default tab position.
10 .uno%3ABackColor 150 Applies the current highlight colour to the background of a text selection. If no text is selected, click the Highlighting icon, select the text that you want to highlight, and then click the Highlighting icon again. To change the highlight colour, click the arrow next to the Highlighting icon, and then click the colour that you want.
16 .uno%3ABackgroundColor ad Click to open a toolbar where you can click a background colour for a paragraph. The colour is applied to the background of the current paragraph or the selected paragraphs.
18 .uno%3AParaspaceIncrease 5f Click the Increase Spacing icon to increase the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph.
18 .uno%3AParaspaceDecrease 5f Click the Decrease Spacing icon to decrease the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph.
15 .uno%3ASetBorderStyle 76 Click the Borders icon to open the Borders toolbar, with which you can modify the border of a sheet area or an object.
10 .uno%3ALineStyle 60 Click this icon to open the Line Style toolbar, with which you can modify the border line style.
15 .uno%3AFrameLineColor 89 Click the Line Colour (of the border) icon to open the Border Colour toolbar, which enables you to change the border colour of an object.
17 .uno%3AToggleAnchorType 2f Allows you to switch between anchoring options.
14 .uno%3AOptimizeTable 57 Opens a toolbar that contains functions for optimising the rows and columns in a table.
13 .uno%3ALineEndStyle 69 Opens the Arrowheads toolbar. Use the symbols shown to define the style for the end of the selected line.
1d .uno%3AToggleObjectRotateMode 1c Rotates the selected object.
12 .uno%3AObjectAlign 2b Modifies the alignment of selected objects.
13 .uno%3AOutlineRight 50 Moves the selected paragraph down one level in a numbering or bullets hierarchy.
15 .uno%3ADecrementLevel 50 Moves the selected paragraph down one level in a numbering or bullets hierarchy.
12 .uno%3AOutlineLeft 50 Moves the selected paragraph up one level in the numbering or bullets hierarchy.
15 .uno%3AIncrementLevel 50 Moves the selected paragraph up one level in the numbering or bullets hierarchy.
d .uno%3AMoveUp 39 Positions the selected paragraph before the one above it.
10 .uno%3AOutlineUp 39 Positions the selected paragraph before the one above it.
f .uno%3AMoveDown 38 Positions the selected paragraph after the one below it.
12 .uno%3AOutlineDown 38 Positions the selected paragraph after the one below it.
14 .uno%3ADefaultBullet 5b Assigns bullet points to the selected paragraphs, or removes them from bulleted paragraphs.
e .uno%3AOpenUrl 9e Loads a document specified by an entered URL. You can type a new URL, edit an URL or select one from the list. Displays the full path of the current document.
a SID_RELOAD 3a Replaces the current document with the last saved version.
d .uno%3AReload 3a Replaces the current document with the last saved version.
21 SFX2_HID_HELP_TEXT_SELECTION_MODE d6 You can enable a selection cursor in a read-only text document or in the Help. Choose Edit - Select Text or open the context menu of a read-only document and choose Select Text. The selection cursor does not blink.
e .uno%3AEditDoc 3b Enables you to edit a read-only document or database table.
15 .uno%3ASelectTextMode d6 You can enable a selection cursor in a read-only text document or in the Help. Choose Edit - Select Text or open the context menu of a read-only document and choose Select Text. The selection cursor does not blink.
11 .uno%3ADSBEditDoc 3d Turns the edit mode for the current database table on or off.
b .uno%3AStop 73 Click to interrupt the current loading process, Ctrl-click (Mac: Command-click) to interrupt all loading processes.
f SID_BROWSE_STOP 73 Click to interrupt the current loading process, Ctrl-click (Mac: Command-click) to interrupt all loading processes.
18 .uno%3AExportDirectToPDF 50 Exports the current document directly as PDF. No settings dialogue box is shown.
15 .uno%3AStatusGetTitle 42 Displays information about the active %PRODUCTNAME Basic document.
18 .uno%3AStatusGetPosition 7d Displays the current cursor position in the %PRODUCTNAME Basic document. The row number is specified, then the column number.
1a SVX_HID_OFA_HYPERLINK_NAME 2a Assigns a name to an Internet URL or file.
19 SVX_HID_OFA_HYPERLINK_URL 55 Allows you to either type a URL, or insert a URL from a document using drag-and-drop.
13 .uno%3ASetHyperlink 3c Inserts a hyperlink from the current URL into your document.
1c SVX_HID_OFA_HYPERLINK_TARGET 36 Specifies the target frame type for the specified URL.
1c CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_CANCEL_BTN 27 Closes the dialogue box without saving.
16 .uno%3ARemoveHyperlink 2a Removes the hyperlink, leaving plain text.
1c .uno%3AOpenHyperlinkOnCursor 30 Opens the hyperlink in your default web browser.
14 .uno%3AEditHyperlink 21 Opens the Hyperlink dialogue box.
16 .uno%3AHyperlinkDialog 44 Opens a dialogue box that enables you to create and edit hyperlinks.
1b CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_RESET_BTN 3f Resets the entries in the dialogue box to their original state.
1c CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_CHOICECTRL 2c Select the type of hyperlink to be inserted.
18 CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_OK_BTN 22 Applies the data to your document.
1c .uno%3ACopyHyperlinkLocation 20 Copies the URL to the clipboard.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ABTN_SCRIPT 8d Opens the Assign Macro dialogue box, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
38 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
43 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ARB_LINKTYP_FTP 19 Creates an FTP hyperlink.
42 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ABTN_SCRIPT 8d Opens the Assign Macro dialogue box, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
1f CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MARKWND_APPLY 45 Inserts the target in the Target field of the Hyperlink dialogue box.
36 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
1f CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MARKWND_CLOSE 6a Once the hyperlink has been completely entered, click on Close to set the link and leave the dialogue box.
48 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ARB_LINKTYP_INTERNET 1a Creates an http hyperlink.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ALB_FORM 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ABTN_BROWSE 3d Opens a web browser, into which you can load the desired URL.
35 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3AED_INDICATION 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ALB_FORM 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
37 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3AED_INDICATION 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
3f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ACBX_ANONYMOUS 3d Allows you to log in to the FTP address as an anonymous user.
35 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_INET_PATH a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
3a cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
1e CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MARKWND_TREE 48 Specifies the position in the target document where you wish to jump to.
3b cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ALB_FORM 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
3e cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_INDICATION 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ABTN_SCRIPT 8d Opens the Assign Macro dialogue box, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ALB_FORM 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_INDICATION 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
3b cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ABTN_SCRIPT 8d Opens the Assign Macro dialogue box, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
3a cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
3d cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
36 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_LOGIN 41 Specifies your login name, if you are working with FTP addresses.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_INTERNET 1a Creates an http hyperlink.
37 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_PASSWD 3f Specifies your password, if you are working with FTP addresses.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_MAIL_PATH 67 Specifies the full URL of the addressee, in the form mailto:name@provider.com or news:group.server.com.
34 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3AED_SUBJECT 57 Specifies the subject that is inserted in the subject line of the new message document.
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ARB_LINKTYP_MAIL 36 Assigns the specified e-mail address to the hyperlink.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ABTN_ADRESSBOOK 27 Hides or shows the data source browser.
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ARB_LINKTYP_NEWS 28 Assigns a news address to the hyperlink.
16 CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MAIL 36 Assigns the specified e-mail address to the hyperlink.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ABTN_BROWSE 2a Opens the Target in Document dialogue box.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3AED_TARGET_DOC 4c Specifies a target for the hyperlink into the document specified under Path.
41 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ABTN_FILEOPEN 3c Opens the Open dialogue box, in which you can select a file.
19 CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_DOC_PATH a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
45 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ALB_DOCUMENT_TYPES 2d Specifies the file type for the new document.
3f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_PATH_NEWDOC 4c Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink.
42 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ARB_EDITNOW 4e Specifies that the new document is created and immediately opened for editing.
1d CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT 4e Specifies that the new document is created and immediately opened for editing.
42 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ABTN_CREATE 43 Opens the Select Path dialogue box, in which you can select a path.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ARB_EDITLATER 48 Specifies that the document is created but it is not immediately opened.
d .uno%3APageUp 30 Moves back to the previous page in the document.
13 .uno%3APreviousPage 30 Moves back to the previous page in the document.
f .uno%3APageDown 30 Moves forwards to the next page in the document.
f .uno%3ANextPage 30 Moves forwards to the next page in the document.
15 .uno%3AGoToStartOfDoc 28 Moves to the first page of the document.
10 .uno%3AFirstPage 28 Moves to the first page of the document.
13 .uno%3AGoToEndOfDoc 27 Moves to the last page of the document.
f .uno%3ALastPage 27 Moves to the last page of the document.
f .uno%3ACloseWin 1a Closes the current window.
22 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_EDIT_DATABASE 2d Opens the selected database file for editing.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_ADMINISTRATE c1 Opens a dialogue box to add/edit/remove a database file from the list of registered databases. The same dialogue box opens by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases in the Options dialogue box.
18 .uno%3ADSBrowserExplorer 36 Turns on and off the view of the data source explorer.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_RENAME_ENTRY c5 To rename an entry, call this command and enter the new name. You can also do this by selecting the entry and pressing F2. The database must support renaming, otherwise this command is not enabled.
1e DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_CLOSECONN 6a Closes the connection to the data source. See %PRODUCTNAME Base - Connections in the Options dialogue box.
f .uno%3ASortDown 39 Sorts the data of the selected field in descending order.
11 .uno%3AAutoFilter 4f Filters the records, based on the content of the currently selected data field.
17 .uno%3ARemoveFilterSort 51 Cancels the filter settings and displays all of the records in the current table.
28 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_REFRESH_REBUILDVIEW 6b Rebuilds the view of the database table. Use this command when you have changed the structure of the table.
e .uno%3ARefresh 1d Refreshes the displayed data.
13 .uno%3ASbaBrwInsert 59 Inserts all fields of the marked record into the current document at the cursor position.
39 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_HEADL_COLNMS 5a Uses the field names of the database table as headings for each of the text table columns.
36 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ALB_TBL_DB_COLUMN 42 Specifies the database columns to be inserted into the text table.
39 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3AIB_DBCOL_ONE_TO 44 Moves the selected database field into the Table column(s) list box.
3b sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3AIB_DBCOL_ONE_FROM 45 Removes the selected database field from the Table column(s) list box
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_AS_TABLE 50 Inserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as a table.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_HEADL_EMPTY 32 Inserts an empty heading line into the text table.
36 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ACB_TABLE_HEADON 4d Specifies whether to insert a heading line for the columns in the text table.
3a sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_DBFMT_FROM_DB 1d Accepts the database formats.
39 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3AIB_DBCOL_ALL_TO 43 Moves all listed database fields into the Table column(s) list box.
37 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3APB_TBL_AUTOFMT 7f Opens the AutoFormat dialogue box, in which you can select format styles that are immediately applied when inserting the table.
3b sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3AIB_DBCOL_ALL_FROM 3e Removes all database fields from the Table column(s) list box.
36 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3APB_TBL_FORMAT 84 Opens the Table Format dialogue box, which enables you to define the table properties such as borders, background, and column width.
37 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ALB_DBFMT_FROM_USR 63 Specifies a format from the list, if the format information of certain data fields is not accepted.
3b sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_DBFMT_FROM_USR 63 Specifies a format from the list, if the format information of certain data fields is not accepted.
32 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ALB_TABLE_COL 3c Lists all database columns to be inserted into the document.
34 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_AS_TEXT 4d Inserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as text.
17 .uno%3ADSBInsertContent 4b Updates the contents of the existing database fields by the marked records.
28 .uno%3ADataSourceBrowser%2FInsertContent 4b Updates the contents of the existing database fields by the marked records.
11 .uno%3AFilterCrit 28 Allows you to set the filtering options.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DLG_FILTERCRIT 28 Allows you to set the filtering options.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_FIELD3 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOMP1 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
2a sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3AED_VAL2 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3AET_WHEREVALUE1 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOMP3 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
1f .uno%3ADataFilterStandardFilter 3b Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3AET_WHEREVALUE2 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOND2 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_FIELD1 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
34 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHEREFIELD2 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
2a sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_COND1 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
34 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHEREFIELD3 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
2a sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3AED_VAL3 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
2a sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3AED_VAL1 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
34 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHEREFIELD1 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
2a sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_COND3 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
28 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_OP2 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_FIELD2 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOND3 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
2a sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_COND2 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOMP2 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3AET_WHEREVALUE3 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
28 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_OP1 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
10 .uno%3AOrderCrit 31 Specifies the sort criteria for the data display.
1a DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ORDERCRIT 31 Specifies the sort criteria for the data display.
13 CUI_HID_SEARCH_TEXT 3c Enter the search term in the box or select it from the list.
13 CUI_HID_SEARCH_CASE 54 Specifies that upper- and lower-case are taken into consideration during the search.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_BTN_CLOSE 63 Closes the dialogue box. The settings of the last search will be saved until you quit %PRODUCTNAME.
19 CUI_HID_SEARCH_BTN_SEARCH 1d Starts or cancels the search.
17 CUI_HID_SEARCH_POSITION 45 Specifies the relationship of the search term and the field contents.
3a cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SINGLEFIELD 28 Searches through a specified data field.
10 .uno%3ARecSearch 23 Searches database tables and forms.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ALB_FORM 46 Specifies the logical form in which you want the search to take place.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SEARCHFORNULL 39 Specifies that fields will be found that contain no data.
1d CUI_HID_SEARCH_FIELDSELECTION 28 Searches through a specified data field.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SEARCHFORNOTNULL 36 Specifies that fields will be found that contain data.
17 CUI_HID_SEARCH_BACKWARD 63 Specifies that the search process will run in reverse direction, from the last to the first record.
16 CUI_HID_SEARCH_REGULAR 22 Searches with regular expressions.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_STARTOVER 78 Restarts the search. A forwards search restarts with the first record. A backwards search restarts with the last record.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_FORMATTER 57 Specifies that all field formats are considered when searching in the current document.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_ALLFIELDS 1c Searches through all fields.
17 CUI_HID_SEARCH_WILDCARD 27 Allows a search with a * or ? wildcard.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SEARCHFORTEXT 3c Enter the search term in the box or select it from the list.
11 .uno%3AFormFilter 4d Prompts the database server to filter the visible data by specified criteria.
13 .uno%3AFormFiltered 3f Switches between the filtered and unfiltered view of the table.
15 .uno%3AViewFormAsGrid 39 Activates an additional table view when in the form view.
2d .uno%3ADataSourceBrowser%2FDocumentDataSource 57 Displays, in the data source browser, the table that is linked to the current document.
1c .uno%3ADSBDocumentDataSource 57 Displays, in the data source browser, the table that is linked to the current document.
14 .uno%3ASbaExecuteSql 31 Runs the SQL query and displays the query result.
13 .uno%3ADBClearQuery 3f Clears the query and removes all tables from the design window.
24 DBACCESS_HID_JOINSH_ADDTAB_TABLELIST 3b Specifies the tables to be inserted into the design window.
20 DBACCESS_HID_JOINSH_ADDTAB_CLOSE 23 Closes the Add Tables dialogue box.
3a dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_JOIN_TABADD%3ARB_CASE_QUERIES 13 Shows only queries.
39 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_JOIN_TABADD%3ARB_CASE_TABLES 12 Shows only tables.
f .uno%3AAddTable 3b Specifies the tables to be inserted into the design window.
35 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_JOIN_TABADD%3APB_ADDTABLE 25 Inserts the currently selected table.
19 .uno%3ADBChangeDesignMode 36 Displays the design view or the SQL view of the query.
13 .uno%3ASbaNativeSql 8c In Native SQL mode you can enter SQL commands that are not interpreted by $[officename], but are instead passed directly to the data source.
16 .uno%3ADBViewFunctions 5c Displays the "Function" row in the lower part of the design view of the Query Design window.
17 .uno%3ADBViewTableNames 3f Displays the "Table" row in the lower part of the Query Design.
14 .uno%3ADBViewAliases 3f Displays the "Alias" row in the lower part of the Query Design.
17 .uno%3ADBDistinctValues 66 Expands the created select statement of the SQL Query in the current column by the parameter DISTINCT.
13 .uno%3ASelectObject 35 Allows you to select objects in the current document.
11 .uno%3ASourceView 9b Displays the source text of the current HTML document. To view the HTML source of a new document, you must first save the new document as an HTML document.
11 SW_HID_SOURCEVIEW 9b Displays the source text of the current HTML document. To view the HTML source of a new document, you must first save the new document as an HTML document.
14 .uno%3APageStyleName 65 Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style.
13 .uno%3ALayoutStatus 65 Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style.
16 .uno%3AStatusPageStyle 65 Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style.
10 .uno%3AStateZoom 2f Specifies the current page display zoom factor.
11 .uno%3AInsertMode 5d Displays the current insert mode. You can toggle between INSRT = insert and OVER = overwrite.
14 .uno%3ASelectionMode 7b Displays the current selection mode. You can switch between STD = Standard, EXT = Extend, ADD = Add, BLK = Block selection.
1a .uno%3AStatusSelectionMode 7b Displays the current selection mode. You can switch between STD = Standard, EXT = Extend, ADD = Add, BLK = Block selection.
13 .uno%3AModifyStatus 9a If changes to the document have not yet been saved, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status Bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
15 .uno%3AModifiedStatus 9a If changes to the document have not yet been saved, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status Bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
f .uno%3AModified 9a If changes to the document have not yet been saved, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status Bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
12 .uno%3ACurrentTime 1a Displays the current time.
12 .uno%3ACurrentDate 1a Displays the current date.
1b .uno%3AGraphicFilterToolbox 84 This icon on the Picture bar opens the Graphic Filter bar, from which you can select various filters to use on the selected picture.
4f cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_POSTER%3ADLG_FILTERPOSTER_NUM_POSTER 44 Specifies the number of colours to which the image is to be reduced.
4a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_MOSAIC%3ADLG_FILTERMOSAIC_CBX_EDGES 2f Enhances, or sharpens, the edges of the object.
4d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_MOSAIC%3ADLG_FILTERMOSAIC_MTR_WIDTH 2a Defines the width of the individual tiles.
1c .uno%3AGraphicFilterSolarize cb Opens a dialogue box for defining solarisation. Solarisation refers to an effect that looks like what can happen when there is too much light during photo development. The colours become partly inverted.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterRelief 2d Displays a dialogue box for creating reliefs.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterInvert 88 Inverts the colour values of a colour image, or the brightness values of a greyscale image. Apply the filter again to revert the effect.
19 .uno%3AGraphicFilterSobel 7f Displays the image as a charcoal sketch. The contours of the image are drawn in black, and the original colours are suppressed.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterMosaic 47 Joins small groups of pixels into rectangular areas of the same colour.
1f .uno%3AGraphicFilterRemoveNoise 2a Removes noise by applying a median filter.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterPoster 3f Opens a dialogue box to determine the number of poster colours.
4e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_MOSAIC%3ADLG_FILTERMOSAIC_MTR_HEIGHT 2b Defines the height of the individual tiles.
19 .uno%3AGraphicFilterSepia a2 All pixels are set to their grey values, and then the green and blue colour channels are reduced by the amount you specify. The red colour channel is not changed.
4f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_SOLARIZE%3ADLG_FILTERSOLARIZE_CBX_INVERT 45 Specifies whether the pixels to be solarised are also to be inverted.
1b .uno%3AGraphicFilterSharpen 32 Sharpens the image by applying a high pass filter.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterSmooth 39 Softens or blurs the image by applying a low pass filter.
55 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_SOLARIZE%3ADLG_FILTERSOLARIZE_MTR_THRESHOLD 5b Specifies the degree of brightness, in percent, above which the pixels are to be solarised.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterPopart 26 Converts an image to a pop-art format.
4b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_SEPIA%3ADLG_FILTERSEPIA_MTR_SEPIA 86 Defines the intensity of ageing, in percent. At 0% you see the grey values of all pixels. At 100% only the red colour channel remains.
f .uno%3AGrafMode a2 Lists view attributes for the selected graphic object. The embedded or linked graphic object in the current file will not be changed, only the view of the object.
e .uno%3AGrafRed 56 Specifies the proportion of red RGB colour components for the selected graphic object.
10 .uno%3AGrafGreen 58 Specifies the proportion of green RGB colour components for the selected graphic object.
f .uno%3AGrafBlue 50 Specifies the proportion of blue RGB colour components for the selected graphic.
14 .uno%3AGrafLuminance 39 Specifies the brightness for the selected graphic object.
13 .uno%3AGrafContrast 3e Specifies the contrast for viewing the selected graphic image.
10 .uno%3AGrafGamma 72 Specifies the gamma value for the view of the selected object, which affects the brightness of the midtone values.
17 .uno%3AGrafTransparence 31 Specifies the transparency in the graphic object.
13 .uno%3AGrafAttrCrop 76 Allows to crop the display of an inserted picture. Only the display gets cropped, the inserted picture is not changed.
b .uno%3ACrop 3b Drag any of the eight cropping handles to crop the picture.
1c .uno%3ABasicShapes.block-arc 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.diamond 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.ellipse 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1c .uno%3ABasicShapes.trapezoid 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.quadrat 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
12 .uno%3ABasicShapes 57 Opens the Basic Shapes toolbar which you can use to insert graphics into your document.
18 .uno%3ABasicShapes.cross 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3ABasicShapes.ring 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
19 .uno%3ABasicShapes.circle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3ABasicShapes.cube 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1b .uno%3ABasicShapes.pentagon 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3ABasicShapes.isosceles-triangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
16 .uno%3ABasicShapes.can 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3ABasicShapes.paper 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3ABasicShapes.right-triangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.hexagon 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ABasicShapes.round-quadrat 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1c .uno%3ABasicShapes.rectangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3ABasicShapes.frame 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3ABasicShapes.round-rectangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.octagon 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ABasicShapes.parallelogram 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3ABasicShapes.circle-pie 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3AArrowShapes.s-sharped-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3AArrowShapes.chevron 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-down-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2b .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-right-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3AArrowShapes.quad-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.notched-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3AArrowShapes.down-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-down--arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AArrowShapes.circular-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AArrowShapes.pentagon-right 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-right-down-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.down-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3AArrowShapes.right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
12 .uno%3AArrowShapes 55 Opens the Block Arrows toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
1d .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3AArrowShapes.split-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
24 .uno%3AArrowShapes.split-round-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1b .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.right-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.striped-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-right-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.quad-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.corner-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2e .uno%3ACalloutShapes.round-rectangular-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.round-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.line-callout-3 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.line-callout-2 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.line-callout-1 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.rectangular-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
14 .uno%3ACalloutShapes 51 Opens the Callouts toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
22 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.cloud-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
14 .uno%3AColorSettings 4c With the Colour toolbar you can edit some properties of the selected object.
2d .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-punched-tape 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
31 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-summing-junction 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
33 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-predefined-process 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2c .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-stored-data 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
16 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes 52 Opens the Flowchart toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
2d .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-manual-input 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-document 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2a .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-connector 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-extract 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
32 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-sequential-access 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-card 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-or 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-process 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
31 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-manual-operation 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
36 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-direct-access-storage 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
32 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-alternate-process 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-merge 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-decision 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2c .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-preparation 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
31 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-internal-storage 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2e .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-magnetic-disk 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-delay 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-sort 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-display 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-collate 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
33 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-off-page-connector 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2b .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-terminator 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2e .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-multidocument 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-data 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3AFontworkGalleryFloater 64 The icon opens the Fontwork Gallery from which you can insert graphical text art into your document.
17 .uno%3AFormatPaintbrush 93 First select some text or an object, then click this icon. Then click on or drag across other text or click an object to apply the same formatting.
11 .uno%3AStarShapes 5a Opens the Stars and Banners toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
18 .uno%3AStarShapes.star12 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AStarShapes.horizontal-scroll 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3AStarShapes.star24 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star4 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
16 .uno%3AStarShapes.bang 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star8 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1f .uno%3AStarShapes.concave-star6 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3AStarShapes.signet 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star6 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AStarShapes.vertical-scroll 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1b .uno%3AStarShapes.doorplate 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star5 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.bracket-pair 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.left-bracket 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
13 .uno%3ASymbolShapes 56 Opens the Symbol Shapes toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
21 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.diamond-bevel 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
19 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.cloud 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3ASymbolShapes.quad-bevel 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ASymbolShapes.flower 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.moon 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.right-bracket 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.sun 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3ASymbolShapes.brace-pair 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ASymbolShapes.puzzle 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3ASymbolShapes.lightning 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.octagon-bevel 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ASymbolShapes.smiley 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1f .uno%3ASymbolShapes.right-brace 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3ASymbolShapes.left-brace 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3ASymbolShapes.forbidden 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
19 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.heart 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 SFX2_HID_HELP_TABCONTROL 62 The navigation pane of the Help window contains the tab pages Contents, Index, Find and Bookmarks.
23 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_BOOKMARKS 20 Adds this page to your bookmarks
2c sfx2%3AComboBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3AED_SEARCH 4e Enter the text that you want to search for or select a text entry in the list.
15 SFX2_HID_HELP_LISTBOX 5d The list box located at the very top is where you can select other %PRODUCTNAME Help modules.
2c sfx2%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3APB_FIND 2d Finds the next occurrence of the search term.
11 .uno%3AHelpOnHelp 27 Provides an overview of the Help system
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_BACKWARDS 3b Searches backwards from the current position of the cursor.
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_INDEX 23 Hides and shows the navigation pane
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_PRINT 17 Prints the current page
30 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_WHOLEWORDS 1a Finds complete words only.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_MATCHCASE 3a Distinguishes between upper-case text and lower-case text.
22 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_BACKWARD 1f Moves back to the previous page
26 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_SEARCHDIALOG 29 Opens the Find on this page dialogue box.
30 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_WRAPAROUND 4e Searches the entire Help page, starting at the current position of the cursor.
21 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_FORWARD 1f Moves forwards to the next page
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_START 31 Moves to the first page of the current Help topic
15 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOX 48 The Toolbar contains important functions for controlling the Help system
2a sfx2%3AComboBox%3ATP_HELP_INDEX%3ACB_INDEX 45 Double-click an entry or type the word you want to find in the index.
31 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_HELP_INDEX%3APB_OPEN_INDEX 24 Click to display the selected topic.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3ALB_RESULT 6a Lists the headings of the pages found in your full-text search. To display a page, double-click its entry.
33 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3APB_OPEN_SEARCH 28 Displays the entry selected in the list.
2e sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3APB_SEARCH 40 Click to start a full-text search for the term that you entered.
2c sfx2%3AComboBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3AED_SEARCH 3d Enter the search term here. The search is not case-sensitive.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3ACB_FULLWORDS 71 Specifies whether to carry out an exact search for the word that you entered. Incomplete words will not be found.
2b sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3ACB_SCOPE 4a Specifies whether to only search in document headings for the search term.
1c SFX2_HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_OPEN 22 displays the selected help subject
1e SFX2_HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_DELETE 1d deletes the bookmark selected
36 sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_HELP_ADDBOOKMARK%3AED_BOOKMARK_TITLE 58 Displays the name of the bookmarked page. You can also type a new name for the bookmark.
1e SFX2_HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_RENAME 3f opens a dialogue box for entering another name for the bookmark
31 sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_HELP_BOOKMARKS%3ALB_BOOKMARKS 7c Double-clicking a bookmark or pressing the Return key opens the assigned page in Help. A right-click opens the context menu.
1e SFX2_HID_HELP_TABPAGE_CONTENTS 56 Displays the main help themes, arranged in a similar way to folders in a file manager.
16 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltUp 32 Tilts the selected object upwards by five degrees.
1f .uno%3AExtrusionLightingFloater 24 Opens the Extrusion Lighting window.
17 .uno%3AExtrusion3DColor 23 Opens the Extrusion Colour toolbar.
19 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltRight 30 Tilts the selected object right by five degrees.
18 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltLeft 2f Tilts the selected object left by five degrees.
18 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltDown 34 Tilts the selected object downwards by five degrees.
1e .uno%3AExtrusionSurfaceFloater 23 Opens the Extrusion Surface window.
16 .uno%3AExtrusionToggle 3d Switches the 3-D effects on and off for the selected objects.
3c svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_EXTRUSION_DEPTH%3AMTR_DEPTH 19 Enter an extrusion depth.
20 .uno%3AExtrusionDirectionFloater 25 Opens the Extrusion Direction window.
1c .uno%3AExtrusionDepthFloater 21 Opens the Extrusion Depth window.
1a SVX_HID_POPUP_LINEEND_CTRL 13 Select a direction.
14 .uno%3AAutoPilotMenu 63 Guides you through creating business and personal letters, faxes, agendas, presentations, and more.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_NEXT 3a Saves the current settings and continues to the next page.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDNEXT 3a Saves the current settings and continues to the next page.
38 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.letter.CallWizard%3Fstart 28 Starts the wizard for a letter template.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDPREV 46 Allows you to view the selections that you made on the previous steps.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZARD_BACK 46 Allows you to view the selections that you made on the previous steps.
16 .uno%3AAutoPilotLetter 28 Starts the wizard for a letter template.
1c WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZARD_CREATE 68 According to your selections, the wizard creates a new document template and saves it on your hard disc.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZARD_NEXT 3a Saves the current settings and continues to the next page.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_PREVIOUS 46 Allows you to view the selections that you made on the previous steps.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKBUSINESSPAPER 93 Specifies whether paper is used that already contains an imprinted logo, address, or footer line. The Wizard shows the Letterhead layout page next.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTPRIVATELETTER 34 Specifies that you want to create a personal letter.
24 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTBUSINESSLETTER 3d Specifies that you want to create a business letter template.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTPRIVOFFICIALSTYLE 2b Select the design for your letter template.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTPRIVATESTYLE 2b Select the design for your letter template.
28 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTPRIVOFFICIALLETTER 3b Specifies that you want to create a formal personal letter.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTBUSINESSSTYLE 2b Select the design for your letter template.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE1 45 Specifies whether you want to create a personal or a business letter.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOX 33 Sets the object distance from the left page margin.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERFOOTER 6f Specifies that a footer area is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print a footer.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSHEIGHT 21 Defines the height of the object.
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERCOMPANYLOGO 66 Specifies that a logo is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print a logo.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOY 32 Sets the object distance from the top page margin.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMFOOTERHEIGHT 81 Enter the height of the footer area that is already imprinted on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print in that area.
1f WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOWIDTH 20 Defines the width of the object.
25 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKCOMPANYRECEIVER a3 Specifies that your own address is already imprinted in small size above the area of the recipient's address. %PRODUCTNAME does not print an address in small size.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSWIDTH 20 Defines the width of the object.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE2 57 Allows you to specify the elements that are already imprinted on your letterhead paper.
29 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERCOMPANYADDRESS 6e Specifies that an address is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print an address.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSX 33 Sets the object distance from the left page margin.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSY 32 Sets the object distance from the top page margin.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOHEIGHT 21 Defines the height of the object.
28 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEADDRESSRECEIVER 3c Includes a small size return address on the letter template.
1f WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEFOOTER 29 Includes a footer on the letter template.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTSALUTATION 56 Includes a salutation on the letter template. Select the salutation from the list box.
1d WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSELOGO 27 Includes a logo on the letter template.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTLETTERNORM 4b Select a country in order to use a typical letter layout from that country.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESUBJECT 2f Includes a subject line on the letter template.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESIGNS 4c Includes a line with references to a business letter on the letter template.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE3 38 Defines the items to be included in the letter template.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESALUTATION 56 Includes a salutation on the letter template. Select the salutation from the list box.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEBENDMARKS 2b Includes fold marks on the letter template.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTGREETING 59 Includes a complimentary close on the letter template. Select the text from the list box.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEGREETING 59 Includes a complimentary close on the letter template. Select the text from the list box.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERCITY 29 Specifies the address data of the sender.
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERSTATE_TEXT 29 Specifies the address data of the sender.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERNAME 21 Specifies the name of the sender.
29 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTRECEIVERPLACEHOLDER 48 Specifies that placeholder fields are inserted into the letter template.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERSTREET 2b Specifies the street address of the sender.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE4 2f Specifies the sender and recipient information.
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTRECEIVERDATABASE 3e Address database fields are inserted into the letter template.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTSENDERDEFINE 33 Use the address data from the following text boxes.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTSENDERPLACEHOLDER 4f Use the address data from %PRODUCTNAME - User Data in the Options dialogue box.
24 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERPOSTCODE 29 Specifies the address data of the sender.
25 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKFOOTERNEXTPAGES 3c Select this option to suppress the footer on the first page.
1c WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTFOOTER 24 Enter the text for the footer lines.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE5 39 Specifies the information to include in the footer space.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKFOOTERPAGENUMBERS 2e Includes page numbers in your letter template.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTPATH 68 Enter the path and file name for the template, or click the ... button to select the path and file name.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTCREATELETTER 5c Saves and closes the template, and then opens a new untitled document based on the template.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CMDPATH 68 Enter the path and file name for the template, or click the ... button to select the path and file name.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTTEMPLATENAME 2d Specifies the title of the document template.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTMAKECHANGES 31 Saves the template and keeps it open for editing.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE6 50 Specifies where and under which name you want to save the document and template.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_CREATE b0 According to your selections, the wizard creates a document template and saves it. A new document based on the template appears in the work area, with the filename "UntitledX".
1a WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_NEXT 8a The wizard saves the current settings and goes to the next page. The Next button will become inactive once you have reached the last page.
1a WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_BACK c8 Click the Back button to view the settings chosen on the previous page. The current settings will not be modified or deleted if you click this button. Back will be active from the second page onwards.
35 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.fax.CallWizard%3Fstart 1b Opens the wizard for faxes.
13 .uno%3AAutoPilotFax 1b Opens the wizard for faxes.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LSTPRIVATESTYLE 1f Specifies the predefined style.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE1 27 Defines the style of your fax document.
20 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_OPTPRIVATEFAX 29 Creates a fax template for a private fax.
23 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_LSTBUSINESSSTYLE 1f Specifies the predefined style.
21 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_OPTBUSINESSFAX 30 Creates a fax template for a business-style fax.
19 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSESUBJECT 18 Includes a company logo.
1a WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSEGREETING 46 Includes a communication type line. Select the line from the list box.
1c WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSESALUTATION 16 Includes a date field.
19 WIZARDS_HID_LSTSALUTATION 46 Includes a communication type line. Select the line from the list box.
1b WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERSTREET 12 Includes a footer.
20 WIZARDS_HID_OPTSENDERPLACEHOLDER 3f Includes a salutation. Select the salutation from the list box.
19 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERNAME 3b Includes a greeting. Select the greeting from the list box.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE2 29 Specifies the fax elements to be printed.
18 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSEFOOTER 3f Includes a salutation. Select the salutation from the list box.
17 WIZARDS_HID_LSTGREETING 18 Includes a subject line.
1b WIZARDS_HID_OPTSENDERDEFINE 3b Includes a greeting. Select the greeting from the list box.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE3 3a Specifies the receiver and sender information for the fax.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FILETEMPLATEPATH 45 Inserts database fields for a later mail merge with the fax document.
18 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERFAX 1e Enter the sender address data.
1b WIZARDS_HID_TXTTEMPLATENAME 84 Inserts placeholders for the address on the fax template. Later in the fax document, click the placeholder to enter the actual data.
19 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERCITY 82 Select this option to enter the address data in the following text boxes. The data is inserted as normal text in the fax document.
1e WIZARDS_HID_CHKFOOTERNEXTPAGES 1e Enter the sender address data.
20 WIZARDS_HID_CHKFOOTERPAGENUMBERS 1e Enter the sender address data.
1f WIZARDS_HID_OPTRECEIVERDATABASE 1e Enter the sender address data.
1a WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERSTATE 84 Inserts placeholders for the address on the fax template. Later in the fax document, click the placeholder to enter the actual data.
15 WIZARDS_HID_TXTFOOTER 1e Enter the sender address data.
22 WIZARDS_HID_OPTRECEIVERPLACEHOLDER 1e Enter the sender address data.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE4 1a Specifies the footer data.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE5 27 Defines the template name and location.
38 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.agenda.CallWizard%3Fstart 38 Starts the wizard to help you create an agenda template.
16 .uno%3AAutoPilotAgenda 38 Starts the wizard to help you create an agenda template.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_1_LIST_PAGEDESIGN 29 Select the page design from the list box.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE1 27 Specifies a page design for the agenda.
1f WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_1_CHK_MINUTES 4d Prints out a page on which you can write down the minutes during the meeting.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_TITLE 23 Specifies the title of the meeting.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_DATE 22 Specifies the date of the meeting.
20 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_LOCATION 26 Specifies the location of the meeting.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE2 3d Specifies the date, time, title, and location of the meeting.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_TIME 22 Specifies the time of the meeting.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE3 3e Specifies the headings that you want to include in the agenda.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_READ 2e Specifies whether to print a Please read line.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_BRING 2f Specifies whether to print a Please bring line.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_NOTES 28 Specifies whether to print a Notes line.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_MEETING_TYPE 34 Specifies whether to print the type of meeting line.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_FACILITATOR 49 Specifies whether to print a line in which you can enter the chairperson.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_ATTENDEES 47 Specifies whether to print a line in which you can enter the attendees.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_NOTETAKER 47 Specifies whether to print a line in which you can enter the secretary.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_OBSERVERS 47 Specifies whether to print a line in which you can enter the observers.
27 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_RESOURCEPERSONS 50 Specifies whether to print a line in which you can enter the facility personnel.
22 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_TIMEKEEPER 47 Specifies whether to print a line in which you can enter the moderator.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE4 30 Specifies the names to be printed on the agenda.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_CALLED_BY 5b Specifies whether to print a line in which you can enter the person who called the meeting.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_DOWN 21 Moves the current topic row down.
1a WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_UP 1f Moves the current topic row up.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE5 3a Specifies the topics to be printed on the agenda template.
1e WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_REMOVE 1e Removes the current topic row.
25 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_RESPONSIBLE_1 52 Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics.
1f WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_TOPIC_1 52 Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics.
1e WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_INSERT 34 Inserts a new empty topic row above the current row.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_MINUTES_1 52 Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_OPT_MAKECHANGES 53 Creates and saves the agenda template, then opens the template for further editing.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_BTN_TEMPLATEPATH 4c Specifies the complete path, including the file name of the agenda template.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE6 36 Choose the title and location for the agenda template.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_OPT_CREATEAGENDA 5f Creates and saves the agenda template, then opens a new agenda document based on that template.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_TXT_TEMPLATENAME 2a Specifies the name of the agenda template.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_TXT_TEMPLATEPATH 4c Specifies the complete path, including the file name of the agenda template.
24 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ABUT_LAST 44 Returns to the previous step without deleting your current settings.
24 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ABUT_NEXT 34 Accepts the new settings and moves to the next page.
c slot%3A10425 7f Use the wizard to interactively create a presentation. With the wizard, you can modify the sample templates to suit your needs.
1d .uno%3AAutoPilotPresentations 7f Use the wizard to interactively create a presentation. With the wizard, you can modify the sample templates to suit your needs.
16 .uno%3ANewPresentation 7f Use the wizard to interactively create a presentation. With the wizard, you can modify the sample templates to suit your needs.
18 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_OPEN 10a Lists the presentations that you created and saved to the Templates directory that is specified under %PRODUCTNAME - Paths in the Options dialogue box. To edit the layout and formatting of a presentation with the wizard, select the presentation, and then click Next.
29 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_ASS%3APB_PAGE1_OPEN 30 Click Open to see a file selection dialogue box.
26 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_STARTWITH 71 Specifies that you only want the Wizard to start when you expressly request it with File - Wizard - Presentation.
2b sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE1_EMPTY 23 Creates a new (empty) presentation.
1d SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_TEMPLATES 3a Lists the available template categories for presentations.
2a sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE1_OPEN 34 Displays a list of previously created presentations.
2e sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE1_TEMPLATE 3d Opens a list box containing various modifiable presentations.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE1 44 Specifies the presentation type and allows you to select a template.
1a SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_REGION 3a Lists the available template categories for presentations.
24 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_PREVIEW 36 Specifies that templates appear in the preview window.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM2 2c Creates a presentation to be used as slides.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM4 34 Creates a presentation that can be printed on paper.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM3 3d Creates a presentation to be used as overhead transparencies.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM5 2e Uses the original page format of the template.
21 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGETEMPLATES 5e Allows you to select a slide design for the presentation you selected on page 1 of the Wizard.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM1 2c Creates a computer screen presentation only.
28 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ALB_PAGE2_LAYOUT 5e Allows you to select a slide design for the presentation you selected on page 1 of the Wizard.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE2 5e Allows you to select a slide design for the presentation you selected on page 1 of the Wizard.
27 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ALB_PAGE3_SPEED 1c Determines the effect speed.
27 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_PAGE3_LOGO 5f Specifies whether to display the $[officename] logo during the pause between each presentation.
28 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ALB_PAGE3_EFFECT 2a Specifies an effect for your presentation.
2a sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE3_LIVE 60 The Default option runs the presentation as a full screen presentation with the specified speed.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE3 46 Assigns special effects to your presentation and determines its speed.
2a sd%3ATimeField%3ADLG_ASS%3ATMF_PAGE3_BREAK 2c Defines the pause between each presentation.
29 sd%3ATimeField%3ADLG_ASS%3ATMF_PAGE3_TIME 2f Defines the duration of each presentation page.
2b sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE3_KIOSK 49 Runs the presentation automatically, and restarts it again after a break.
28 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_ASS%3AEDT_PAGE4_ASKTOPIC 29 Specifies the topic of your presentation.
37 sd%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_ASS%3AEDT_PAGE4_ASKINFORMATION 66 Use this field for further thoughts and ideas that you would like to cover later in your presentation.
27 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_ASS%3AEDT_PAGE4_ASKNAME 30 Specifies your name or the name of your company.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE4 30 Specifies your name or the name of your company.
2a sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_PAGE5_SUMMARY 2f Creates a summary of all presentation contents.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE5 2f Creates a summary of all presentation contents.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDFINISH 39 Click to create the form without answering further pages.
1a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_DIALOG 28 Activates the Wizard for creating forms.
2c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEDOWN_PK_SELECTED 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDS 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_LBTABLES 42 Specifies the table or query that you want to create the form for.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
2c WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
19 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_DOC_DOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDS 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
2d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
17 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_DOC_UP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEUP_PK_SELECTED 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_FIELDSSELECTED 2d Displays the fields that are in the new form.
24 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
2f WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTSELECTMANUALLY 3e Click to add a sub-form based on a manual selection of fields.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTONEXISTINGRELATION 36 Click to add a sub-form based on an existing relation.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_lstRELATIONS 33 Select the relation on which the sub-form is based.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKCREATESUBFORM 19 Select to add a sub-form.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_FIELDSSELECTED 3e Displays all fields that will be included in the new sub-form.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_LBTABLES 45 Specifies the table or query for which the sub-form is to be created.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK2 7a Select the main form field that is joined to the sub-form field, which you select from the list box next to this list box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK1 7a Select the main form field that is joined to the sub-form field, which you select from the list box next to this list box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK4 7a Select the main form field that is joined to the sub-form field, which you select from the list box next to this list box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK3 7a Select the main form field that is joined to the sub-form field, which you select from the list box next to this list box.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK4 7a Select the sub-form field that is joined to the main form field, which you select from the list box next to this list box.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK3 7a Select the sub-form field that is joined to the main form field, which you select from the list box next to this list box.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK2 7a Select the sub-form field that is joined to the main form field, which you select from the list box next to this list box.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK1 7a Select the sub-form field that is joined to the main form field, which you select from the list box next to this list box.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDALIGNLEFT 1c The labels are left-aligned.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPLABELED 47 Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels above the field.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPJUSTIFIED 31 Arranges the labels above the corresponding data.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTABLESTYLE 2d Aligns the database fields in a tabular form.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDLEFTLABELED 51 Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels to the left of the fields.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDALIGNRIGHT 1d The labels are right-aligned.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNOMODIFICATION 20 Select to disallow editing data.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNOADDITION 23 Select to disallow adding new data.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTDISPLAYALLDATA 4f Creates a form that can be used to display existing data and to enter new data.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTNEWDATAONLY 37 Creates a form that is only used for entering new data.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNODELETION 21 Select to disallow deleting data.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LSTSTYLES 26 Specifies the page style for the form.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDSIMPLEBORDER 2b Specifies that the field borders look flat.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMD3DBORDER 31 Specifies that the field borders have a 3-D look.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDNOBORDER 29 Specifies that the fields have no border.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTMODIFYFORM 3f Saves the form, and opens it in edit mode to change the layout.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTWORKWITHFORM 4a Saves the form, and opens it as a form document to enter and display data.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_TXTPATH 1f Specifies the name of the form.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_DIALOG 1d Select the report properties.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DOCUMENT_CREATE_REPWIZ 2a Activates the wizard for creating reports.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_FIELDSAVAILABLE 4a Displays the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_LBTABLES 40 Select the table or query for which the report is to be created.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_FIELDSSELECTED 38 Displays all fields that are included in the new report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_6 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_5 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_4 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_3 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_2 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_1 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_PREGROUPINGDEST b4 Lists the fields by which the report will be grouped. To remove one level of grouping, select the field name, then click the < button. You may select up to four levels of grouping.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_CMDGROUP 4a Click to move the selected field to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_CMDUNGROUP 4a Click to move the selected field to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_GROUPING c6 Lists the fields from your selection on the previous page of the Wizard. To group the report by a field, select the field name, then click the > button. You may select up to four levels of grouping.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND1 2d Sorts the field contents in descending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND1 2c Sorts the field contents in ascending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND2 2c Sorts the field contents in ascending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND4 2d Sorts the field contents in descending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND2 2d Sorts the field contents in descending order.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT4 37 Select an additional field by which to sort the report.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT1 33 Select the first field by which to sort the report.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND3 2d Sorts the field contents in descending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND3 2c Sorts the field contents in ascending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND4 2c Sorts the field contents in ascending order.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT2 37 Select an additional field by which to sort the report.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT3 37 Select an additional field by which to sort the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_PAGELAYOUT 8a Defines a page layout for the report. The page layouts are loaded from template files, which assign a header, footer, and page background.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_PORTRAIT 33 Selects a portrait page orientation for the report.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_LANDSCAPE 34 Selects a landscape page orientation for the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_DATALAYOUT 65 Defines a set of styles for the report. The styles assign fonts, indents, table background, and more.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTSTATDOCUMENT 89 Saves the report as a static report. When you open a static report, it will always display the data from the time the report was created.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTEDITTEMPLATE 44 When you click Create, the report will be saved and opened for edit.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_TITLE 43 Specifies the title that is printed at the title line of each page.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTDYNTEMPLATE 6f Saves the report as a template. When you open a dynamic report, it will display with the current data contents.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTUSETEMPLATE 30 When you click Finish, the report will be saved.
33 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_DEL_DESIGN 31 Deletes the selected design from the design list.
34 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_OLD_DESIGN 81 Loads an existing design from the design list to use as a starting point for the steps to follow on the next pages of the Wizard.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE1 35 Creates a new design in the next pages of the Wizard.
34 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_NEW_DESIGN 35 Creates a new design in the next pages of the Wizard.
2d sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_DESIGNS 1e Displays all existing designs.
2e sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_PERL 3d Used by WebCast export to create HTML pages and Perl scripts.
34 sd%3ATimeField%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_DURATION_TMF 32 Defines the amount of time for each slide display.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_ASP 99 When you select the ASP option, the WebCast export creates ASP pages. Note that the HTML presentation can only be offered by a web server supporting ASP.
2c sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_NOTES 2d Specifies that your notes are also displayed.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_STANDARD 2e Creates standard HTML pages from export pages.
26 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_URL 6f Specifies the URL (absolute or relative), where the created HTML presentation on the web server has been saved.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_WEBCAST 52 In a WebCast export, automatic scripts will be generated with Perl or ASP support.
26 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CGI 48 Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) for the generated Perl scripts.
2e sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_ENDLESS 55 Automatically restarts the HTML presentation after the last slide has been displayed.
30 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_FRAMES b2 Creates standard HTML pages with frames. The exported page will be placed in the main frame, and the frame to the left will display a table of contents in the form of hyperlinks.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CHG_AUTO 8b The page transition takes place automatically after the specified period of time elapses and does not depend on the presentation's contents
2f sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_KIOSK 87 Creates a default HTML presentation as a kiosk export, in which the slides are automatically advanced after a specified amount of time.
35 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CHG_DEFAULT d4 The slide transition depends on the timing that you set for each slide in the presentation. If you set a manual page transition, the HTML presentation introduces a new page by pressing any key from your keyboard.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE2 2e Creates standard HTML pages from export pages.
28 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_INDEX 66 Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) to be entered by the viewer in order to see the presentation.
2e sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CONTENT 27 Creates a title page for your document.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_JPG 83 The files are exported as JPEG files. JPEG files are compressed, with adjustable compression and can contain more than 256 colours.
30 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_SLD_SOUND 60 Specifies that the sound files that are defined as an effect for slide transitions are exported.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE3 7a The files are exported as PNG files. PNG files are compressed without loss of data, and can contain more than 256 colours.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_GIF 76 The files are exported as GIF files. GIF files are compressed without loss of data, and have a maximum of 256 colours.
2e sd%3AComboBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_QUALITY b4 Specifies the compression factor of the JPEG graphic. A 100% value offers the best quality for a large data range. The 25% factor indicates small files with inferior image quality.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_PNG 7a The files are exported as PNG files. PNG files are compressed without loss of data, and can contain more than 256 colours.
36 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_RESOLUTION_3 3a Select a high resolution for a high quality slide display.
36 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_RESOLUTION_2 3d Select the medium resolution for a medium-sized presentation.
36 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_RESOLUTION_1 5f Select the low resolution to keep the file size small, even for presentations with many slides.
2b sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_WWW_EDIT 49 Specifies your homepage. A hyperlink will be inserted in the publication.
29 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_AUTHOR 2f Specifies the name of the publication's author.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE4 2f Specifies the name of the publication's author.
30 sd%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_MISC 36 Specifies additional text to appear on the title page.
2d sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_EMAIL_EDIT 1d Specifies the e-mail address.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE5 30 Inserts only text hyperlinks instead of buttons.
2f sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE5_TEXTONLY 30 Inserts only text hyperlinks instead of buttons.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_DEFAULT 35 Uses the default colours of the viewer's Web Browser.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_LINK 60 Opens the Colour dialogue box, in which you can select the hyperlink colour of the presentation.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_BACK 61 Opens the Colour dialogue box, in which you can select the background colour of the presentation.
33 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_DOCCOLORS 44 Determines the colours from the styles used in the current document.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_TEXT 5b Opens the Colour dialogue box, in which you can select the text colour of the presentation.
2e sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_VLINK 63 Opens the Colour dialogue box, in which you can select the visited link colour of the presentation.
2e sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_USER 44 Allows you to define your own colours for some presentation objects.
2e sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_ALINK 62 Opens the Colour dialogue box, in which you can select the active link colour of the presentation.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE6 44 Determines the colours from the styles used in the current document.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_FINISH 13 Creates the object.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_FINISH 13 Creates the object.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_GRIDWIZARD_FINISH 13 Creates the object.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_DIALOG 55 Copies and converts documents into the OpenDocument XML format used by $[officename].
27 macro%3A%2F%2F%2FImportWizard.Main.Main 55 Copies and converts documents into the OpenDocument XML format used by $[officename].
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDHELP 55 Copies and converts documents into the OpenDocument XML format used by $[officename].
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_OPTMSDOCUMENTS 54 Converts documents in Microsoft Word format *.doc into OpenDocument *.odt documents.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_OPTSODOCUMENTS 51 Converts old binary documents into the OpenDocument format used by $[officename].
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CHKCALC 55 Converts documents in the old format of Calc *.sdc into OpenDocument *.ods documents.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CHKMATHGLOBAL 9a Converts documents in the old format of Writer master documents *.sgl into OpenDocument *.odm documents, and Math *.smf into OpenDocument *.odf documents.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CHKLOGFILE 59 Creates a log file in your working directory showing which documents have been converted.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKEXCEL 55 Converts documents in Microsoft Excel format *.xls into OpenDocument *.ods documents.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKWORD 54 Converts documents in Microsoft Word format *.doc into OpenDocument *.odt documents.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CHKWRITER 57 Converts documents in the old format of Writer *.sdw into OpenDocument *.odt documents.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKPOWERPOINT 5a Converts documents in Microsoft PowerPoint format *.ppt into OpenDocument *.odp documents.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CHKIMPRESS 8a Converts documents in the old format of Draw *.sda into OpenDocument *.odg documents, and Impress *.sdd into OpenDocument *.odp documents.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBDOCUMENTRECURSE 61 Indicates that the subdirectories of the selected directory are also searched for matching files.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_EDDOCUMENTPATH 43 Specifies the directory to which the destination files are written.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBTEMPLATERECURSE 61 Indicates that the subdirectories of the selected directory are also searched for matching files.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBDOCUMENT 31 Indicates that the documents are to be converted.
2d WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CMDDOCUMENTPATHSELECT 30 Opens a dialogue box to select the desired path.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_LBDOCUMENTPATH 34 Specifies the directory containing the source files.
2d WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CMDTEMPLATEPATHSELECT 30 Opens a dialogue box to select the desired path.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBTEMPLATE 2d Specifies that templates are to be converted.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_EDTEMPLATEPATH 43 Specifies the directory to which the destination files are written.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_LBTEMPLATEPATH 34 Specifies the directory containing the source files.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON3 3c All currency cells in the active document will be converted.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_TBSOURCE 4b Indicates the directory or the name of the single document to be converted.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_DIALOG 89 Converts the currency amounts found in $[officename] Calc documents and in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents into euro.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBHELP 28 Activates the help for the dialogue box.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHECKRECURSIVE 48 Specifies whether all subfolders of the selected directory are included.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBBACK 30 Returns to the first page of the Euro Converter.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_COMBOBOX1 31 Specifies the currency to be converted into euro.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON4 5b All currency cells in the range selected before the converter was called will be converted.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHECKBOX1 1d Converts the entire document.
14 .uno%3AEuroConverter 89 Converts the currency amounts found in $[officename] Calc documents and in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents into euro.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBGOON 16 Starts the conversion.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBTARGETOPEN 55 Opens a dialogue box in which you can select a directory to hold the converted files.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHKPROTECT c2 Specifies that sheet protection will be disabled during conversion and thereafter re-enabled. If sheet protection is covered by a password, you will see a dialogue box for entering the password.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHKTEXTDOCUMENTS 57 Converts currency amounts found in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON1 36 All cells with the selected Cell Styles are converted.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_LISTBOX1 32 Displays the ranges to be converted from the list.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_TBTARGET 4b Specifies the folder and path in which the converted files are to be saved.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBCANCEL 1a Closes the Euro Converter.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBSOURCEOPEN 41 Opens a dialogue box to select the desired directory or document.
31 macro%3A%2F%2F%2FEuro.AutoPilotRun.StartAutoPilot 89 Converts the currency amounts found in $[officename] Calc documents and in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents into euro.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OBDIR 6b Converts all $[officename] Calc and $[officename] Writer documents and templates in the selected directory.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON2 3f All currency cells in the active spreadsheet will be converted.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OBFILE 2a Converts a single $[officename] Calc file.
3a extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_MORK 4f Select this option if you already use an address book in Seamonkey or Netscape.
41 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_THUNDERBIRD 45 Select this option if you already use an address book in Thunderbird.
17 EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
3b extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_MACAB 4b Select this option if you already use an address book in OS X Address book.
3f extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_EVOLUTION 43 Select this option if you already use an address book in Evolution.
3a extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_LDAP 46 Select this option if you already have address data on an LDAP server.
21 .uno%3AAutoPilotAddressDataSource 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
49 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_EVOLUTION_GROUPWISE 43 Select this option if you already use an address book in Groupwise.
c slot%3A10934 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_FINISH 4a Establishes the connection to the data source and closes the dialogue box.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_CANCEL 32 Exits the wizard without implementing any changes.
44 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_OUTLOOKEXPRESS 53 Select this option if you already use an address book in Microsoft Outlook Express.
3d extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_OUTLOOK 61 Select this option if you already use an address book in Microsoft Outlook (not Outlook Express).
39 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_KAB 4a Select this option if you already use an address book in KDE Address book.
3b extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_OTHER 60 Select this option if you want to register another data source as address book in $[officename].
44 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_EVOLUTION_LDAP 48 Select this option if you already use an address book in Evolution LDAP.
2c extensions%3ATabPage%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
4b extensions%3APushButton%3ARID_PAGE_ADMININVOKATION%3APB_INVOKE_ADMIN_DIALOG 40 Calls a dialogue box in which you can enter additional settings.
3d extensions%3AListBox%3ARID_PAGE_TABLESELECTION%3ALB_TABLELIST 59 Specifies the table that is to serve as the address book for the $[officename] templates.
36 extensions%3AEdit%3ARID_PAGE_FINAL%3AET_DATASOURCENAME 1f Specifies the data source name.
37 extensions%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PAGE_FINAL%3ACB_REGISTER_DS dc Registers the newly created database file in %PRODUCTNAME. The database will then be listed in the data source window (F4). If this check box is unmarked, the database will be available only by opening the database file.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_BROWSECONN 31 Specifies the location using a file dialogue box.
34 extensions%3APushButton%3ARID_PAGE_FINAL%3APB_BROWSE 31 Specifies the location using a file dialogue box.
49 extensions%3APushButton%3ARID_PAGE_FIELDMAPPING%3APB_INVOKE_FIELDS_DIALOG 3a Opens the Templates: Address Book Assignment dialogue box.
35 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.web.CallWizard%3Fstart 46 The Web Wizard helps you to maintain a web site on an Internet server.
16 WIZARDS_HID0_WEBWIZARD 46 The Web Wizard helps you to maintain a web site on an Internet server.
18 WIZARDS_HID1_BTN_DEL_SES 1e Deletes the selected settings.
19 WIZARDS_HID1_LST_SESSIONS 7f Select the settings that you want to load and then click Load. To start the wizard with the default settings, select "default".
1b WIZARDS_HID2_LST_DOC_EXPORT 44 Select the file format that you want to export the selected file to.
19 WIZARDS_HID2_TXT_DOC_DESC 2e Enter a description for the selected document.
18 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_ADD_DOC e6 Opens a dialogue box in which you can select the files that you want to upload to your web site. The order of the list determines the order in which the hyperlinks to the documents are displayed on the index page of your web site.
1b WIZARDS_HID2_TXT_DOC_AUTHOR 37 Enter the name of the author for the selected document.
1a WIZARDS_HID2_TXT_DOC_TITLE 88 Enter the title for the selected document. The title appears as a hyperlink to the selected document on the index page of your web site.
18 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_REM_DOC 28 Removes the selected file from the list.
15 WIZARDS_HID2_LST_DOCS f9 Lists the documents that you want to publish to your web site. The wizard can convert %PRODUCTNAME documents to HTML, PDF, or, in some cases, Flash format before the documents are uploaded. All other files are uploaded in their original file format.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG9 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG8 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG7 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG6 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG3 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG2 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG5 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG4 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG1 25 Select the layout for the index page.
20 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_UP_DATE 49 Includes the date of the last time a file was modified on the index page.
21 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_FILENAME 3b Includes the file names of the documents on the index page.
1e WIZARDS_HID4_GRP_OPTIMAIZE_640 3d Optimises the web site for a 640x480 pixel screen resolution.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_FORMAT 33 Displays the format of the files on the index page.
1e WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_PAGES 3c Displays the number of pages in your site on the index page.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_F_ICON 30 Displays the file format icon on the index page.
24 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_DESCRIPTION 44 Includes the summary information of the documents on the index page.
20 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_CR_DATE 3f Includes the creation dates of the documents on the index page.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_GRP_OPTIMAIZE_1024 3e Optimises the web site for a 1024x768 pixel screen resolution.
1d WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_SIZE 36 Displays the file size in kilobytes on the index page.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_AUTHOR 4d Includes the names of the people who created the documents on the index page.
1e WIZARDS_HID4_GRP_OPTIMAIZE_800 3d Optimises the web site for a 800x600 pixel screen resolution.
16 WIZARDS_HID5_BTN_ICONS 54 Select the Icons that you want to use for the navigation elements on the index page.
17 WIZARDS_HID5_LST_STYLES 2c Select the colour scheme for the index page.
18 WIZARDS_HID5_BTN_BACKGND 2d Select a Background image for the index page.
18 WIZARDS_HID_BG_BTN_OTHER 54 Opens a file open dialogue box to select a background image file for the index page.
e WIZARDS_HID_BG 36 Specifies a background image for the Web Wizard style.
17 WIZARDS_HID_BG_BTN_NONE 30 Clears the background image from the index page.
17 WIZARDS_HID_IS_BTN_NONE 28 Clears the icon set from the index page.
e WIZARDS_HID_IS 53 Select an icon set for navigation on HTML presentation documents in the Web Wizard.
1b WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_EMAIL 57 Enter the e-mail address for the index page. The address is stored in an HTML meta tag.
1e WIZARDS_HID6_DATE_SITE_CREATED 53 Enter the creation date for the index page. The date is stored in an HTML meta tag.
1f WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_COPYRIGHT 58 Enter the copyright notice for the index page. The notice is stored in an HTML meta tag.
1e WIZARDS_HID6_DATE_SITE_UPDATED 53 Enter the modified date for the index page. The date is stored in an HTML meta tag.
1b WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_TITLE 5f Enter the title for the index page. This element is displayed on the title bar of web browsers.
1a WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_DESC 56 Enter a description for the index page. The description is stored in an HTML meta tag.
16 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_LOCAL d9 Uploads your index page and files to a local directory. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_PUBLISH_FTP c6 Uploads your files to an FTP server. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
1e WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_PUBLISH_LOCAL d9 Uploads your index page and files to a local directory. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
16 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_LOCAL 28 Opens a dialogue box to select a folder.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_FTP 70 Opens the FTP Connection dialogue box in which you can edit and test the connection settings for the FTP server.
1c WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_PUBLISH_ZIP 104 Adds your index page and files to a compressed archive file and uploads the file to your web site. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
15 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_SAVE 25 Enter the name for the settings file.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_ZIP 4f Opens a dialogue box in which you can specify the location of the archive file.
15 WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_SAVE 35 Saves the settings that you specified in this wizard.
18 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_PREVIEW 48 Opens your web page in the default web browser of your operating system.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_FTP c6 Uploads your files to an FTP server. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_ZIP 104 Adds your index page and files to a compressed archive file and uploads the file to your web site. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
18 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_TXT_PATH 5a Enter the location of a directory on the FTP server in which you want to store your files.
18 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_BTN_PATH 5a Opens a dialogue box in which you can specify the FTP server directory to store the files.
14 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_TEST 33 Tests the FTP connection with the current settings.
14 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_PASS 3d Enter the password that is required to access the FTP server.
f WIZARDS_HID_FTP 44 Edit and test the FTP server connection settings for the Web Wizard.
18 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_USERNAME 3e Enter the user name that is required to access the FTP server.
16 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_SERVER 2f Enter the name or IP address of the FTP server.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_ORDER 65 If you click the cell, you can select from the sorting options: ascending, descending and not sorted.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_FIELD 7c Enter the name of the data field that you referred to in the Query. All settings made in the lower rows refer to this field.
1c DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_CRIT 51 Specifies the criteria by which the content of the data field should be filtered.
26 DBACCESS_HID_QUERY_EDIT_JOINCONNECTION 15 Edit Join Properties.
2d dbaccess%3AComboBox%3ADLG_SAVE_AS%3AET_SCHEMA 49 Enter the name of the schema that is assigned to the query or table view.
20 DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_FUNCTION 2b Select a function to run in the query here.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_TABLE 4b The corresponding database table of the selected data field is listed here.
1b DBACCESS_HID_CTL_QRYDGNCRIT 26 Select conditions to define the query.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_ALIAS 8d Specifies an alias. This alias will be listed in a query instead of the field name. This makes it possible to use user-defined column labels.
1a DBACCESS_HID_CTL_QRYDGNTAB 50 Double-click fields to add them to the query. Drag-and-drop to define relations.
1f DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_VISIBLE 5a If you mark the Visible property for a data field, that field will be visible in the query
28 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_SAVE_AS%3AET_TITLE 2a Enter the name of the query or table view.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_JOINTYPE 2d Specifies the link type of the selected link.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_RIGHT_TABLE 35 Specifies two different tables that you want to join.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_LEFT_TABLE 35 Specifies two different tables that you want to join.
21 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_JOIN_CONTROL f7 Inserts the keyword NATURAL into the SQL statement that defines the relation. The relation joins all columns that have the same column name in both tables. The resulting joined table contains only one column for each pair of equally named columns.
2f dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWORD%3AED_OLDPASSWORD 17 Enter the old password.
29 sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWD%3AED_PASSWD_USER 23 Specifies the name of the new user.
33 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWORD%3AED_PASSWORD_REPEAT 1d Enter the new password again.
2c dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWORD%3AED_PASSWORD 17 Enter the new password.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_DEFAULT 3c Specifies the value that is the default in new data records.
29 DBACCESS_HID_TABLEDESIGN_TABED_PRIMARYKEY 4e If this command has a tick mark, the data field in this line is a primary key.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_TYPECELL 19 Specifies the field type.
21 DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_BACKGROUND 32 This area is where you define the table structure.
25 DBACCESS_HID_TABLE_DESIGN_HELP_WINDOW 13 Displays help text.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_FORMAT_SAMPLE 41 Displays the format code that you can select with the ... button.
1b DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_FORMAT 30 This button opens the Field Format dialogue box.
23 DBACCESS_HID_TABLEDESIGN_INSERTROWS 96 Inserts an empty row above the current row, if the table has not been saved. Inserts an empty row at the end of the table if the table has been saved.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_NAMECELL 84 Specifies the name of the data field. Note the database restrictions, such as the length of the name, special characters and spaces.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_COMMENTCELL 22 Specifies an optional description.
32 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_INDEXDESIGN%3APB_CLOSE 18 Closes the dialogue box.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DLGINDEX_INDEXDETAILS_FIELD 57 Displays a list of the fields in the current table. You can select more than one field.
14 .uno%3ADBIndexDesign 53 The Index Design dialogue box allows you to edit the indexes for the current table.
31 dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_INDEXDESIGN%3ACB_UNIQUE 3e Specifies whether the current index allows only unique values.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_SAVEINDEX 2b Saves the current index in the data source.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_INDEXLIST 8b Displays the available indexes. Select an index from the list to edit. The details of the selected index are displayed in the dialogue box.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_DROPINDEX 1a Deletes the current index.
28 dbaccess%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_INDEXDESIGN 53 The Index Design dialogue box allows you to edit the indexes for the current table.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_RENAMEINDEX 1a Renames the current index.
1c DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_NEWINDEX 14 Creates a new index.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_RESETINDEX 56 Resets the current index to the setting that it had when the dialogue box was started.
2c DBACCESS_HID_DLGINDEX_INDEXDETAILS_SORTORDER 1a Determines the sort order.
1c DBACCESS_HID_CTL_RELATIONTAB 57 Here you can link together tables from the current database through common data fields.
14 .uno%3ADBAddRelation 3c Allows you to define and edit a relation between two tables.
29 DBACCESS_HID_RELATIONDIALOG_LEFTFIELDCELL 4a The names of the tables selected for the link appear here as column names.
2a DBACCESS_HID_RELATIONDIALOG_RIGHTFIELDCELL 4a The names of the tables selected for the link appear here as column names.
1d DBACCESS_HID_RELDLG_KEYFIELDS 28 Defines the key fields for the relation.
23 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_WIZ_TABLENAME_EDIT 1e Specifies a name for the copy.
3a dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_APPENDDATA 40 Appends the data of the table to be copied to an existing table.
34 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_VIEW b4 If the database supports Views, you can select this option only when a query is copied in a table container. This option enables you to see and edit a query as a normal table view.
30 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3AET_KEYNAME 46 Specifies a name for the primary key generated. This name is optional.
33 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_DEF 40 Copies only the table definition and not the corresponding data.
3b dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ACB_PRIMARY_COLUMN 4a Automatically generates a primary key data field and fills it with values.
37 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_DEFDATA 29 Creates a 1:1 copy of the database table.
45 dbaccess%3AMultiListBox%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3ALB_NEW_COLUMN_NAMES 3e Lists the fields that you want to include in the copied table.
3d dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMN_LH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
3e dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMNS_LH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
3e dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMNS_RH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
45 dbaccess%3AMultiListBox%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3ALB_ORG_COLUMN_NAMES bc Lists the available data fields that you can include in the copied table. To copy a data field, click its name, and then click the > button. To copy all of the fields, click the >> button.
3d dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMN_RH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
21 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_BOOL_DEFAULT 2c Select the default value for a Yes/No field.
43 dbaccess%3AMultiListBox%3ATAB_WIZ_TYPE_SELECT%3ALB_NEW_COLUMN_NAMES 40 Lists the data fields that will be included in the copied table.
35 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATAB_WIZ_TYPE_SELECT%3APB_AUTO 23 Enables automatic type recognition.
19 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_TYPE 14 Select a field type.
18 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_LEN 32 Enter the number of characters for the data field.
37 dbaccess%3ANumericField%3ATAB_WIZ_TYPE_SELECT%3AET_AUTO 40 Enter the number of lines to use for automatic type recognition.
1d DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_TEXT_LEN 32 Enter the number of characters for the data field.
1a DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_SCALE 78 Enter the number of decimal places for the data field. This option is only available for numeric or decimal data fields.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_COLUMNNAME 54 Displays the name of the selected data field. If you want, you can enter a new name.
36 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3APB_ALL 2b Selects all of the data fields in the list.
3d dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_UP 35 Moves the selected entry up one position in the list.
28 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_NAMEMATCHING_COLS_AVAIL 165 Lists the data fields in the source table. To include a data field from the source table in the destination table, mark the check box in front of the data field name. To map the content of a data field in the source table to a different data field in the destination table, click the data field in the source table list, and then click the up or down arrow.
37 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3APB_NONE 2a Clears all of the check boxes in the list.
43 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_UP_RIGHT 35 Moves the selected entry up one position in the list.
45 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_DOWN_RIGHT 37 Moves the selected entry down one position in the list.
3f dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_DOWN 37 Moves the selected entry down one position in the list.
29 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_NAMEMATCHING_COLS_ASSIGN a0 Lists the possible data fields in the destination table. Only the data fields that are selected in the source table list will be included the destination table.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SQL92CHECK 8a Only allows names that use characters that conform to the SQL-92 naming constraints in the data source. All other characters are rejected.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_USECATALOG b7 Uses the current data source of the Catalogue. This is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. If the ODBC data source is a dBASE driver, leave this check box unmarked.
21 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_ODBC_OPTIONS 56 Use this text field to enter additional optional driver settings if this is necessary.
22 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_RETRIEVE_AUTO 63 Enter an SQL statement that returns the last auto-incremented value for the primary key data field.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_AUTOINCREMENTVALUE 70 Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_AUTORETRIEVEENABLED 67 Enables $[officename] support of auto-incremented data fields for the current ODBC or JDBC data source.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DBASE_INDICIES 6a Opens the Indexes dialogue box, in which you can organise the table indexes in the current dBASE database.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SHOWDELETED 7d Displays all the records in a file, including those marked as deleted. If you mark this check box, you cannot delete records.
33 dbaccess%3AComboBox%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3ACB_TABLES 31 Select the database table that you want to index.
36 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_REMOVE 3a Moves the selected table indexes to the Free Indexes list.
39 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_REMOVEALL 38 Moves all of the table indexes to the Free Indexes list.
38 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3ALB_TABLEINDEXES 3a Lists the current indexes for the selected database table.
36 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_ADDALL 38 Moves all of the free indexes to the Table Indexes list.
33 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_ADD 33 Moves the selected index to the Table Indexes list.
37 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3ALB_FREEINDEXES 3b Lists the available indexes that you can assign to a table.
2f dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_DIRECTSQL%3ALB_HISTORY 6a Lists the previously executed SQL commands. To run a command again, click the command, and then click Run.
34 dbaccess%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_DIRECTSQL%3AME_STATUS 48 Displays the results, including errors, of the SQL command that you ran.
31 dbaccess%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_DIRECTSQL%3AME_SQL 3a Enter the SQL administration command that you want to run.
32 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_DIRECTSQL%3APB_EXECUTE 40 Runs the command that you entered in the Command to execute box.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SUPPRESS_VERSIONCL f2 Some databases track changes to each record by assigning version number to fields that are changed. This number is incremented by 1 each time that the field is changed. Displays the internal version number of the record in the database table.
d .uno%3ASortup 5b Sorts the list of table names in ascending order starting at the beginning of the alphabet.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_TBLGRANTS 4c Displays and lets you edit the database access rights for the selected user.
1e DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_PBCHGPWD 3d Changes the current user password for accessing the database.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_PBUSER 34 Adds a new user for accessing the selected database.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_PBUSERDELETE 1a Removes the selected user.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_LBUSER 32 Select the user whose settings you want to modify.
34 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_TRANSACTIONLOG 3a Displays the path and the name of the TRANSACTIONLOG file.
2e dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_FREESIZE 53 Displays the amount of free space (in megabytes) that is available in the database.
2a dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_SIZE 36 Displays the full size (in megabytes) of the database.
39 dbaccess%3ANumericField%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_MEMORYUSING 42 Displays the amount of used space in the database as a percentage.
31 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3ALB_DATADEVS 38 Displays the path and the name of the DATADEVSPACE file.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_SYSDEVSPACE 37 Displays the path and the name of the SYSDEVSPACE file.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_USR a1 Enter the name of the domain user that is used by Adabas internally. Normally, the default settings for the name and password of the domain user are not changed.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_SYSPWD 11 Enter a password.
22 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_CACHE_SIZE 2e Enter the size of the data cache in megabytes.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_CONPWD 11 Enter a password.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DATADEVSPACE 25 Enter the path for the data DEVSPACE.
2b DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_TRANSACTIONLOG_SIZE 34 Enter the size of the transaction file in megabytes.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_CONUSR cb Enter the name of a user that you want to give limited control to modify some parameters of the database. Normally, the default settings for the name and the password of the control user are not changed.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DBNAME 1e Type the name of the database.
29 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DATADEVSPACE_SIZE 4d Enter the size of the database in megabytes here. The maximum size is 100 MB.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_PBDATADEVSPACE 4b Locate the directory in which you want to save the file, and then click OK.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_PBTRANSACTIONLOG 4b Locate the directory in which you want to save the file, and then click OK.
21 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DOMAINPWD 11 Enter a password.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_SYSUSR 2d Enter the name of the database administrator.
25 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_PBSYSDEVSPACE 4b Locate the directory in which you want to save the file, and then click OK.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_SYSDEVSPACE 27 Enter the path for the system DEVSPACE.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_TRANSACTIONLOG 2c Enter the path for the transaction log file.
2a DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CHECK_REQUIRED_FIELDS d8 When you enter a new record or update an existing record in a form, and you leave a field empty which is bound to a database column which requires input, then you will see a message complaining about the empty field.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_IGNOREINDEXAPPENDIX 2d Creates an index with ASC or DESC statements.
1f HID_DSADMIN_PRIMARY_KEY_SUPPORT 5f Enable to overrule Base's heuristics used to detect whether the database supports primary keys.
1b HID_DSADMIN_ESCAPE_DATETIME 35 Use date/time literals that conform to ODBC standard.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_BOOLEANCOMPARISON 3b Select the type of Boolean comparison that you want to use.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_ENABLEOUTERJOIN 5c Use escape sequences for outer joins. The syntax for this escape sequence is {oj outer-join}
25 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_APPENDTABLEALIAS 39 Appends the alias to the table name in SELECT statements.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SCHEMA 37 Allows you to use the schema name in SELECT statements.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DOSLINEENDS 6d Select to use the CR + LF code pair to end every text line (preferred for DOS and Windows operating systems).
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_PARAMETERNAMESUBST 44 Replaces named parameters in a data source with a question mark (?).
26 HID_DSADMIN_AS_BEFORE_CORRELATION_NAME 9b Some databases use the keyword "AS" between a name and its alias, while other databases use a whitespace. Enable this option to insert AS before the alias.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SUPPRESS_VERSIONCL 49 Displays the internal version number of the record in the database table.
1c DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CATALOG b9 Uses the current data source of the catalogue. This option is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. Do not select this option if the ODBC data source is a dBASE driver.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_IGNOREDRIVER_PRIV 43 Ignores access privileges that are provided by the database driver.
1c DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CHARSET 54 Select the character set that you want to use to view the database in $[officename].
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SPECIAL_MESSAGE 39 Select the type of database to which you want to connect.
2d DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLCLASS 49 Enter the name of the JDBC driver class that connects to the data source.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_PB_TESTMYSQLCLASS 3c Tests the database connection through the JDBC driver class.
3c dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3APAGE_CONNECTION%3ACB_PASSWORD_REQUIRED 60 If marked, the user will be asked to enter the password that is required to access the database.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CALC_PATH 4e Enter the path to the spreadsheet document that you want to use as a database.
2e DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLDBNAME 1f Enter the name of the database.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DBASE_PATH 3e Enter the path to the directory that contains the dBASE files.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_FLAT_PATH 4e Enter the path to the folder containing the text files that the database uses.
3b dbaccess%3APushButton%3APAGE_CONNECTION%3APB_TESTCONNECTION 38 Tests the database connection with the current settings.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_DATABASE_WIZARD 57 The Database Wizard creates a database file that contains information about a database.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_GENERAL_RB_GETEXISTINGDATABASE 49 Select to create a database document for an existing database connection.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DSTYPE 3e Select the database type for the existing database connection.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3APAGE_GENERAL%3ALB_DOCUMENTLIST 86 Select a database file to open from the list of recently used files. Click Finish to open the file immediately and to exit the wizard.
3a dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3APAGE_GENERAL%3ARB_OPENEXISTINGDOC 68 Select to open a database file from a list of recently used files or from a file selection dialogue box.
36 dbaccess%3APushButton%3APAGE_GENERAL%3APB_OPENDOCUMENT b5 Opens a file selection dialogue box in which you can select a database file. Click Open or OK in the file selection dialogue box to open the file immediately and to exit the wizard.
36 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_GENERAL_RB_CREATEDBDATABASE 20 Select to create a new database.
36 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_RB_REGISTERDATASOURCE 118 Select to register the database within your user copy of %PRODUCTNAME. After registering, the database is displayed in the View - Data Sources window. You must register a database to be able to insert the database fields in a document (Insert - Fields - Other) or in a mail merge.
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_CB_OPENAFTERWARDS 4f Select to display the database file, where you can edit the database structure.
3a DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_RB_DONTREGISTERDATASOURCE 4e Select to keep the database information only within the created database file.
34 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_CB_STARTTABLEWIZARD 46 Select to call the Table Wizard after the Database Wizard is finished.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MSACCESS_PB_MSACCESSLOCATION 2c Click to open a file selection dialogue box.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MSACCESS_ET_MSACCESSLOCATION 28 Specifies the path to the database file.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADABAS_PB_ADABASNAME 2c Click to open a file selection dialogue box.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADABAS_ET_ADABASNAME 24 Enter the name of the database file.
3e DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_AUTHENTIFICATION_ET_GENERALUSERNAME 30 A user name can have a maximum of 18 characters.
46 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_AUTHENTIFICATION_CB_GENERALPASSWORDREQUIRED 2b A password must contain 3 to 18 characters.
28 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADO_ET_ADOURL 1a Enter the data source URL.
28 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADO_PB_ADOURL 30 Click to open a database selection dialogue box.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_DBASE_ET_DBASELOCATION 28 Enter the path to the dBASE *.dbf files.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_DBASE_PB_DBASELOCATION 23 Open a path selection dialogue box.
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLHOSTSERVER 41 hostname is the name of the machine that runs the MySQL database.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DRIVERCLASS 22 Enter the name of the JDBC driver.
2c DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLPORT df Enter the URL for the database. For example, for the MySQL JDBC driver, enter "jdbc:mysql://<Servername>/<name of the database>". For more information on the JDBC driver, consult the documentation that came with the driver.
2a DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_JDBCURL df Enter the URL for the database. For example, for the MySQL JDBC driver, enter "jdbc:mysql://<Servername>/<name of the database>". For more information on the JDBC driver, consult the documentation that came with the driver.
29 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_ET_BASEDN 4c Enter the starting point to search the LDAP database, for example, "dc=com".
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_BASEDN 4c Enter the starting point to search the LDAP database, for example, "dc=com".
29 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_CB_USESSL 56 Creates a secure connection to the LDAP server through the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL).
2d DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_ET_PORTNUMBER 30 Enter the port of the LDAP server, normally 389.
2d DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_ET_HOSTSERVER 45 Enter the name of the LDAP server using the format "ldap.server.com".
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_PORTNUMBER 30 Enter the port of the LDAP server, normally 389.
22 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_HOSTNAME 45 Enter the name of the LDAP server using the format "ldap.server.com".
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MYSQL_RB_CONNECTVIAJDBC 48 Connects to an existing JDBC data source that was set on a system level.
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MYSQL_RB_CONNECTVIAODBC 48 Connects to an existing ODBC data source that was set on a system level.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ODBC_ET_NAMEOFODBCDATASOURCE 24 Enter the path to the database file.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ODBC_PB_NAMEOFODBCDATASOURCE 39 Click to open an ODBC data source selection dialogue box:
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLEPORT 2e Enter the port number for the database server.
35 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLEHOSTSERVER 26 Enter the name of the Oracle database.
30 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLECLASS 26 Enter the URL for the database server.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_SPREADSHEET_ET_SPREADSHEETPATH 35 Enter the path and file name to the spreadsheet file.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_SPREADSHEET_PB_SPREADSHEETPATH 2c Click to open a file selection dialogue box.
45 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_SPREADSHEET_CB_SPREADSHEETPASSWORDREQUIRED 44 Select to request a password from the user of the database document.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_THOUSANDS_SEPARATOR 90 Enter or select the character that is used as a thousands separator in the text file, for example a comma (1,000), or a dot-on-the-line (1.000).
26 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR 8a Enter or select the character that is used as a decimal separator in the text file, for example, a dot-on-the-line (0.5) or a comma (0,5).
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_PB_LOCATIONTEXTFILE 2c Click to open a file selection dialogue box.
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSOTHERFILES 42 Click to access custom files. Enter the extension in the text box.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_FIELD_SEPARATOR 4a Enter or select the character that separates data fields in the text file.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_ET_OWNEXTENSION 42 Click to access custom files. Enter the extension in the text box.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_TEXT_SEPARATOR 4c Enter or select the character that identifies a text field in the text file.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSCSVFILES 1a Click to access CSV files.
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_ET_LOCATIONTEXTFILE fd Enter the path to the text file or files. If you just want one text file, you can use any extension of the file name. If you enter a folder name, the text files in that folder must have the extension *.csv to be recognised as files of the text database.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSTXTFILES 1a Click to access txt files.
1f DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLE_EDIT 50 Opens a window in which you can edit the selected table, query, form, or report.
f .uno%3ADBRename 71 Renames the selected object. Depending on the database, some names, characters, and name length might be invalid.
f .uno%3ADBDelete 33 Deletes the selected table, query, form, or report.
1f .uno%3ADBDatabasePropertiesMenu 11 Opens a sub-menu.
2b .uno%3ADBNewReportAutoPilotWithPreSelection 40 Starts the Report Wizard for the selected table, query, or view.
16 .uno%3ADBConvertToView cf Converts the selected query to a view. The original query remains in your database file and an additional view is generated on the database server. You must have write permission to add a view to a database.
19 .uno%3ADBDSConnectionType 21 Opens the Connection Type Wizard.
15 .uno%3ADBDSProperties 2b Opens the Database Properties dialogue box.
29 .uno%3ADBNewFormAutoPilotWithPreSelection 3e Starts the Form Wizard for the selected table, query, or view.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLE_DELETE 33 Deletes the selected table, query, form, or report.
d .uno%3ADBEdit 50 Opens a window in which you can edit the selected table, query, form, or report.
1b .uno%3ADBDSAdvancedSettings 2b Opens the Advanced Properties dialogue box.
d .uno%3ADBOpen 32 Opens the selected object in the last saved state.
1b .uno%3ADBSendReportToWriter 86 Exports the selected report to a text document. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export.
19 .uno%3ADBSendReportAsMail 10e Opens the default e-mail application to send a new e-mail. The selected report is appended as an attachment. You can enter the subject, the recipients and the main text of the e-mail. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export.
42 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_UP 31 Click to go up one level in the folder hierarchy.
49 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_NEWFOLDER 36 Click to create a new folder within the database file.
43 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_SAVE 2e Click to save the form into the database file.
40 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3AED_EXPLORERFILE_FILENAME 27 Enter the file name for the saved form.
13 .uno%3ADBNewViewSQL 1d Opens a new view in SQL mode.
11 .uno%3ADBNewTable 1c Opens the table design view.
12 .uno%3ADBNewReport 48 Starts the Report Builder window for the selected table, view, or query.
12 .uno%3ADBNewFolder 4f Opens a dialogue box with which you can save a new folder in the database file.
14 .uno%3ADBNewQuerySql 1e Opens a new query in SQL mode.
11 .uno%3ADBNewQuery 21 Opens a new query in design mode.
10 .uno%3ADBNewForm 27 Opens a new text document in form mode.
10 .uno%3ADBNewView 20 Opens a new view in design mode.
28 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLE_CREATE_DESIGN 1c Opens the table design view.
12 .uno%3ADBUserAdmin 51 Opens the User Administration dialogue box if the database supports this feature.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_TABLE_SELECTOR 6d Opens the Table Filter dialogue box in which you can specify which tables of the database to show or to hide.
17 .uno%3ADBRelationDesign 5d Opens the Relation Design view and checks whether the database connection supports relations.
12 .uno%3ADBDirectSQL 41 Opens the SQL dialogue box in which you can enter SQL statements.
14 .uno%3ADBTableFilter 6d Opens the Table Filter dialogue box in which you can specify which tables of the database to show or to hide.
14 .uno%3ADBViewQueries 47 Selects the queries container and shows all queries in the detail view.
10 .uno%3ADBPreview 11 Opens a sub-menu.
1c .uno%3ADBDatabaseObjectsMenu 11 Opens a sub-menu.
12 .uno%3ADBViewForms 43 Selects the forms container and shows all forms in the detail view.
17 .uno%3ADBDisablePreview 2c Disables the preview in the database window.
17 .uno%3ADBShowDocPreview 36 The preview displays the document of a form or report.
16 .uno%3ADBRefreshTables 15 Refreshes the tables.
d .uno%3ADBSort 11 Opens a sub-menu.
1b .uno%3ADBShowDocInfoPreview 49 The preview window displays the document information of a form or report.
14 .uno%3ADBViewReports 47 Selects the reports container and shows all reports in the detail view.
13 .uno%3ADBViewTables 45 Selects the tables container and shows all tables in the detail view.
17 .uno%3ADBMigrateScripts 96 The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard moves existing macros from sub-documents of an old Base file into the new Base file's macro storage area.
32 dbaccess%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_SUMMARY%3AED_CHANGES 42 The list shows all changes that were applied to the database file.
45 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATP_SAVE_DBDOC_AS%3APB_BROWSE_SAVE_AS_LOCATION c1 Choose a location and file name to save the new database file. By default, the new file gets the same name as the old file, while the old file gets renamed with the string "backup" in the name.
36 svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_LOGIN%3ACB_LOGIN_SAVEPASSWORD a1 Select to use the same user name and password without a further dialogue box, when you connect again to the same data source in the current %PRODUCTNAME session.
2e svtools%3AEdit%3ADLG_LOGIN%3AED_LOGIN_PASSWORD 31 Enter the password to connect to the data source.
2e svtools%3AEdit%3ADLG_LOGIN%3AED_LOGIN_USERNAME 32 Enter the user name to connect to the data source.
17 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD 36 The Query Wizard helps you to design a database query.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTTABLES 39 Specifies the table for which the query is to be created.
24 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTSELFIELDS 3b Displays all fields that will be included in the new query.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND3 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND4 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND3 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND1 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT2 64 Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT1 39 Specifies the field by which the created query is sorted.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND2 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND1 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT4 64 Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT3 64 Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND4 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND2 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_3 2f Select the field name for the filter condition.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_2 24 Select the condition for the filter.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMATCHALL 45 Select to filter the query by all the conditions using a logical AND.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_3 24 Select the condition for the filter.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_2 29 Enter the value for the filter condition.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_3 29 Enter the value for the filter condition.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_1 29 Enter the value for the filter condition.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_1 24 Select the condition for the filter.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMATCHANY 47 Select to filter the query by any of the conditions using a logical OR.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_2 2f Select the field name for the filter condition.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_1 2f Select the field name for the filter condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BTNAGGREGATEPLUS 1e Appends a new row of controls.
30 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTAGGREGATESUMMARYQUERY 33 Select to show only results of aggregate functions.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BTNAGGREGATEMINUS 21 Removes the last row of controls.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTAGGREGATEFIELDS_1 1e Select the numeric field name.
2e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTAGGREGATEFUNCTION_1 1e Select the aggregate function.
2f WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTAGGREGATEDETAILQUERY 28 Select to show all records of the query.
2a WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERSELFIELDS 3b Displays all fields that are to be used to group the query.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTGROUPMATCHALL 44 Select to group the query by all the conditions using a logical AND.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_3 31 Select the field name for the grouping condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_1 2b Enter the value for the grouping condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_3 2b Enter the value for the grouping condition.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_1 31 Select the field name for the grouping condition.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_2 26 Select the condition for the grouping.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_3 26 Select the condition for the grouping.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_2 31 Select the field name for the grouping condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_2 2b Enter the value for the grouping condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTGROUPMATCHANY 46 Select to group the query by any of the conditions using a logical OR.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_1 26 Select the condition for the grouping.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTTITLE_1 23 Enter the alias for the field name.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTSUMMARY 20 Displays a summary of the query.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDISPLAYQUERY 25 Select to save and display the query.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTQUERYTITLE 1c Enter the name of the query.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMODIFYQUERY 31 Select to save the query and open it for editing.
2e REPORTDESIGN_CHECKBOX_RID_DATETIME_DLG_CB_TIME 94 Enable Include Time to insert a time field into the active area of the report. The time field displays the current time when the report is executed.
2e REPORTDESIGN_CHECKBOX_RID_DATETIME_DLG_CB_DATE 94 Enable Include Date to insert a date field into the active area of the report. The date field displays the current date when the report is executed.
1a .uno%3AInsertDateTimeField 65 You can open the Date and Time dialogue box of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Date and Time.
14 .uno%3ASectionShrink 42 Shrinks the selected section to remove top and bottom empty space.
16 .uno%3ASectionAlignTop 62 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the top margin of the area.
19 .uno%3ASectionAlignBottom 65 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the bottom margin of the area.
15 .uno%3ASmallestHeight 5c Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest height.
17 .uno%3ASectionAlignLeft 63 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the left margin of the area.
15 .uno%3AGreatestHeight 5c Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest height.
18 .uno%3ASectionAlignRight 64 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the right margin of the area.
1a .uno%3ASectionShrinkBottom 3a Shrinks the selected section to remove bottom empty space.
14 .uno%3ASmallestWidth 5b Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest width.
11 .uno%3AHFixedLine 2e Inserts a horizontal line to the current area.
17 .uno%3ASectionShrinkTop 37 Shrinks the selected section to remove top empty space.
11 .uno%3AVFixedLine 2c Inserts a vertical line to the current area.
14 .uno%3AGreatestWidth 5b Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest width.
16 .uno%3AReportNavigator 7f The Report Navigator reveals the structure of the report. You can use the Report Navigator to insert functions into the report.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_DEEPTRAVERSING e8 If Deep traversing is enabled, functions are evaluated considering all lower levels of hierarchy. This would be used for instance for line numbering. If Deep traversing is not enabled, only the first level of hierarchy is evaluated.
12 .uno%3ANewFunction ae In the context menu of the Report Navigator, you will see the same commands as in the Report Builder view, plus additional commands to create new functions or to delete them.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PREEVALUATED 57 If Pre evaluation is enabled, functions are evaluated only when the report is finished.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_INITIALFORMULA 5a Enter the initial value for the evaluation of the formula. Often this is set to 0 or to 1.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_REPORT_NAVIGATOR_TREE 9f Click an entry in the Report Navigator. The corresponding object or area is selected in the Report Builder view. Right-click an entry to open the context menu.
21 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_FORMULA 44 Enter the formula that defines the function. Use OpenFormula syntax.
3b REPORTDESIGN_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PAGENUMBERS_RB_PAGE_BOTTOMPAGE 17 Bottom of Page (Footer)
38 REPORTDESIGN_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PAGENUMBERS_RB_PAGE_TOPPAGE 14 Top of Page (Header)
32 REPORTDESIGN_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PAGENUMBERS_RB_PAGE_N 6 Page N
32 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_PAGENUMBERS_LST_ALIGNMENT 9 Alignment
37 REPORTDESIGN_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PAGENUMBERS_RB_PAGE_N_OF_M b Page N of M
24 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_HEIGHT 2a Defines the height of the selected object.
2a REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PAGEFOOTEROPTION 78 Specifies in which context the page footer will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footer
2e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRINTWHENGROUPCHANGE 17 Print when group change
1e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_FIELD_SEL c4 The Add Field window is shown automatically when you have selected a table in the Contents box and leave that box. You can also click the Add Field icon on the toolbar, or choose View - Add Field.
34 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_CONDITIONALPRINTEXPRESSION 5b If the Conditional Print Expression evaluates to TRUE, the selected object will be printed.
29 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_BACKTRANSPARENT 51 Specifies whether the background of the selected object is transparent or opaque.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_DATAFIELD 43 On the Data tab page, you can change the data contents to be shown.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_FORCENEWPAGE 66 Force New Page specifies whether the current section and/or the next section is printed on a new page.
27 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_POSITIONY 2a Set the Y Position for the selected object
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VERTICAL_ALIGN f Vert. Alignment
27 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_POSITIONX 2a Set the X Position for the selected object
13 .uno%3ASelectReport 5a To display the Data or General tab page for the whole report, choose Edit - Select Report.
22 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_FONT 2d Select the font for the selected text object.
2a REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PAGEHEADEROPTION 79 Specifies in which context the page header will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footer.
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRESERVEIRI f5 For a picture, you can specify to either insert the picture as a link to a file or only as an embedded object in the Base file. The embedded option increases the size of the Base file, while the link option is not as portable to other computers.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_WIDTH 26 Sets the width of the selected object.
21 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_VISIBLE 68 An invisible object is not shown in the executed report. It is still visible in the Report Builder view.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_BACKCOLOR 54 Sets the background colour for the selected object, both on screen and for printing.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_KEEPTOGETHER 78 Keep Together specifies to print the current object starting on top of a new page if it doesn't fit on the current page.
2b REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_GROUPKEEPTOGETHER 5c Groups are kept together by page or by column (default). You must enable Keep Together also.
2d REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRINTREPEATEDVALUES 23 Specifies to print repeated values.
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_NEWROWORCOL 93 New Row Or Column specifies, for a multi-column design, whether the current section and/or the next section will be printed on a new row or column.
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSORT_DELETE 29 Removes the selected field from the list.
41 reportdesign%3AListBox%3ARID_GROUPS_SORTING%3ALST_KEEPTOGETHERLST 4e Select the level of detail by which a group is kept together on the same page.
1e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSBRW 9f Lists the fields that will be used for sorting or grouping. The field at the top has the highest priority, the second field has the second priority, and so on.
24 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_FIELDEXPRESSION 37 Click to open a list from which you can select a field.
40 REPORTDESIGN_NUMERICFIELD_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_ED_GROUPINTERVALLST 3b Enter the group interval value that records are grouped by.
36 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_GROUPONLST 4b Select to create a new group on each changed value, or on other properties.
35 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_FOOTERLST 28 Select to show or hide the Group Footer.
1b .uno%3ADbSortingAndGrouping b8 In the Sorting and Grouping dialogue box of Report Builder, you can define the fields that should be sorted in your report, and the fields that should be kept together to form a group.
35 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_HEADERLST 28 Select to show or hide the Group Header.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSORT_MOVE_UP 28 Moves the selected field up in the list.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSORT_MOVE_DOWN 2a Moves the selected field down in the list.
31 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_ORDER 19 Select the sorting order.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_DIALOG 36 The Table Wizard helps you to create a database table.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPTBUSINESS 40 Select the business category to see only business sample tables.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDSSELECTED 3b Displays all fields that will be included in the new table.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LBTABLES a2 Select one of the sample tables. Then select fields from that table from the left list box. Repeat this step until you have selected all the fields that you need.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPTPRIVATE 3e Select the private category to see only private sample tables.
23 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_AUTOINCREMENTVALUE 70 Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMINUS 2c Remove the selected field from the list box.
1d DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_REQUIRED 2c If set to Yes, this field must not be empty.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_COLNAME 54 Displays the name of the selected data field. If you want, you can enter a new name.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_AUTOINCREMENT 53 If set to Yes, the values for this data field are generated by the database engine.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDPLUS 25 Add a new data field to the list box.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LB_SELFIELDNAMES 36 Select a field in order to edit the field information.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CHK_USEPRIMEKEY cd Select to create a primary key. Add a primary key to every database table to uniquely identify each record. For some database systems within %PRODUCTNAME, a primary key is mandatory for editing the tables.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDS_PK_AVAILABLE 47 Select a field and click > to add it to the list of primary key fields.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CK_PK_AUTOVALUE b6 Select to automatically insert a value and increment the field's value for each new record. The database must support automatic incrementation in order to use the Auto value feature.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_AUTOMATIC 41 Select to automatically add a primary key as an additional field.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVE_PK_SELECTED aa Select a field and click < to remove it from the list of primary key fields. The primary key is created as a concatenation of the fields in this list, from top to bottom.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LB_PK_FIELDNAME 16 Select the field name.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_SEVERAL 4f Select to create a primary key from a concatenation of several existing fields.
2e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CK_PK_AUTOVALUE_AUTOMATIC b6 Select to automatically insert a value and increment the field's value for each new record. The database must support automatic incrementation in order to use the Auto value feature.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_SINGLE 44 Select to use an existing field with unique values as a primary key.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_TXT_NAME 19 Specifies the table name.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_MODIFYTABLE 41 Select to save the table design and open the table to enter data.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_WORKWITHTABLE 29 Select to save and edit the table design.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LST_CATALOG 58 Select the catalogue for the table. (Available only if the database supports catalogues)
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_STARTFORMWIZARD 83 Select to create a form based on this table. The form is created on a text document with the last used settings of the Form Wizard.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LST_SCHEMA 52 Select the schema for the table. (Available only if the database supports schemas)
12 .uno%3ADBTableEdit 39 Opens the selected table so you can change the structure.
12 .uno%3ADBTableOpen 43 Opens the selected table so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
15 .uno%3ADBReportDelete 1c Deletes the selected report.
14 .uno%3ADBQueryDelete 1b Deletes the selected query.
14 .uno%3ADBQueryRename 1b Renames the selected query.
12 .uno%3ADBQueryOpen 43 Opens the selected query so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
11 .uno%3ADBFormOpen 42 Opens the selected form so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
15 .uno%3ADBReportRename 1c Renames the selected report.
12 .uno%3ADBQueryEdit 39 Opens the selected query so you can change the structure.
13 .uno%3ADBReportEdit 37 Opens the selected report so you can change the layout.
13 .uno%3ADBFormRename 1a Renames the selected form.
13 .uno%3ADBReportOpen 44 Opens the selected report so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
11 .uno%3ADBFormEdit 35 Opens the selected form so you can change the layout.
14 .uno%3ADBTableRename 1b Renames the selected table.
14 .uno%3ADBTableDelete 1b Deletes the selected table.
13 .uno%3ADBFormDelete 1a Deletes the selected form.
20 .uno%3AFontworkSameLetterHeights 6b Switches the letter height of the selected Fontwork objects from normal to the same height for all objects.
3c SVX_HID_SVX_CHINESE_TRANSLATION_RB_CONVERSION_TO_TRADITIONAL 46 Click to apply the character spacing to the selected Fontwork objects.
1f .uno%3AFontworkAlignmentFloater 24 Opens the Fontwork Alignment window.
19 .uno%3AFontworkShapeTypes 64 Opens the Fontwork Shape toolbar. Click a shape to apply the shape to all selected Fontwork objects.
26 .uno%3AFontworkCharacterSpacingFloater 2c Opens the Fontwork Character Spacing window.
c FontWork1TBO 3e Click to apply the alignment to the selected Fontwork objects.
c FontWork2TBO 2b Enter the Fontwork character spacing value.
16 SC_HID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS 8f If the same contents are changed by different users, the Resolve Conflicts dialogue box opens. For each conflict, decide which changes to keep.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_SHAREDOCUMENT%3ACB_SHARE dc Enable to share the current document with other users. Disable to use the document unshared. This will invalidate the not yet saved edits that other users applied in the time since you last opened or saved this document.
37 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPALLMINE 30 Keeps all your changes, voids all other changes.
14 .uno%3AShareDocument 6f Opens the Share Document dialogue box in which you can enable or disable collaborative sharing of the document.
34 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPMINE 2a Keeps your change, voids the other change.
39 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPALLOTHERS 39 Keeps the changes of all other users, voids your changes.
35 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPOTHER 36 Keeps the change of the other user, voids your change.
18 .uno%3AFormFilterExecute 65 If you click the Apply Form-Based Filter icon on the Form Filter toolbar, the filter will be applied.
15 .uno%3AFormFilterExit 64 If you click on the Close button on the Form Filter toolbar, the form is displayed without a filter.
1e .uno%3AConfigureToolboxVisible 41 Opens a dialogue box in which you can add, edit and remove icons.
19 SVX_HID_FM_FILTER_IS_NULL de You can edit the filter conditions in this area directly as text. If you wish to check if a field has content or no content, you can select the filter conditions "empty" (SQL:"Is Null") or "not empty" (SQL: "Is not Null").
18 SVX_HID_FILTER_NAVIGATOR 194 The filter conditions that have been set appear in the Filter navigator. As soon as a filter is set, you see a blank filter entry at the bottom of the Filter navigator. You can select this entry by clicking the word "Or". Once you have selected the blank filter entry, you can enter additional filter conditions in the form. These conditions are linked by Boolean OR to the previously defined conditions.
f SVX_HID_FM_EDIT de You can edit the filter conditions in this area directly as text. If you wish to check if a field has content or no content, you can select the filter conditions "empty" (SQL:"Is Null") or "not empty" (SQL: "Is not Null").
16 SVX_HID_FM_IS_NOT_NULL de You can edit the filter conditions in this area directly as text. If you wish to check if a field has content or no content, you can select the filter conditions "empty" (SQL:"Is Null") or "not empty" (SQL: "Is not Null").
1a .uno%3AFormFilterNavigator 69 To connect several filter conditions with Boolean OR, click the Filter navigation icon on the filter bar.
1e SVX_HID_CTL_FONTWORK_FAVORITES bc Select a Fontwork style and click OK to insert the Fontwork into your document. Double-click or Ctrl+double-click the Fontwork in your document to enter text edit mode and change the text.
12 .uno%3ASaveGraphic a4 To export a bitmap in Writer: Right-click the bitmap, choose Save Graphics. You will see the Graphics Export dialogue box. Enter a file name and select a file type.
20 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ADBButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AMathButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
15 FWK_HID_BACKINGWINDOW 44 Click an icon to open a new document or to open a file dialogue box.
24 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AWriterButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ADrawButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AOpenButton 3b The Open a Document icon presents a file open dialogue box.
25 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AImpressButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ACalcButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
26 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ATemplateButton 42 The Templates icon opens the Templates and Documents dialogue box.
12 .uno%3AShowLicense 3a Displays the Licencing and Legal information dialogue box.
f .uno%3AHelpMenu 4c The Help menu allows you to start and control the $[officename] Help system.
c .uno%3AAbout 4b Displays general program information such as version number and copyrights.
12 .uno%3AShowCredits d3 Displays the CREDITS.odt document which lists the names of individuals who have contributed to OpenOffice.org source code (and whose contributions were imported into LibreOffice) or LibreOffice since 2010-09-28.
10 .uno%3AHelpIndex 4a Opens the main page of the $[officename] Help for the current application.
e RID_ENVTOOLBOX 41 The Standard bar is available in every $[officename] application.
13 .uno%3AExtendedHelp 48 Enables extended help tips under the mouse pointer until the next click.
18 .HelpId%3Atableobjectbar 75 The Table Bar contains functions you need when working with tables. It appears when you move the cursor into a table.
14 .uno%3ADSBFormLetter 34 Starts the Mail Merge Wizard to create form letters.
17 .uno%3ADSBInsertColumns 59 Inserts all fields of the marked record into the current document at the cursor position.
10 .uno%3ANewRecord 15 Creates a new record.
13 .uno%3ADeleteRecord 40 Deletes a record. A query needs to be confirmed before deleting.
e .uno%3ARecUndo 20 Allows you to undo a data entry.
e .uno%3ARecSave 41 Saves a new data entry. The change is registered in the database.
11 .uno%3ANextRecord 1d Takes you to the next record.
11 .uno%3ALastRecord 1d Takes you to the last record.
12 .uno%3AFirstRecord 1e Takes you to the first record.
11 .uno%3APrevRecord 21 Takes you to the previous record.
15 .uno%3AAbsoluteRecord 59 Shows the number of the current record. Enter a number to go to the corresponding record.
e .uno%3AGridUse 3d Specifies that you can move objects only between grid points.
16 .uno%3ABezierSymmetric 4d This icon converts a corner point or a smooth point into a symmetrical point.
12 HID_BEZIER_TOOLBOX 53 The Edit Points Bar appears when you select a polygon object and click Edit Points.
13 .uno%3ABezierDelete a8 Use the Delete Points icon to delete one or several selected points. If you wish to select several points click the appropriate points while holding down the Shift key.
14 .uno%3ABezierConvert 4f Converts a curve into a straight line or converts a straight line into a curve.
12 .uno%3ABezierClose 19 Closes a line or a curve.
13 .uno%3ABezierSmooth 41 Converts a corner point or symmetrical point into a smooth point.
13 .uno%3ABezierInsert 41 Activates the insert mode. This mode allows you to insert points.
11 .uno%3ABezierMove 2e Activates a mode in which you can move points.
14 .uno%3ABezierCutLine 79 The Split Curve icon splits a curve. Select the point or points at which you want to split the curve, then click the icon
1c .uno%3ABezierEliminatePoints 3c Marks the current point or the selected points for deletion.
11 .uno%3ABezierEdge 39 Converts the selected point or points into corner points.
18 .uno%3AOptionsTreeDialog 49 This command opens a dialogue box for a customised program configuration.
1a CUI_HID_OFADLG_TREELISTBOX 18 Select an entry to edit.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_SHORTCUT 13 Type your initials.
2b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_TITLE 1e Type your title in this field.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_CITY 2e Type the name of the post town where you live.
2f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_FIRSTNAME 13 Type your forename.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_NAME 12 Type your surname.
2f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_SHORTNAME 13 Type your initials.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_COUNTRY 2b Type the name of the county where you live.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_TELCOMPANY 24 Type your work number in this field.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_FAX 23 Type your fax number in this field.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_COMP 2c Type the name of your company in this field.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_COUNTRY 2b Type the name of the county where you live.
17 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_GENERAL 2d Use this tab page to enter or edit user data.
2a cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_CITY 2e Type the name of the post town where you live.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_MAIL 18 Type your email address.
29 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_FAX 23 Type your fax number in this field.
29 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_PLZ 21 Type your postcode in this field.
2a sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_FIRSTNAME 13 Type your forename.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_COMPANY 2c Type the name of your company in this field.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_TITLE 1e Type your title in this field.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_FAX 23 Type your fax number in this field.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_CITY 2e Type the name of the post town where you live.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_STREET 2b Type the name of your street in this field.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_MAIL 18 Type your email address.
2e cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_US_STATE 2b Type the name of the county where you live.
2a cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_NAME 12 Type your surname.
2a sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_POSITION 30 Type your position in the company in this field.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_COUNTRY 2b Type the name of the county where you live.
2e cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_POSITION 30 Type your position in the company in this field.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_ZIP 21 Type your postcode in this field.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_US_ZIPCODE 21 Type your postcode in this field.
2f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_TELPRIVAT 31 Type your private telephone number in this field.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_ZIP 21 Type your postcode in this field.
2c cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_STREET 2b Type the name of your street in this field.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_US_CITY 2e Type the name of the post town where you live.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_STREET 2b Type the name of your street in this field.
2b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_EMAIL 18 Type your email address.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_AUTOSAVE 9b Specifies that %PRODUCTNAME saves the information needed to restore all open documents in case of a crash. You can specify the time interval between saves.
35 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_RELATIVE_INET 40 Mark this check box for relative saving of URLs in the Internet.
35 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_RELATIVE_FSYS 43 Mark this check box for relative saving of URLs in the file system.
29 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ALB_APP 51 Specifies the document type for which you want to define the default file format.
34 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ACB_LOAD_SETTINGS 47 Loads the user-specific settings saved in a document with the document.
14 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_SAVE 72 In the General section, you can select default settings for saving documents, and can select default file formats.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ALB_ODF_VERSION fd Some companies or organisations may require ODF documents in the ODF 1.0/1.1 format. You can select that format to save in the list box. This older format cannot store all new features, so the new format ODF 1.2 (Extended) is recommended where possible.
36 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ACB_LOAD_DOCPRINTER 173 If marked, the printer settings will be loaded with the document. This can cause a document to be printed on a distant printer, if you do not change the printer manually in the Print dialogue box. If unmarked, your standard printer will be used to print this document. The current printer settings will be stored with the document whether or not this check box is marked.
38 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_ALIEN_WARNING%3ACB_WARNING_OFF c4 You can choose to get a warning message when you save a document in a format that is not OpenDocument or which you did not set as default format in Load/Save - General in the Options dialogue box.
2e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_BACKUP d5 Saves the previous version of a document as a backup copy whenever you save a document. Every time %PRODUCTNAME creates a backup copy, the previous backup copy is replaced. The backup copy gets the extension .BAK.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_WARNALIENFORMAT c4 You can choose to get a warning message when you save a document in a format that is not OpenDocument or which you did not set as default format in Load/Save - General in the Options dialogue box.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_NOPRETTYPRINTING 61 When saving the document, %PRODUCTNAME writes the XML data without indents and extra line breaks.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ALB_FILTER b7 Specifies how documents of the type selected on the left will always be saved as this file type. You may select another file type for the current document in the Save as dialogue box.
2f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_DOCINFO 66 Specifies that the Properties dialogue box will appear every time that you select the Save As command.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3AED_AUTOSAVE 49 Specifies the time interval in minutes for the automatic recovery option.
18 CUI_HID_OPTPATH_CTL_PATH 5f To modify an entry in this list, select it and click Edit. You can also double-click the entry.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_PATH%3ABTN_PATH 3c Click to display the Select Path or Edit Paths dialogue box.
14 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_PATH 75 This section contains the default paths to important folders in $[officename]. These paths can be edited by the user.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_PATH%3ABTN_STANDARD 48 The Default button resets the predefined paths for all selected entries.
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_MULTIPATH%3ABTN_ADD_MULTIPATH 6c Opens the Select Path dialogue box to select another folder or the Open dialogue box to select another file.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_MULTIPATH%3ALB_MULTIPATH 5f Contains a list of the paths that have already been added. Mark the default path for new files.
1b CUI_HID_LNGDLG_NUM_PREBREAK 50 Type the minimum number of characters that must come before or after the hyphen.
2a cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3AED_WORD 86 You can type a new word for inclusion in the dictionary. In the list below you will see the contents of the current custom dictionary.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3ALB_DICTLANG 38 Assigns a new language to the current custom dictionary.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_MODULES_EDIT 34 To edit a language module, select it and click Edit.
18 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_DICT_NEW 90 Opens the New Dictionary dialogue box, in which you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXDLG_NEWDICT%3AED_DICTNAME 30 Specifies the name of the new custom dictionary.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_DICS_EDIT_DIC 77 Opens the Edit custom dictionary dialogue box, in which you can add to your custom dictionary or edit existing entries.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_DICS_NEW_DIC 90 Opens the New Dictionary dialogue box, in which you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_OPTIONS_EDIT 44 If you want to change a value, select the entry and then click Edit.
1d CUI_HID_CLB_EDIT_MODULES_DICS 2e Lists the available user-defined dictionaries.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXDLG_NEWDICT%3ALB_DICTLANG 4f By selecting a certain language you can limit the use of the custom dictionary.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3APB_NEW_REPLACE a0 Adds the word in the Word text field to your current custom dictionary. The word in the Suggestion field is also added when working with exception dictionaries.
19 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_DICT_EDIT 77 Opens the Edit custom dictionary dialogue box, in which you can add to your custom dictionary or edit existing entries.
19 CUI_HID_CLB_LINGU_OPTIONS 34 Defines the options for spell check and hyphenation.
12 .uno%3ASpellOnline 41 Automatically checks spelling as you type, and underlines errors.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3APB_DELETE_REPLACE 3b Removes the marked word from the current custom dictionary.
41 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXDLG_LNG_ED_NUM_PREBREAK%3AED_PREBREAK 50 Type the minimum number of characters that must come before or after the hyphen.
15 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_LINGU 49 Specifies the properties of the spell checker, thesaurus and hyphenation.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_DICS_DEL_DIC 59 Deletes the selected dictionary after a confirmation, provided it is not write-protected.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3ALB_ALLDICTS 20 Specifies the book to be edited.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXDLG_NEWDICT%3ABTN_EXCEPT 44 Specifies whether you wish to avoid certain words in your documents.
19 CUI_HID_CLB_LINGU_MODULES 28 Contains the installed language modules.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3AED_REPLACE a6 This input field is only available if you are editing an exception dictionary. The field shows the alternative suggestion for the current word in the "Word" text box.
44 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3APB_EDIT_MODULES_PRIO_UP 4b Increases the priority of the module selected in the list box by one level.
46 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3APB_EDIT_MODULES_PRIO_DOWN 4b Decreases the priority of the module selected in the list box by one level.
20 CUI_HID_CLB_EDIT_MODULES_MODULES 71 Specifies the language and the available spelling, hyphenation and Thesaurus sub-modules for the selected module.
42 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3ALB_EDIT_MODULES_LANGUAGE 25 Specifies the language of the module.
46 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3APB_EDIT_MODULES_PRIO_BACK 37 Click here to undo the current changes in the list box.
15 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_RGB_2 5 Green
15 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_RGB_1 3 Red
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ALB_COLORMODEL 5d To modify, select the colour model: Red-Green-Blue (RGB) or Cyan-Magenta-Yellow-Black (CMYK).
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_SAVE 6a Opens the Save As dialogue box, which enables you to save the current colour table under a specified name.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_ADD 12 Adds a new colour.
29 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3AEDT_NAME 6b Specifies the name of a selected colour. You can also type a name in this field when defining a new colour.
15 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_COLOR 62 Allows you to select a colour from a colour table, edit an existing colour, or define new colours.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_LOAD 4b Accesses the Open dialogue box, which allows you to select a colour palette
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_MODIFY 1b Changes the current colour.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ALB_COLOR 53 Contains a list of available colours. To select a colour, choose one from the list.
15 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_RGB_3 4 Blue
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_WORK_ON 4b Accesses the Open dialogue box, which allows you to select a colour palette
32 svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_LUMINANCE 2c Sets the Brightness in the HSB colour model.
2c svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_HUE 25 Sets the Hue in the HSB colour model.
31 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3AMTR_FLD_4 44 Sets the Black colour value or key (black) in the CMYK colour model.
16 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_CMYK_2 37 Sets the Magenta colour value in the CMYK colour model.
2b svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_KEY 44 Sets the Black colour value or key (black) in the CMYK colour model.
28 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_COLOR%3ABTN_2 b7 Sets the small selection cursor in the right window on the colour, which corresponds to the selected colour in the left window and updates the respective values in the numeric fields.
2c svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_CYAN 34 Sets the Cyan colour value in the CMYK colour model.
28 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_COLOR%3ABTN_1 bb Click the <-- button to replace the selected colour in the colour palette with the colour selected at the right. The button is enabled when you select a colour in one of the four corners.
2d svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_BLUE 33 Sets the Blue colour value in the RGB colour model.
16 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_CMYK_3 36 Sets the Yellow colour value in the CMYK colour model.
2e svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_YELLOW 36 Sets the Yellow colour value in the CMYK colour model.
2e svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_GREEN 34 Sets the Green colour value in the RGB colour model.
2c svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_RED 32 Sets the Red colour value in the RGB colour model.
2f svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_MAGENTA 37 Sets the Magenta colour value in the CMYK colour model.
33 svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_SATURATION 2c Sets the Saturation in the HSB colour model.
16 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_CMYK_1 34 Sets the Cyan colour value in the CMYK colour model.
29 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_TOOLTIP 86 Displays the icon names and more bubble help information, for example, chapter names when you scroll through a document with chapters.
33 cui%3APushButton%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3APB_HELPAGENT_RESET 67 Click Reset Help Agent to restore the default list of situations for which the Help Agent is displayed.
29 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_EXTHELP 72 Displays some short help text when you rest the cursor on an icon, a menu command, or a control in a dialogue box.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_HELPAGENT b0 Specifies that the Help Agent will be displayed automatically in selected situations. Click the Help Agent window to see a Help page with information about the current context.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_DOCSTATUS 48 Specifies whether the printing of the document counts as a modification.
29 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_FILEDLG 92 Specifies whether $[officename] dialogue boxes are used to open and save documents. Otherwise the dialogue boxes of the operating system are used.
2f cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ANF_YEARVALUE 4a Defines a date range, within which the system recognises a two-digit year.
2b cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ALB_HELPFORMAT 27 Choose the style of $[officename] Help.
39 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ALB_FONTHEIGHT 41 Select a font size for the display of HTML and Basic source code.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ACB_USETABLE 36 Enables the font replacement settings that you define.
18 CUI_HID_OFA_SUBST_DELETE 26 Deletes the selected font replacement.
35 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ACB_FONT2 31 Enter or select the name of the replacement font.
35 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ACB_FONT1 3e Enter or select the name of the font that you want to replace.
1d CUI_HID_OFA_FONT_SUBSTITUTION ca Substitutes a font with a font of your choice. The substitution only replaces a font when it is displayed on screen or during printing. It does not change the font specified in your document formatting.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ACB_NONPROP 51 Mark this check box to display only non-proportional fonts in the Fonts list box.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ALB_FONTNAME 3e Select the font for the display of HTML and Basic source code.
1a CUI_HID_OFA_FONT_SUBST_CLB 111 Lists the original font and the font that will replace it. Select Always to replace both the screen font and the printer font, even if the original font is installed on your system. Select Screen only to replace the screen font only and never replace the font for printing.
17 CUI_HID_OFA_SUBST_APPLY 26 Applies the selected font replacement.
27 SVX_CHECKBOX_OFA_TP_VIEW_CB_SYSTEM_FONT 73 Specifies to use the system font to display all menus and dialogue boxes. Othwerise another installed font is used.
30 svx%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_USE_ANTIALIASE af When supported, you can enable and disable anti-aliasing of graphics. With anti-aliasing enabled, the display of most graphical objects looks smoother and with less artifacts.
2d cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_SYSTEM_FONT 73 Specifies to use the system font to display all menus and dialogue boxes. Othwerise another installed font is used.
32 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_FONTANTIALIASING 2f Select to smooth the screen appearance of text.
13 CUI_HID_OFA_TP_VIEW 17 Specifies view options.
29 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_MOUSEPOS 59 Specifies if and how the mouse pointer will be positioned in newly opened dialogue boxes.
19 .uno%3ARestoreEditingView 87 Specifies whether to restore the last used document view. Many view properties valid when the document was last saved will be restored.
12 .uno%3ARefreshView 4a Press Shift+Ctrl+R to restore or refresh the view of the current document.
2e svx%3AMetricField%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3AMF_SELECTION 7a Select the transparency level for transparent selections. The default value is 75%. You can select values from 10% to 90%.
29 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_ICONSIZE 2c Specifies the display size of toolbar icons.
2a cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_ICONSTYLE 3f Select the icon style for icons in toolbars and dialogue boxes.
2e cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_FONT_HISTORY 82 Lists the last five fonts that you used in the current document at the top of the list in the Font Name box on the Formatting bar.
23 SVX_LISTBOX_OFA_TP_VIEW_LB_ICONSIZE 2c Specifies the display size of toolbar icons.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_SELECTION b2 If enabled, the text selection in Writer and the cell selection in Calc will be shown using a transparent colour. If not enabled, the selection will be shown by inverted colours.
24 SVX_LISTBOX_OFA_TP_VIEW_LB_ICONSTYLE 3f Select the icon style for icons in toolbars and dialogue boxes.
2b cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_MENU_ICONS a4 Displays icons next to the corresponding menu items. Select from "Automatic", "Hide" and "Show". "Automatic" displays icons according to system settings and themes.
2c cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_MOUSEMIDDLE 30 Defines the function of the middle mouse button.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_FONT_SHOW 7b Displays the names of selectable fonts in the corresponding font, for example, fonts in the Font box on the Formatting bar.
2f cui%3AMetricField%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3AMF_WINDOWSIZE 69 Uses percentile scaling for font size in user interface elements, such as dialogue boxes and icon labels.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_USE_HARDACCELL 63 Directly accesses hardware features of the graphical display adapter to improve the screen display.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ANF_AA_POINTLIMIT 34 Enter the smallest font size to apply anti-aliasing.
44 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEBITMAPS_NORMAL 75 High print quality corresponds to a resolution of 300dpi. Normal print quality corresponds to a resolution of 200dpi.
3f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_REDUCETRANSPARENCY a5 If you mark this field the transparent objects will be printed like normal, non-transparent objects, depending on your selection in the following two option buttons.
36 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_PAPERSIZE 58 Mark this check box if a certain paper size is needed for printing the current document.
47 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCETRANSPARENCY_AUTO 76 Specifies that the transparency is only printed if the transparent area covers less than a quarter of the entire page.
3f sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_PRINTFILEOUTPUT 57 Specifies whether the print settings apply to direct printing or to printing to a file.
3a sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_REDUCEBITMAPS 6e Specifies that bitmaps are printed with reduced quality. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased.
44 sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ALB_REDUCEBITMAPS_RESOLUTION 61 Specifies the maximum print quality in dpi. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased.
39 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_TRANSPARENCY 69 Mark this check box if you always want to be warned if transparent objects are contained in the document.
45 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEGRADIENTS_COLOR 4a Specifies that gradients are only printed in a single intermediate colour.
45 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEBITMAPS_OPTIMAL 75 High print quality corresponds to a resolution of 300dpi. Normal print quality corresponds to a resolution of 200dpi.
47 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEGRADIENTS_STRIPES 3e Specifies the maximum number of gradient stripes for printing.
47 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_REDUCEBITMAPS_TRANSPARENCY 75 If this field is marked, the reduction in print quality for bitmaps also applies to the transparent areas of objects.
48 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEBITMAPS_RESOLUTION 61 Specifies the maximum print quality in dpi. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased.
3c sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_REDUCEGRADIENTS 44 If this field is marked, gradients are printed with reduced quality.
3d sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_PRINTEROUTPUT 57 Specifies whether the print settings apply to direct printing or to printing to a file.
4a sfx2%3ANumericField%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ANF_REDUCEGRADIENTS_STEPCOUNT 3e Specifies the maximum number of gradient stripes for printing.
3d sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_PAPERORIENTATION 5e Mark this check box if you need a certain paper orientation for printing the current document.
47 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCETRANSPARENCY_NONE 2f With this option transparency is never printed.
40 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_CONVERTTOGREYSCALES 39 Specifies that all colours are printed only as greyscale.
30 cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ANF_OLECACHE 46 Choose the maximum number of OLE objects that are pooled in the cache.
2f cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ACB_QUICKLAUNCH 89 Mark this check box if you want $[officename] to enable Quickstart. This option is available if the Quickstart module has been installed.
3a cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ANF_GRAPHICOBJECTCACHE 64 Specifies that objects which are larger than the selected megabytes will not be placed in the cache.
36 cui%3ATimeField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ATF_GRAPHICOBJECTTIME 4f Specifies the time that each graphic remains in the cache in hours and minutes.
2c cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3AED_UNDO 5c You can specify the number of steps which can be undone by selecting a number from the list.
34 cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ANF_GRAPHICCACHE 30 Specifies the total cache size for all graphics.
27 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_COLORCONFIG_NAME_SCHEME 23 Enter a name for the colour scheme.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLORCONFIG%3APB_SAVESCHEME 48 Saves the current settings as a colour scheme that you can reload later.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLORCONFIG%3ALB_COLORSCHEME 2a Selects the colour scheme you want to use.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLORCONFIG%3APB_DELETESCHEME 58 Deletes the colour scheme shown in the Scheme box. You cannot delete the Default scheme.
29 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_COLORCONFIG_COLORLIST_WIN 33 Select the colours for the user interface elements.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_AUTO_DETECT_HC 5d Switches %PRODUCTNAME into high-contrast mode when the system background colour is very dark.
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_TIPHELP 3f Hides the Help tips after the number of seconds that you enter.
47 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_ANIMATED_GRAPHICS 40 Previews animated graphics, such as GIF images, in %PRODUCTNAME.
41 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ANF_TIPHELP 35 Enter the number of seconds to display the Help tips.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_TEXTSELECTION 27 Displays cursor in read-only documents.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_PAGE_PREVIEWS 4c Applies the high-contrast settings of the operating system to page previews.
48 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_ACCESSIBILITY_TOOL e1 Allows you to use assistive tools, such as external screen readers, Braille devices or speech recognition input devices. The Java Runtime Environment must be installed on your computer before you can enable assistive support.
4a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_AUTOMATIC_FONT_COLOR 6d Displays fonts in %PRODUCTNAME using the system colour settings. This option only affects the screen display.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_ANIMATED_TEXTS 48 Previews animated text, such as blinking and scrolling, in %PRODUCTNAME.
32 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_FTP_PROXY 2a Type the name of the proxy server for FTP.
33 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_HTTP_PROXY 2b Type the name of the proxy server for HTTP.
33 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_SOCKS_PORT 31 Type the port for the corresponding proxy server.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_FTP_PORT 31 Type the port for the corresponding proxy server.
33 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_NOPROXYFOR 62 Specifies the names of the servers that do not require any proxy servers, separated by semicolons.
15 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_PROXY 27 Specifies the type of proxy definition.
33 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_HTTPS_PORT 31 Type the port for the corresponding proxy server.
32 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_HTTP_PORT 31 Type the port for the corresponding proxy server.
34 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_HTTPS_PROXY 53 Type the name of the proxy server for HTTPS. Type the port in the right-hand field.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3ALB_PROXYMODE 27 Specifies the type of proxy definition.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_MAIL%3AED_MAILERURL 27 Enter the e-mail program path and name.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_MAIL%3APB_MAILERURL 37 Opens a file dialogue box to select the e-mail program.
3f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_MOZPLUGIN%3ACB_MOZPLUGIN_CODE c7 Enables the Browser Plug-in to show %PRODUCTNAME documents in a browser window. Select, click OK, then restart your browser. Then, in the browser window, click a hyperlink to a %PRODUCTNAME document.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_SIGNDOCS de Mark this check box to see a warning dialogue box when you try to sign a document that contains recorded changes, versions, fields, references to other sources (for example linked sections or linked pictures), or comments.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_WEBCONNECTION_INFO%3APB_CHANGE 5a Opens a dialogue box in which you can view and change the password for the selected entry.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_WEBCONNECTION_INFO%3APB_REMOVEALL 22 Removes all entries from the list.
42 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_MASTERPASSWORD_CRT%3AED_MASTERPASSWORD_REPEAT 20 Enter the master password again.
3f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_CTRLHYPERLINK 88 If enabled, you must hold down the Ctrl key while clicking a hyperlink to follow that link. If not enabled, a click opens the hyperlink.
37 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_MASTERPASSWORD%3AED_MASTERPASSWORD 26 Enter the master password to continue.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3ACB_SEC_SAVEPASSWORDS bb If enabled, %PRODUCTNAME will securely store all passwords that you use to access files from web servers. You can retrieve the passwords from the list after you enter the master password.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_RECOMMENDPWD a3 Mark this check box to always enable the Save with password option in the file save dialogue boxes. Unmark the check box to save files by default without password.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3APB_SEC_CONNECTIONS 76 Asks for the master password. If master password is correct, shows the Stored Web Connection Information dialogue box.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_CREATEPDF a6 Mark this check box to see a warning dialogue box when you try to export a document to PDF format that displays recorded changes in Writer, or that displays comments.
45 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3APB_SEC_SECURITYOPTIONS 36 Opens the "Security options and warning" dialogue box.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_PRINTDOCS 7e Mark this check box to see a warning dialogue box when you try to print a document that contains recorded changes or comments.
3e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3APB_SEC_MACROSEC 26 Opens the Macro Security dialogue box.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_WEBCONNECTION_INFO%3APB_REMOVE 29 Removes the selected entry from the list.
3f uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_MASTERPASSWORD_CRT%3AED_MASTERPASSWORD_CRT 1a Enter the master password.
44 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3APB_SEC_MASTERPASSWORD 2d Opens the Enter Master Password dialogue box.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_REMOVEINFO e6 Mark this check box to always remove user data from the file properties. If this check box is not marked, you can still remove the personal information for the current document with the Reset button on File - Properties - General.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_SAVESENDDOCS 90 Mark this check box to see a warning dialogue box when you try to save or send a document that contains recorded changes, versions, or comments.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_STARBASIC_WARNING 6f If this field is marked, when exporting to HTML a warning is shown that %PRODUCTNAME Basic macros will be lost.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE2 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
36 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_UNKNOWN_TAGS 67 Mark this check box if you want tags that are not recognised by $[officename] to be imported as fields.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE3 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ALB_CHARSET 33 Select the appropriate character set for the export
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE1 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE4 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_NUMBERS_ENGLISH_US dd If not marked, numbers will be interpreted according to the setting in Language Settings - Language of - Locale setting in the Options dialogue box. If marked, numbers will be interpreted using the 'English (USA)' locale.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_IGNORE_FONTNAMES 97 Mark this check box to ignore all font settings when importing. The fonts that were defined in the HTML Page Style will be the fonts that will be used.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_PRINT_EXTENSION 55 If you mark this field, the print layout of the current document is exported as well.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE5 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE7 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_LOCAL_GRF e3 Mark this check box to automatically upload the embedded pictures to the Internet server when uploading using FTP. Use the Save As dialogue box to save the document and enter a complete FTP URL as the file name in the Internet.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_STARBASIC 62 Mark this check box to include the $[officename] Basic instructions when exporting to HTML format.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ALB_EXPORT 32 Defines the settings for exporting HTML documents.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE6 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
14 .uno%3ASwEditOptions a4 These settings determine the way text documents that are created in $[officename] are handled. It is also possible to define settings for the current text document.
27 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_GRF 40 Specifies whether to display graphics and objects on the screen.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_VSCROLL 20 Displays the vertical scrollbar.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_HRULER 5f Displays the horizontal ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ALB_VMETRIC 5d Displays the vertical ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_VRULER 5d Displays the vertical ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_ANY_RULER 59 Enables the rulers. Use the following two check boxes to select the ruler(s) to be shown.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_HSCROLL 22 Displays the horizontal scrollbar.
27 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_TBL 2f Displays the tables contained in your document.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_FIELD 4f Displays the field names in the document instead of the contents of the fields.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ALB_METRIC 26 Specifies the Unit for HTML documents.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_CROSS aa Displays snap lnes around the frames when frames are moved. You can select the Helplines While Moving option to show the exact position of the object using lineal values.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_POSTIT db Displays comments. Click a comment to edit the text. Use the context menu in Navigator to locate or delete a comment. Use the comment's context menu to delete this comment or all comments or all comments of this author.
31 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_SMOOTH_SCROLL 2d Activates the smooth page scrolling function.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_VRULER_RIGHT 30 Aligns the vertical ruler with the right border.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_DRWFAST 3e Displays the drawings and controls contained in your document.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ALB_HMETRIC 5f Displays the horizontal ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list.
16 .uno%3ATableBoundaries 8c To display the table boundaries, right-click any table and choose Table Boundaries, or choose Table - Table Boundaries in a Writer document.
24 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_IDX 52 Specifies the font used for indexes, alphabetical indexes, and tables of contents.
25 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_LIST 43 Specifies the fonts for lists and numbering and all derived styles.
2f sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_STANDARD_SIZE 1f Specifies the size of the font.
2c sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_TITLE_SIZE 1f Specifies the size of the font.
28 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ACB_DOCONLY 3f Specifies that the settings apply to the current document only.
2c sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_LABEL_SIZE 1f Specifies the size of the font.
f SW_HID_STD_FONT 3d Specifies the settings for the basic fonts in your documents.
2c sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_INDEX_SIZE 1f Specifies the size of the font.
29 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_STANDARD 3e Specifies the font to be used for the Default Paragraph Style.
26 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_TITLE 2b Specifies the font to be used for headings.
2b sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_LIST_SIZE 1f Specifies the size of the font.
26 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_LABEL 3e Specifies the font used for the captions of images and tables.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_CTRLFLD 4b Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 190 If this check box is marked, automatically-inserted blank pages will be printed. This is best if you are printing double-sided. For example, in a book, a "chapter" paragraph style has been set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to print that even numbered page or not.
34 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_PAPERFROMSETUP a9 For printers with multiple trays, the "Paper tray from printer settings" option specifies whether the paper tray used is specified by the system settings of the printer.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_REVERSE 72 Specifies whether to reverse the printing order. The last page of the document will then be the first one printed.
2c sw_CheckBox_TP_OPTPRINT_PAGE_CB_PROSPECT_RTL 67 Mark this check box to print the pages of the brochure in the correct order for a right-to-left script.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_SINGLEJOBS 62 Specifies that each new print job will begin on a new page even if you are using a duplex printer.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AListBox 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
36 .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintControls%3ACheckBox 4b Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed.
28 SW%3ALISTBOX%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ALB_FAX 84 If you have installed fax software on your computer and wish to fax directly from the text document, select the desired fax machine.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_BLACK_FONT 30 Specifies whether to always print text in black.
40 .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPicturesAndObjects%3ACheckBox 41 Specifies whether the graphics of your text document are printed.
2b SW%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ARB_NO 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
38 .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintBlackFonts%3ACheckBox 30 Specifies whether to always print text in black.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_RIGHTP 4a Specifies whether to print all right (odd numbered) pages of the document.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_BACKGROUND 96 Specifies whether to include colours and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background) in the printed document.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_LEFTP 4a Specifies whether to print all left (even numbered) pages of the document.
2b sw_CheckBox_TP_OPTPRINT_PAGE_CB_HIDDEN_TEXT 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
14 SW_HID_OPTPRINT_PAGE 38 Specifies print settings within a text or HTML document.
30 sw_CheckBox_TP_OPTPRINT_PAGE_CB_TEXT_PLACEHOLDER 7a Enable this option to print text placeholders. Unmark this check box to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintHiddenText%3ACheckBox 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_PGRF 41 Specifies whether the graphics of your text document are printed.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_PROSPECT 45 Select the Brochure option to print your document in brochure format.
3c .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPageBackground%3ACheckBox 96 Specifies whether to include colours and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background) in the printed document.
2f sw_CheckBox_TP_OPTPRINT_PAGE_CB_PRINTEMPTYPAGES 190 If this check box is marked, automatically-inserted blank pages will be printed. This is best if you are printing double-sided. For example, in a book, a "chapter" paragraph style has been set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to print that even numbered page or not.
3d .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintTextPlaceholder%3ACheckBox 7a Enable this option to print text placeholders. Unmark this check box to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
14 SW_HID_OPTTABLE_PAGE 33 Defines the attributes of tables in text documents.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_REPEAT_HEADER 59 Specifies whether the table heading is carried over onto the new page after a page break.
2c sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ARB_FIX 56 Specifies that changes to a row or column only affect the corresponding adjacent area.
37 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_NUMFMT_FORMATTING 9a If Number format recognition is not marked, only input in the format that has been set at the cell is accepted. Any other input resets the format to Text.
2c sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ARB_VAR 40 Specifies that changes to a row or column affect the table size.
32 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_NUMALIGNMENT 43 Specifies that numbers are always bottom right aligned in the cell.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_HEADER 60 Specifies that the first row of the table is formatted with the "Table heading" Paragraph Style.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_BORDER 34 Specifies that table cells have a border by default.
1d .uno%3ATableNumberRecognition 4f Specifies that numbers in a text table are recognised and formatted as numbers.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_DONT_SPLIT 43 Specifies that tables are not split by any type of text flow break.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_NUMFORMATTING 4f Specifies that numbers in a text table are recognised and formatted as numbers.
30 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3AMF_ROWMOVE 30 Specifies the value to be used for moving a row.
30 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ARB_FIXPROP 4d Specifies that changes to a row or column have an effect on the entire table.
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3AMF_COLINSERT 32 Specifies the default value for inserting columns.
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3AMF_ROWINSERT 2f Specifies the default value for inserting rows.
30 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3AMF_COLMOVE 33 Specifies the value to be used for moving a column.
28 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_PARA 79 Specifies whether paragraph delimiters are displayed. The paragraph delimiters also contain paragraph format information.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ARB_SHDWCRSFILLTAB 7f When the direct cursor is used, as many tabs as necessary are added in the new paragraph until the clicked position is reached.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ARB_SHDWCRSFILLINDENT 9d When the direct cursor is used, the left paragraph indent is set at the horizontal position where you click the direct cursor. The paragraph is left aligned.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_CHAR_HIDDEN 66 Displays text that uses the character format "hidden", when View - Non-printing Characters is enabled.
37 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ARB_SHDWCRSFILLSPACE 9f When the Direct Cursor is used, a corresponding number of tabs and spaces are inserted in the new paragraph as necessary until the clicked position is reached.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_FLD_HIDDEN_PARA 6e If you have inserted text using the Hidden Paragraph field, specifies whether to display the hidden paragraph.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ARB_SHDWCRSFILLMARGIN 101 Sets the paragraph alignment when the direct cursor is used. Depending on where the mouse is clicked, the paragraph is formatted left aligned, centred or right aligned. The cursor before the mouse-click shows, by means of a triangle, which alignment is set.
31 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_ALLOW_IN_PROT 57 Specifies that you can set the cursor in a protected area, but cannot make any changes.
12 SW_HID_OPTSHDWCRSR 6f In $[officename] text and HTML documents, defines the display for certain characters and for the direct cursor.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_HSPACE c6 Specifies that non-breaking spaces are shown as grey boxes. Non-breaking spaces are not broken at the end of a line and are entered with the Command+Shift+Spacebar Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar shortcut keys.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_SHYPH 178 Specifies whether user-defined delimiters are displayed. These are hidden delimiters that you enter within a word by pressing Command+Hyphen(-) Ctrl+Hyphen(-). Words with user-defined delimiters are only separated at the end of a line at the point where a user-defined delimiter has been inserted, irrespective of whether the automatic hyphenation is activated or deactivated.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_BREAK 82 Displays all line breaks inserted with the Shift+Enter shortcut. These breaks create a new line, but do not start a new paragraph.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_FLD_HIDDEN 47 Displays text that is hidden by Conditional Text or Hidden Text fields.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_SPACE 42 Specifies whether to represent every space in the text with a dot.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_SHDWCRSONOFF 1c Activates the direct cursor.
27 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_TAB 37 Specifies that tab stops are displayed as small arrows.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_MARKPOS 3e Defines if and where changed lines in the document are marked.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_DEL_COL eb You can also choose a colour to identify each type of recorded change. If "By author" is chosen from the list, the colour is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified according to the corresponding author of the changes.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_LC_COL 44 Specifies the colour for highlighting the changed lines in the text.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_DEL_ATTR ca Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is deleted. If you record text deletions, the text is displayed with the selected attribute (for example, strikethrough) and is not deleted.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_INS_ATTR 4a Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is inserted.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_INS_COL eb You can also choose a colour to identify each type of recorded change. If "By author" is chosen from the list, the colour is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified according to the corresponding author of the changes.
12 SW_HID_REDLINE_OPT 32 Defines the appearance of changes in the document.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_CHG_ATTR 88 Defines how changes to text attributes are displayed in the document. These changes affect attributes such as bold, italic or underline.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_CHG_COL eb You can also choose a colour to identify each type of recorded change. If "By author" is chosen from the list, the colour is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified according to the corresponding author of the changes.
2e sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ARB_ALWAYS 2e Always updates links while loading a document.
13 SW_HID_OPTLOAD_PAGE 2e Specifies general settings for text documents.
37 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ACB_AUTO_UPDATE_FIELDS d2 The contents of all fields are updated automatically whenever the screen contents are displayed as new. Even with this check box unmarked, some fields are updated each time that a special condition takes place.
37 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ACB_AUTO_UPDATE_CHARTS be Specifies whether to automatically update charts. Whenever a Writer table cell value changes and the cursor leaves that cell, the chart that displays the cell value is updated automatically.
2d sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ARB_NEVER 31 Links are never updated while loading a document.
2f sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ARB_REQUEST 37 Updates links only on request while loading a document.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ALB_METRIC 35 Specifies the unit of measurement for text documents.
2f sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ARB_NEVER 31 Links are never updated while loading a document.
2b sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3AMF_TAB 37 Specifies the spacing between the individual tab stops.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ARB_REQUEST 37 Updates links only on request while loading a document.
30 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ARB_ALWAYS 2e Always updates links while loading a document.
38 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACB_USE_PRINTER_METRICS 6a Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen.
37 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_OPTCOMPATIBILITY_PAGE%3APB_DEFAULT 69 Click to use the current settings on this tab page as the default for further sessions with %PRODUCTNAME.
1c SW_HID_OPTCOMPATIBILITY_PAGE 8c Specifies compatibility settings for text documents. These options help in fine-tuning %PRODUCTNAME when importing Microsoft Word documents.
30 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ALB_CHARSTYLE 1e Specifies the character style.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ABOX_FORMAT 29 Specifies the type of numbering required.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3AEDT_TEXT 57 Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ALB_LEVEL 4f Specifies the headings or chapter levels where you want the numbering to start.
2d sw%3AEdit%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3AED_SEPARATOR 57 Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level.
15 SW_HID_OPTCAPTION_CLB 4a Select the object type for which the AutoCaption settings are to be valid.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ABOX_POS 42 Determines the position of the caption with respect to the object.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ACB_APPLYBORDER 41 Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame.
31 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ABOX_CATEGORY 2e Specifies the category of the selected object.
3a svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ANUM_FLD_DIVISION_X 4c Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the x-axis.
15 .uno%3AHelplinesFront 2c Sets the snap lines in front of all objects.
14 SVX_HID_OPTIONS_GRID cc Specifies the settings for the configurable grid on your document pages. This grid helps you determine the exact position of your objects. You can also set this grid in line with the "magnetic" snap grid.
10 .uno%3AGridFront 2e Sets the visible grid in front of all objects.
34 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_GRID_VISIBLE 26 Specifies whether to display the grid.
35 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_DRAW_Y 51 Defines the grid points spacing in the desired unit of measurement on the y-axis.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SYNCHRONIZE 44 Specifies whether to change the current grid settings symmetrically.
3a svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ANUM_FLD_DIVISION_Y 4c Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the y-axis.
34 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_USE_GRIDSNAP 5a Specifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only between grid points.
35 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_DRAW_X 4e Defines the unit of measure for the spacing between grid points on the x-axis.
12 .uno%3AGridVisible 26 Specifies whether to display the grid.
13 .uno%3AToolsOptions f4 Defines various settings for spreadsheets, contents to be displayed, and the cursor direction after a cell entry. You can also define sorting lists, determine the number of decimal places and the settings for recording and highlighting changes.
14 .uno%3AScEditOptions f4 Defines various settings for spreadsheets, contents to be displayed, and the cursor direction after a cell entry. You can also define sorting lists, determine the number of decimal places and the settings for recording and highlighting changes.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_OUTLINE 84 If you have defined an outline, the Outline symbols option specifies whether to view the outline symbols at the border of the sheet.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_PAGEBREAKS 46 Specifies whether to view the page breaks within a defined print area.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_RFIND c1 Specifies that each reference is highlighted in colour in the formula. The cell range is also enclosed by a coloured border as soon as the cell containing the reference is selected for editing.
2d sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_OBJGRF 34 Defines if objects and graphics are shown or hidden.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_NIL 36 Specifies whether to show numbers with the value of 0.
12 .uno%3ANoteVisible 5f To display a comment permanently, select the Show comment command from the cell's context menu.
34 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_ROWCOLHEADER 34 Specifies whether to display row and column headers.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_FORMULA 43 Specifies whether to show formulae instead of results in the cells.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_GRID dc Specifies when grid lines will be displayed. Default is to display grid lines only on cells that do not have a background color. You can choose to also display grid lines on cells with background colour, or to hide them.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_ANCHOR 67 Specifies whether the anchor icon is displayed when an inserted object, such as a graphic, is selected.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_ANNOT d3 Specifies that a small rectangle in the top right corner of the cell indicates that a comment exists. The comment will be shown only when you enable tips under %PRODUCTNAME - General in the Options dialogue box.
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_CLIP f5 If a cell contains text that is wider than the width of the cell, the text is displayed over empty neighbouring cells in the same row. If there is no empty neighbouring cell, a small triangle at the cell border indicates that the text continues.
2c sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_COLOR 3e Specifies a colour for the grid lines in the current document.
15 SC_HID_SCPAGE_CONTENT 86 Defines which elements of the %PRODUCTNAME Calc main window are displayed. You can also show or hide highlighting of values in tables.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_TBLREG 56 Specifies whether to display the sheet tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet document.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_HSCROLL 59 Specifies whether to display a horizontal scrollbar at the bottom of the document window.
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_SYNCZOOM 72 If marked, all sheets are shown with the same zoom factor. If not marked, each sheet can have its own zoom factor.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_DRAW 40 Defines if drawing objects in your document are shown or hidden.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_VALUE 11b Mark the Value highlighting box to show the cell content in different colours, depending on type, regardless of how their display is formatted. Text cells are highlighted in black, cells with numbers in blue, and cells containing formulae, logical values, dates, and so on, in green.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_VSCROLL 56 Specifies whether to display a vertical scrollbar at the right of the document window.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_DIAGRAM 37 Defines if charts in your document are shown or hidden.
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_GUIDELINE 5a Specifies whether to view guides when moving drawings, frames, graphics and other objects.
2d sc%3AMetricField%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3AMF_TAB 1f Defines the tab stops distance.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_MARKHDR 56 Specifies whether to highlight column and row headers in the selected columns or rows.
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_ALIGN 64 Determines the direction that the cursor in the spreadsheet will move after you press the Enter key.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_EDITMODE 4e Allows you to immediately edit the selected cell after pressing the Enter key.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_TEXTFMT 6a Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_REPLWARN 71 Specifies that, when you paste cells from the clipboard to a cell range that is not empty, a warning will appear.
13 .uno%3ASetInputMode 4e Allows you to immediately edit the selected cell after pressing the Enter key.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ALB_ALIGN 64 Determines the direction that the cursor in the spreadsheet will move after you press the Enter key.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_FORMAT 74 Specifies whether to automatically apply the formatting attributes of the selected cell to the empty adjacent cells.
2a sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ALB_UNIT 2c Defines the unit of measure in spreadsheets.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_EXPREF f9 Specifies whether to expand references when inserting columns or rows adjacent to the reference range. This is only possible if the reference range, where the column or row is inserted, originally spanned at least two cells in the desired direction.
30 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ABTN_NEW 37 Enters the contents of a new list into the Entries box.
36 sc%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3AED_ENTRIES 50 Displays the content of the currently selected list. This content can be edited.
17 SC_HID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS a2 All user-defined lists are displayed in the Sort Lists dialogue box. You can also define and edit your own lists. Only text can be used as sort lists, no numbers.
31 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ABTN_COPY 119 Copies the contents of the cells in the Copy list from box. If you select a reference to related rows and columns, the Copy List dialogue box appears after clicking the button. You can use this dialogue box to define if the reference is converted to sort lists by row or by column.
2e sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3AED_COPYFROM 99 Defines the spreadsheet and the cells to copy, in order to include them in the Lists box. The currently selected range in the spreadsheet is the default.
30 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ABTN_ADD 23 Adds a new list into the Lists box.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ALB_LISTS 4a Displays all the available lists. These lists can be selected for editing.
25 sc%3AModalDialog%3ARID_SCDLG_COLORROW 2f Allows you to copy marked cells to a sort list.
36 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLORROW%3ABTN_GROUP_COLS 56 Select the Columns option to summarise the contents of the selected columns in a list.
36 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLORROW%3ABTN_GROUP_ROWS 50 Select the Rows option to summarise the contents of the selected rows in a list.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_ITERATE b1 Specifies whether formulae with iterative references (formulae that are continuously repeated until the problem is solved) are calculated after a specific number of repetitions.
2a sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_CALC 11b Specifies whether to make calculations using the rounded values displayed in the sheet. Charts will be shown with the displayed values. If the Precision as shown option is not marked, the displayed numbers are rounded, but they are calculated internally using the non-rounded number.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_MATCH 11e Specifies that the search criteria you set for the Calc database functions must match the whole cell exactly. When the Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells box is marked, $[officename] Calc behaves exactly as Microsoft Excel when searching cells in the database functions.
2d sc%3ANumericField%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3AED_PREC af Defines the number of decimals to be displayed for numbers with the Standard number format. The numbers are displayed as rounded numbers, but are not saved as rounded numbers.
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_LOOKUP cc Specifies that you can use the text in any cell as a label for the column below the text or the row to the right of the text. The text must consist of at least one word and must not contain any operators.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_REGEX 68 Specifies that regular expressions are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons.
30 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_DATESTD 1c Sets 1899-12-30 as day zero.
2a sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_CASE 6b Specifies whether to distinguish between upper- and lower-case in text strings when comparing cell content.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_DATESC10 64 Sets 1900-01-01 as day zero. Use this setting for StarCalc 1.0 spreadsheets containing date entries.
12 SC_HID_SCPAGE_CALC 32 Defines the calculation settings for spreadsheets.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_DATE1904 65 Sets 1904-01-01 as day zero. Use this setting for spreadsheets that are imported in a foreign format.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_GENERAL_PREC dd You can specify the maximum number of decimal places that are shown by default for cells with General number format. If not enabled, cells with General number format show as many decimal places as the column width allows.
2e sc%3ANumericField%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3AED_STEPS 2b Sets the maximum number of iteration steps.
24 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3AED_EPS ad Specifies the difference between two consecutive iteration step results. If the result of the iteration is lower than the minimum change value, then the iteration will stop.
17 SC_HID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE 62 The Changes dialogue box specifies various options for highlighting recorded changes in documents.
30 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE%3ACLB_REMOVE 45 Specifies the colour with which to highlight deletions in a document.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE%3ACLB_MOVE 40 Specifies the colour with which to highlight moved cell content.
31 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE%3ACLB_CONTENT 31 Specifies the colour for changes to cell content.
30 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE%3ACLB_INSERT 46 Specifies the colour with which to highlight insertions in a document.
35 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_PRINT%3ABTN_SKIPEMPTYPAGES 55 Specifies that empty pages that have no cell content or draw objects are not printed.
35 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_PRINT%3ABTN_SELECTEDSHEETS ef Specifies that only contents from selected sheets are printed, even if you specify a wider range in the File - Print dialogue box or in the Format - Print Ranges dialogue box. Contents from sheets that are not selected will not be printed.
14 .uno%3ASdEditOptions ad Defines various settings for newly created presentation documents, such as the contents to be displayed, the measurement unit used, if and how grid alignment is carried out.
2f sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_CONTENTS%3ACBX_RULER 54 Specifies whether to display the rulers at the top and to the left of the work area.
36 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_CONTENTS%3ACBX_MOVE_OUTLINE 59 %PRODUCTNAME displays the contour line of each individual object when moving this object.
16 SD_HID_SD_OPTIONS_VIEW 26 Specifies the available display modes.
38 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_CONTENTS%3ACBX_HANDLES_BEZIER ec Displays the control points of all Bézier points if you have previously selected a Bézier curve. If the All control points in Bézier editor option is not marked, only the control points of the selected Bézier points will be visible.
14 .uno%3AHelplinesMove 3a Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object.
33 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_CONTENTS%3ACBX_HELPLINES 3a Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object.
1a SD_HID_SD_OPTIONS_CONTENTS 26 Specifies the available display modes.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SNAP_BORDER 58 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin.
30 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_BIGORTHO 171 Specifies that a square is created based on the longer side of a rectangle when the Shift key is pressed before you release the mouse button. This also applies to an ellipse (a circle will be created based on the longest diameter of the ellipse). When the Extend edges check box is not marked, a square or a circle will be created based on the shorter side or diameter.
34 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_ANGLE 7c Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating control.
13 .uno%3AHelplinesUse 57 Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when you release the mouse.
11 .uno%3ASnapBorder 58 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin.
38 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_SNAP_AREA cc Defines the snap distance between the mouse pointer and the object contour. $[officename] Impress snaps to a snap point if the mouse pointer is nearer than the distance selected in the Snap range control.
2e svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_ROTATE 7c Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating control.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SNAP_POINTS 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object.
38 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_BEZ_ANGLE 26 Defines the angle for point reduction.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SNAP_FRAME 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SNAP_HELPLINES 57 Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when you release the mouse.
10 .uno%3ASnapFrame 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object.
11 .uno%3ASnapPoints 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object.
2d svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_ORTHO 79 Specifies that graphic objects are restricted vertically, horizontally or diagonally (45°) when creating or moving them.
16 SD_HID_SD_OPTIONS_SNAP 3a Defines the grid settings for creating and moving objects.
2f sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_COLOR 35 Specifies that you want to print in original colours.
2c sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_FRONT 2e Select Front to print the front of a brochure.
33 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_GRAYSCALE 36 Specifies that you want to print colours as greyscale.
33 SD%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_HIDDEN_PAGES 55 Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden from the presentation.
2f SD%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_PAGENAME 29 Specifies whether to print the page name.
17 SD_HID_SD_PRINT_OPTIONS 43 Specifies print settings within a drawing or presentation document.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_PAGETILE a8 Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_DEFAULT 44 Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_BOOKLET 44 Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format.
2b SD%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_DATE 2c Specifies whether to print the current date.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_PAGESIZE 89 Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer, so that they fit on the paper in the printer.
2b SD%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_TIME 2c Specifies whether to print the current time.
2f sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_PAPERBIN 52 Determines that the paper tray to be used is the one defined in the printer setup.
34 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_BLACKWHITE 41 Specifies that you want to print the document in black and white.
2b sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_BACK 2c Select Back to print the back of a brochure.
34 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACB_MERGE_PARA_DIST 68 Specifies that $[officename] Impress calculates the paragraph spacing exactly like Microsoft PowerPoint.
2f sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_QUICKEDIT 6e If on, you can edit text immediately after clicking a text object. If off, you must double-click to edit text.
39 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_CROOK_NO_CONTORTION 71 Maintains relative alignment of Bézier points and 2-D drawing objects to each other when you distort the object.
36 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_MASTERPAGE_CACHE 4d Specifies whether to use the cache for displaying objects on the master page.
34 sd%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3AMTR_FLD_TABSTOP 26 Defines the spacing between tab stops.
39 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_START_WITH_TEMPLATE 64 Specifies whether to activate the Wizard when opening a presentation with File - New - Presentation.
31 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_PICKTHROUGH 3e Specifies whether to select a text frame by clicking the text.
10 .uno%3AQuickEdit 6e If on, you can edit text immediately after clicking a text object. If off, you must double-click to edit text.
12 .uno%3APickThrough 3e Specifies whether to select a text frame by clicking the text.
3c sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_START_WITH_ACTUAL_PAGE 4e Specifies that you always want a presentation to start with the current slide.
3d sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_MARKED_HIT_MOVES_ALWAYS a6 Specifies that you want to move an object with the Rotate tool enabled. If Object always moveable is not marked, the Rotate tool can only be used to rotate an object.
2a sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_COPY 69 If enabled, a copy is created when you move an object while holding down the Ctrl key (Mac: Command key).
2a sd%3AComboBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACB_SCALE 2b Determines the drawing scale on the rulers.
2a sd%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ALB_METRIC 35 Determines the Unit of measurement for presentations.
16 SD_HID_SD_OPTIONS_MISC 42 Defines the general options for drawing or presentation documents.
17 .uno%3ASdGraphicOptions ae Defines the global settings for drawing documents, including the contents to be displayed, the scale to be used, the grid alignment and the contents to be printed by default.
14 .uno%3ASmEditOptions 97 Defines the print format and print options for all new formula documents. These options apply when you print a formula directly from %PRODUCTNAME Math.
3d starmath%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ACB_IGNORE_SPACING 56 Specifies that these space wildcards will be removed if they are at the end of a line.
16 SFX2_HID_PRINT_OPTIONS 3e Defines formula settings that will be valid for all documents.
36 starmath%3AMetricField%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3AMF_ZOOM 56 Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor.
31 STARMATH_CHECKBOX_RID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE_CB_TITLEROW 53 Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout.
28 starmath%3ATabPage%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE 3e Defines formula settings that will be valid for all documents.
d tobeannounced 4a Saves only those symbols which each formula that are used in that formula.
36 starmath%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ARB_ZOOM 56 Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor.
3f starmath%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ARB_ORIGINAL_SIZE 3b Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size.
3c starmath%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ACB_EQUATION_TEXT 5f Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout.
2e STARMATH_CHECKBOX_RID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE_CB_FRAME 3a Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout.
3d starmath%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ARB_FIT_TO_PAGE 3c Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout.
41 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OPTPAGE_CHART_DEFCOLORS%3ALB_CHART_COLOR_LIST 37 Displays all the colours available for the data series.
44 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OPTPAGE_CHART_DEFCOLORS%3APB_RESET_TO_DEFAULT 4e Restores the colour settings that were defined when the program was installed.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_PBAS_STG 120 Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_WBAS_CODE d8 Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_WBAS_STG 120 Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_PBAS_CODE d8 Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub.
3a svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_EBAS_EXECTBL bf The VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code will be loaded ready to be executed. If this check box is not marked, the VBA code will be commented out so it can be inspected, but will not run.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_EBAS_STG 120 Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_EBAS_CODE d8 Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub.
1b CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_MSFLTR2_CLB ad The List Box field displays the entries for the pair of OLE objects that can be converted when loading into $[officename] (L) and/or when saving into a Microsoft format (S).
2f cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_WEST_LANG 4e Specifies the language used for the spell check function in western alphabets.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ACB_DECIMALSEPARATOR 7a Specifies to use the decimal separator key that is set in your system when you press the respective key on the number pad.
30 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_ASIAN_LANG 4c Specifies the language used for the spell check function in Asian alphabets.
33 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_LOCALESETTING 7b Specifies the locale setting of the country setting. This influences settings for numbering, currency and units of measure.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ACB_ASIANSUPPORT 70 Activates Asian languages support. You can now modify the corresponding Asian language settings in %PRODUCTNAME.
32 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_COMPLEX_LANG 3f Specifies the language for the complex text layout spell check.
33 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_USERINTERFACE ca Select the language used for the user interface, for example menus, dialogue boxes, help files. You must have installed at least one additional language pack or a multi-language version of %PRODUCTNAME.
32 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ACB_CURRENT_DOC 5a Specifies that the settings for default languages are valid only for the current document.
31 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ACB_CTLSUPPORT 7c Activates complex text layout support. You can now modify the settings corresponding to complex text layout in %PRODUCTNAME.
2e cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_CURRENCY 5c Specifies the default currency that is used for the currency format and the currency fields.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ALB_LANGUAGE 4e Specifies the language for which you want to define first and last characters.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_NO_COMP 30 Specifies that no compression at all will occur.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_CHAR_PUNCT 4d Specifies that kerning is applied to both western text and Asian punctuation.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ACB_STANDARD 75 When you mark Default, the following two text boxes are filled with the default characters for the selected language:
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_PUNCT_KANA_COMP 3c Specifies that punctuation and Japanese Kana are compressed.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3AED_START 51 Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the beginning of a line.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_PUNCT_COMP 32 Specifies that only the punctuation is compressed.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_CHAR_KERNING 37 Specifies that kerning is only applied to western text.
2e cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3AED_END 4b Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the end of a line.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_IGNORE_WHITESPACES 27 Specifies the characters to be ignored.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_IGNORE_MIDDLE_DOT 27 Specifies the characters to be ignored.
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_IAIYA 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
47 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_FULL_HALF_WIDTH 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
47 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_TSITHICHI_DHIZI 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_DIZI_DUZU 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
45 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_HYUFYU_BYUVYU 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
4a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_VARIANT_FORM_KANJI 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_IGNORE_PUNCTUATION 27 Specifies the characters to be ignored.
4b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_PROLONGED_SOUNDMARK 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
46 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_OLD_KANA_FORMS 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
49 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_HIRAGANA_KATAKANA 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_KIKU 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_BAVA_HAFA 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_CONTRACTIONS 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
42 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_SESHE_ZEJE 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
49 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_REPEAT_CHAR_MARKS 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
48 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_MINUS_DASH_CHOON 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_CASE 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_CTL%3ACB_SEQUENCECHECKING 3b Enables sequence input checking for languages such as Thai.
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_CTL%3ARB_MOVEMENT_VISUAL 9d Pressing the Right Arrow key moves the text cursor in the right-hand direction. Pressing the Left Arrow key moves the text cursor in the left-hand direction.
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_CTL%3ARB_MOVEMENT_LOGICAL b4 Pressing the Right Arrow key moves the text cursor towards the end of the current text. Pressing the Left Arrow key moves the text cursor towards the beginning of the current text.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_CTL%3ALB_NUMERALS ac Selects the type of numerals used within text, text in objects, fields, and controls, in all %PRODUCTNAME modules. Only cell contents of %PRODUCTNAME Calc are not affected.
3f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_CONNPOOLOPTIONS%3ACB_DRIVERPOOLING 74 Select a driver from the list and mark the Enable pooling for this driver check box in order to pool its connection.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_CONNPOOLOPTIONS%3ACB_POOL_CONNS 34 Specifies whether the chosen connections are pooled.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSBROWSER_DISCONNECTING 34 Specifies whether the chosen connections are pooled.
3d cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_CONNPOOLOPTIONS%3ANF_TIMEOUT 45 Defines the time in seconds after which a pooled connection is freed.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_DBREGISTER%3ABTN_EDIT 40 Opens the Database Link dialogue box to edit the selected entry.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_DBREGISTER%3ABTN_DELETE 29 Removes the selected entry from the list.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_DBREGISTER%3ABTN_NEW 3b Opens the Database Link dialogue box to create a new entry.
17 CUI_HID_DBPATH_CTL_PATH 67 Lists the registered name and database file of all registered databases. Double-click an entry to edit.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOCUMENTLINK%3APB_BROWSEFILE 44 Opens a file dialogue box in which you can select the database file.
27 cui%3AEdit%3ADLG_DOCUMENTLINK%3AET_NAME 52 Enter a name for the database. %PRODUCTNAME uses this name to access the database.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_JAVA%3APB_PARAMETER 2d Opens the Java Start Parameters dialogue box.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_JAVA%3APB_ADD 38 Add a path to the root folder of a JRE on your computer.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_JAVA%3APB_CLASSPATH 22 Opens the Class Path dialogue box.
19 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_JAVA_LIST b7 Select the JRE that you want to use. On some systems, you must wait a minute until the list gets populated. On some systems, you must restart %PRODUCTNAME to use your changed setting.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_JAVA%3ACB_JAVA_ENABLE 34 Allows you to run Java applications in %PRODUCTNAME.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_CLASSPATH%3APB_ADDPATH 35 Select a folder and add the folder to the class path.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_CLASSPATH%3ALB_PATH 3f Specifies the location of Java classes or Java class libraries.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_CLASSPATH%3APB_REMOVE_PATH 64 Select an archive or a folder in the list and click Remove to remove the object from the class path.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_CLASSPATH%3APB_ADDARCHIVE 4f Select an archive file in jar or zip format and add the file to the class path.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_PARAMETER%3APB_REMOVE 29 Deletes the selected JRE start parameter.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_PARAMETER%3APB_ASSIGN 31 Adds the current JRE start parameter to the list.
35 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_PARAMETER%3AED_PARAMETER 8e Enter a start parameter for a JRE as you would on a command line. Click Assign to add the parameter to the list of available start parameters.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_PARAMETER%3ALB_ASSIGNED 72 Lists the assigned JRE start parameters. To remove a start parameter, select the parameter, and then click Remove.
3a xmlsecurity%3ARadioButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_SECLEVEL%3ARB_LOW c5 A macro can be set to auto-start, and it can perform potentially damaging actions, as for example delete or rename files. This setting is not recommended when you open documents from other authors.
3d xmlsecurity%3ARadioButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_SECLEVEL%3ARB_MEDIUM e6 Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run. All other macros require your confirmation.
3f xmlsecurity%3ARadioButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_SECLEVEL%3ARB_VERYHIGH 7c Trusted file locations can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run.
3b xmlsecurity%3ARadioButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_SECLEVEL%3ARB_HIGH bf Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Only signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run.
4a xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3APB_REMOVE_TRUSTCERT 47 Removes the selected certificate from the list of trusted certificates.
48 xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3APB_VIEW_TRUSTCERT 45 Opens the View Certificate dialogue box for the selected certificate.
4d xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3AFL_REMOVE_TRUSTFILELOC 44 Removes the selected folder from the list of trusted file locations.
43 xmlsecurity%3AListBox%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3ALB_TRUSTFILELOC c4 Trusted file locations are used only if the security level is set to "very high". With this setting, document macros are only executed if they have been opened from one of the following locations.
4a xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3AFL_ADD_TRUSTFILELOC 64 Opens a folder selection dialogue box. Select a folder from which all macros are allowed to execute.
28 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_TRUSTSOURCES 1f Lists the trusted certificates.
2b sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3ANF_PORT 14 Enter the SMTP port.
33 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3APB_AUTHENTICATION 7b Opens the Server Authentication dialogue box in which you can specify the server authentication settings for secure e-mail.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3ACB_REPLYTO 64 Uses the e-mail address that you enter in the Reply address text box as the reply-to e-mail address.
23 SW_CHECKBOX_TP_MAILCONFIG_CB_SECURE 39 When available, uses a secure connection to send e-mails.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3APB_TEST 4a Opens the Test Account Settings dialogue box to test the current settings.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3AED_ADDRESS 26 Enter your e-mail address for replies.
2a sw%3AEdit%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3AED_DISPLAYNAME 10 Enter your name.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3AED_SERVER 1b Enter the SMTP server name.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3AED_REPLYTO 2c Enter the address to use for e-mail replies.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ARB_EVERYMONTH 27 A check will be performed once a month.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ACB_AUTOCHECK 82 Mark to check for online updates periodically, then select the time interval how often %PRODUCTNAME will check for online updates.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3APB_CHECKNOW 1e A check will be performed now.
3a cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ARB_EVERYDAY 25 A check will be performed once a day.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ARB_EVERYWEEK 43 A check will be performed once a week. This is the default setting.
33 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_SERVER 38 Enter the server name of your POP 3 or IMAP mail server.
46 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ARB_SEP_AUTHENTICATION 3d Select if your SMTP server requires a user name and password.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ARB_IMAP 32 Specifies that the incoming mail server uses IMAP.
39 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ANF_PORT 2a Enter the port on the POP3 or IMAP server.
3f sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ACB_AUTHENTICATION 43 Enables the authentication that is required to send e-mail by SMTP.
35 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_USERNAME 28 Enter the user name for the SMTP server.
38 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_OUTPASSWORD 25 Enter the password for the user name.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ARB_POP3 33 Specifies that the incoming mail server uses POP 3.
37 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_INUSERNAME 28 Enter the user name for the IMAP server.
37 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_INPASSWORD 13 Enter the password.
40 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ARB_SMPTAFTERPOP 50 Select if you are required to first read your e-mail before you can send e-mail.
3a sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_MM_TESTACCOUNTSETTINGS%3AED_ERROR 68 In the Errors list box you can read an explanation of any errors encountered while testing the settings.
21 SW_HID_MM_TESTACCOUNTSETTINGS_TLB 41 In the top list box you will see the results of the test session.
36 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_TESTACCOUNTSETTINGS%3APB_STOP 36 Click the Stop button to stop a test session manually.
2a XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_VIEWSIGNATURES 77 The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialogue box displays the location and the status of the certificate.
22 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_TP_CERTPATH 77 The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialogue box displays the location and the status of the certificate.
43 xmlsecurity%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_XMLSECTP_CERTPATH%3AML_CERTSTATUS 77 The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialogue box displays the location and the status of the certificate.
3f xmlsecurity%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_XMLSECTP_DETAILS%3AML_ELEMENT 45 Use the value list box to view values and copy them to the clipboard.
21 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_TP_DETAILS 6a The Details page of the View Certificate dialogue box displays detailed information about the certificate.
24 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_ELEMENTS 6a The Details page of the View Certificate dialogue box displays detailed information about the certificate.
21 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_TP_GENERAL 67 The General page of the View Certificate dialogue box displays basic information about the certificate.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_INSERT_ROW 28 Inserts a new row below the current row.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_SWAP_COL 3c Switches the current column with its neighbour to the right.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_INSERT_TEXT_COL 56 Inserts a new text column after the current column for hierarchical axes descriptions.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_DELETE_COL 5e Deletes the current series or text column. It is not possible to delete the first text column.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATA_SERIES_LABEL 20 Enter names for the data series.
12 .uno%3ADiagramData 4d Opens the Chart Data Table dialogue box in which you can edit the chart data.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_SWAP_ROW 32 Switches the current row with its neighbour below.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_DELETE_ROW 44 Deletes the current row. It is not possible to delete the label row.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_INSERT_COL 33 Inserts a new data series after the current column.
16 .uno%3AToggleAxisTitle 4e Click Axes Title On/Off on the Formatting bar to show or hide the axis labels.
12 .uno%3AToggleTitle 50 Click Title On/Off on the Formatting bar to show or hide the title and subtitle.
17 .uno%3AInsertMenuTitles 3e Opens a dialogue box to enter or modify the titles in a chart.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_LEFT 2e Positions the legend at the left of the chart.
17 .uno%3AInsertMenuLegend 8f Opens the Legend dialogue box, which allows you to change the position of legends in the chart, and to specify whether the legend is displayed.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_TOP 2d Positions the legend at the top of the chart.
34 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_LEGEND_POS%3ALB_LEGEND_TEXTDIR 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
13 .uno%3AToggleLegend 44 To show or hide a legend, click Legend On/Off on the Formatting bar.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_BOTTOM 30 Positions the legend at the bottom of the chart.
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_RIGHT 2f Positions the legend at the right of the chart.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_PLACEMENT 3d Selects the placement of data labels relative to the objects.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_PERCENT 3a Displays the percentage of the data points in each column.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_ROTATION_KNOB 42 Click in the dial to set the text orientation for the data labels.
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_NUMBER 30 Displays the absolute values of the data points.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_VALUE 30 Displays the absolute values of the data points.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_ROTATION_EDIT 3e Enter the counterclockwise rotation angle for the data labels.
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_SYMBOL 38 Displays the legend icons next to each data point label.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_PB_NUMBERFORMAT 31 Opens a dialogue box to select the number format.
1c CHART2_HID_SCH_TEXTDIRECTION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_PB_PERCENT_NUMBERFORMAT 35 Opens a dialogue box to select the percentage format.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuDataLabels 4d Opens the Data Labels dialogue box, which enables you to set the data labels.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_TEXT 21 Shows the data point text labels.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_SEPARATOR 48 Selects the separator between multiple text strings for the same object.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_XAXIS 30 Displays the x-axis as a line with subdivisions.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_YAXIS 30 Displays the y-axis as a line with subdivisions.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_ZAXIS 30 Displays the z-axis as a line with subdivisions.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_XAXIS 29 Displays a secondary x-axis in the chart.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_YAXIS 29 Displays a secondary y-axis in the chart.
15 .uno%3AInsertMenuAxes 30 Specifies the axes to be displayed in the chart.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_FUNCTION 2e Select a function to calculate the error bars.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SIGMA 52 Standard Deviation: Displays the standard deviation (square root of the variance).
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_CT_INDICATE 1e Specifies the error indicator.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NEGATIVE_VALUE 51 Enter the value to subtract from the displayed value as the negative error value.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_VARIANT 60 Variance: Displays the variance calculated from the number of data points and respective values.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_PERCENT 75 Displays a percentage. The display refers to the corresponding data point. Set the percentage in the Parameters area.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SHOW_NEGATIVE 1f Shows only negative error bars.
23 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_CONSTERROR 41 Displays constant values that you specify in the Parameters area.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SHOW_BOTH 27 Shows positive and negative error bars.
23 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_PLUS_VALUE 41 Displays constant values that you specify in the Parameters area.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SHOW_POSITIVE 1f Shows only positive error bars.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NEGATIVE_RANGE 7f Enter the address range from where to obtain the negative error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_RANGE 6d Click Cell Range and then specify a cell range from which to take the positive and negative error bar values.
2f CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_POSITIVE_RANGE_CHOOSER ab Click a button to shrink the dialogue box, then use the mouse to select the cell range in the spreadsheet. Click the button again to restore the dialogue box to full size.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_POSITIVE_RANGE 7f Enter the address range from where to obtain the positive error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_POSITIVE_VALUE 4a Enter the value to add to the displayed value as the positive error value.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_BIGERROR_VALUE 97 Error Margin: Displays the highest error margin in percent according to the highest value of the data group. Set the percentage in the Parameters area.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NO_ERROR 1d Does not show any error bars.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_PERCENT_VALUE 75 Displays a percentage. The display refers to the corresponding data point. Set the percentage in the Parameters area.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SAME_FOR_BOTH bf Enable to use the positive error values also as negative error values. You can only change the value of the "Positive (+)" box. That value gets copied to the "Negative (-)" box automatically.
24 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_FUNCTION_LB 2e Select a function to calculate the error bars.
2f CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NEGATIVE_RANGE_CHOOSER ab Click a button to shrink the dialogue box, then use the mouse to select the cell range in the spreadsheet. Click the button again to restore the dialogue box to full size.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_BIGERROR 97 Error Margin: Displays the highest error margin in percent according to the highest value of the data group. Set the percentage in the Parameters area.
24 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_MINUS_VALUE 41 Displays constant values that you specify in the Parameters area.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuYErrorBars 47 Use the y-Error Bars dialogue box to display error bars for 2-D charts.
1e .uno%3AInsertTrendlineEquation 91 To show the trend line equation, select the trend line in the chart, right-click to open the context menu, and choose Insert Trend Line Equation.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_LOGARITHMIC 22 A logarithmic trend line is shown.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_NONE 17 No trend line is shown.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_LINEAR 1d A linear trend line is shown.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_SHOW_EQUATION 35 Shows the trend line equation next to the trend line.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuTrendlines 50 Trend lines can be added to all 2-D chart types except for Pie and Stock charts.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_SHOW_R_SQUARED 3e Shows the coefficient of determination next to the trend line.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_POWER 1c A power trend line is shown.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_EXPONENTIAL 23 An exponential trend line is shown.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuMeanValues 8c Mean Value Lines are special trend lines that show the mean value. Use Insert - Mean Value Lines to insert mean value lines for data series.
31 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARB_DONT_PAINT 67 For a missing value, no data will be shown. This is the default for chart types Column, Bar, Line, Net.
32 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARBT_OPT_AXIS_2 89 Changes the scaling of the y-axis. This axis is only visible when at least one data series is assigned to it and the axis view is active.
2a chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTIONS%3AMT_GAP 33 Defines the spacing between the columns in percent.
2e chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTIONS%3AMT_OVERLAP 3b Defines the necessary settings for overlapping data series.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_STARTING_ANGLE_DIAL 154 Drag the small dot along the circle or click any position on the circle to set the starting angle of a pie or doughnut chart. The starting angle is the mathematical angle position where the first piece is drawn. The value of 90 degrees draws the first piece at the 12 o'clock position. A value of 0 degrees starts at the 3 o'clock position.
35 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ACB_BARS_SIDE_BY_SIDE 58 The bars from different data series are shown as if they were attached only to one axis.
34 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARB_CONTINUE_LINE 7a For a missing value, the interpolation from the neighbouring values will be shown. This is the default for chart type X-Y.
32 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_POLAROPTIONS%3ACB_CLOCKWISE af The default direction in which the pieces of a pie chart are ordered is counter-clockwise. Mark the Clockwise direction check box to draw the pieces in the opposite direction.
2d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ACB_CONNECTOR 8b For "stacked" and "percent" column (vertical bar) charts, mark this check box to connect the column layers that belong together with lines.
32 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARB_ASSUME_ZERO 60 For a missing value, the y-value will be shown as zero. This is the default for chart type Area.
32 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARBT_OPT_AXIS_1 54 This option is active as default. All data series are aligned to the primary y-axis.
38 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ACB_INCLUDE_HIDDEN_CELLS 5f Mark this check box to also show values of currently hidden cells within the source cell range.
3b chart2%3ANumericField%3ATP_POLAROPTIONS%3ANF_STARTING_ANGLE 74 Enter the starting angle in the range 0 to 359 degrees. You can also click the arrows to change the displayed value.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_ZGRID 40 Adds grid lines that subdivide the z-axis into smaller sections.
1b .uno%3AToggleGridHorizontal c4 The Horizontal Grid On/Off icon on the Formatting bar toggles the visibility of the grid display for the x-axis. Note: This only works if the Minor grid check boxes in Insert - Grids are unmarked.
19 .uno%3AToggleGridVertical c0 The Vertical Grid On/Off icon on the Formatting bar toggles the visibility of the grid display for the y-axis. Note: This only works if the x-Axis Minor grid is not selected in Insert - Grids.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_YGRID 40 Adds grid lines that subdivide the y-axis into smaller sections.
16 .uno%3AInsertMenuGrids ae You can divide the axes into sections by assigning grid lines to them. This allows you to get a better overview of the chart, especially if you are working with large charts.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_XGRID 40 Adds grid lines that subdivide the x-axis into smaller sections.
16 .uno%3AFormatSelection 1c Formats the selected object.
16 .uno%3ASecondaryYTitle 2e Modifies the properties of the selected title.
d .uno%3AZTitle 2e Modifies the properties of the selected title.
d .uno%3AXTitle 2e Modifies the properties of the selected title.
16 .uno%3ASecondaryXTitle 2e Modifies the properties of the selected title.
f .uno%3ASubTitle 2e Modifies the properties of the selected title.
10 .uno%3AMainTitle 2e Modifies the properties of the selected title.
d .uno%3AYTitle 57 Modifies the properties of the selected title or the properties of all titles together.
10 .uno%3AAllTitles 57 Modifies the properties of the selected title or the properties of all titles together.
25 CHART2_HID_SCH_TEXTDIRECTION_EQUATION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TEXTDIRECTION_TITLE 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
3d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ACB_AXIS_LABEL_TEXTOVERLAP 39 Specifies that the text in cells may overlap other cells.
3b chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ACB_AXIS_LABEL_TEXTBREAK 14 Allows a text break.
3b chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ARB_AXIS_LABEL_DOWNUP 41 Stagger numbers on the axes, odd numbers lower than even numbers.
3e chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ARB_AXIS_LABEL_AUTOORDER 2b Automatically arranges numbers on the axis.
32 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ALB_AXIS_TEXTDIR 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_ALIGNMENT_STACKED 33 Assigns vertical text orientation for cell content.
16 .uno%3AToggleAxisDescr 5d The AxesTitle On/Off icon on the Formatting bar switches the labelling of all axes on or off.
3b chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ARB_AXIS_LABEL_UPDOWN 42 Staggers numbers on the axis, even numbers lower than odd numbers.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_ALIGNMENT_DEGREES 33 Allows you to manually enter the orientation angle.
2c CHART2_LISTBOX_TP_AXIS_LABEL_LB_AXIS_TEXTDIR 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
3d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ACB_AXIS_LABEL_SCHOW_DESCR 32 Specifies whether to show or hide the axis labels.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_ALIGNMENT_CTR_DIAL 45 Clicking anywhere on the wheel defines the variable text orientation.
3f chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ARB_AXIS_LABEL_SIDEBYSIDE 2a Arranges numbers on the axis side by side.
d .uno%3ALegend 3f Defines the border, area and character attributes for a legend.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisB 98 Opens a dialogue box in which you can edit the properties of the secondary y-axis. To insert a secondary y-axis, choose Insert - Axes and select y-Axis.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisA 98 Opens a dialogue box in which you can edit the properties of the secondary x-axis. To insert a secondary x-axis, choose Insert - Axes and select x-Axis.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisZ 50 Opens a dialogue box, in which you can edit the properties of the selected axis.
15 .uno%3ADiagramAxisAll 50 Opens a dialogue box, in which you can edit the properties of the selected axis.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisX 50 Opens a dialogue box, in which you can edit the properties of the selected axis.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisY 41 Opens the y-Axis dialogue box to change properties of the y-axis.
38 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_REVERSE_MayBeDateAxis 80 Defines where the lower and where the higher values are displayed at the axis. The unmarked state is the mathematical direction.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_REVERSE%3AValueAxis 80 Defines where the lower and where the higher values are displayed at the axis. The unmarked state is the mathematical direction.
24 CHART2_SPINFIELD_TP_SCALE_EDT_ORIGIN 41 Specifies at which position to display the values along the axis.
2d chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_SCALE%3AEDT_STEP_MAIN 37 Defines the interval for the main division of the axes.
35 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_REVERSE%3ACategory 80 Defines where the lower and where the higher values are displayed at the axis. The unmarked state is the mathematical direction.
37 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_TIME_RESOLUTION 49 You must first unmark the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2d chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_SCALE%3AMT_STEPHELP 35 Defines the interval for the subdivision of the axes.
2f chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ALB_HELP_TIME_UNIT 4d Minor interval can be set to show a certain number of days, months, or years.
27 chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_SCALE%3AEDT_MIN 38 Defines the minimum value for the beginning of the axis.
31 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_STEP_HELP 49 You must first unmark the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2a chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_SCALE%3AEDT_ORIGIN 41 Specifies at which position to display the values along the axis.
27 chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_SCALE%3AEDT_MAX 32 Defines the maximum value for the end of the axis.
2f chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ALB_MAIN_TIME_UNIT 4d Major interval can be set to show a certain number of days, months, or years.
31 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_STEP_MAIN 49 You must first unmark the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2b chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_MIN 49 You must first unmark the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
30 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ALB_TIME_RESOLUTION 47 Resolution can be set to show days, months, or years as interval steps.
2b chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_MAX 49 You must first unmark the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2c chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_LOGARITHM 42 Specifies that you want the axis to be subdivided logarithmically.
28 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_SCALE_CBX_AUTO_ORIGIN 49 You must first unmark the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2e chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_ORIGIN 49 You must first unmark the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
33 chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_SCALE%3AMT_MAIN_DATE_STEP 4d Major interval can be set to show a certain number of days, months, or years.
2a chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ALB_AXIS_TYPE 6e For some types of axes, you can select to format an axis as text or date, or to detect the type automatically.
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_TICKS_INNER 3e Specifies that marks are placed on the inner side of the axis.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_TICKS_INNER 3e Specifies that marks are placed on the inner side of the axis.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_MINOR_INNER 4d Specifies that minor interval marks are placed on the inner side of the axis.
35 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ALB_PLACE_TICKS 4b Select where to place the marks: at labels, at axis, or at axis and labels.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_TICKS_OUTER 3e Specifies that marks are placed on the outer side of the axis.
39 CHART2_LISTBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_LB_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 5f Select where to cross the other axis: at start, at end, at a specified value, or at a category.
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_TICKS_OUTER 3e Specifies that marks are placed on the outer side of the axis.
42 chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3AEDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 40 Enter the value where the axis line should cross the other axis.
36 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ALB_PLACE_LABELS 63 Select where to place the labels: near axis, near axis (other side), outside start, or outside end.
2f CHART2_LISTBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_LB_PLACE_TICKS 4b Select where to place the marks: at labels, at axis, or at axis and labels.
30 CHART2_LISTBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_LB_PLACE_LABELS 63 Select where to place the labels: near axis, near axis (other side), outside start, or outside end.
3c CHART2_SPINFIELD_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_EDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 40 Enter the value where the axis line should cross the other axis.
44 CHART2_COMBOBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_EDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT_CATEGORY 44 Select the category where the axis line should cross the other axis.
4a chart2%3AComboBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3AEDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT_CATEGORY 44 Select the category where the axis line should cross the other axis.
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_MINOR_INNER 4d Specifies that minor interval marks are placed on the inner side of the axis.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_MINOR_OUTER 4d Specifies that minor interval marks are placed on the outer side of the axis.
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_MINOR_OUTER 4d Specifies that minor interval marks are placed on the outer side of the axis.
3f chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ALB_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 5f Select where to cross the other axis: at start, at end, at a specified value, or at a category.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridYHelp 39 Opens the Grid dialogue box for defining grid properties.
15 .uno%3ADiagramGridAll 39 Opens the Grid dialogue box for defining grid properties.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridZHelp 39 Opens the Grid dialogue box for defining grid properties.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridYMain 39 Opens the Grid dialogue box for defining grid properties.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridXHelp 39 Opens the Grid dialogue box for defining grid properties.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridXMain 39 Opens the Grid dialogue box for defining grid properties.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridZMain 39 Opens the Grid dialogue box for defining grid properties.
12 .uno%3ADiagramWall ab Opens the Chart Wall dialogue box, in which you can modify the properties of the chart wall. The chart wall is the "vertical" background behind the data area of the chart.
13 .uno%3ADiagramFloor bf Opens the Chart Floor dialogue box, in which you can modify the properties of the chart floor. The chart floor is the lower area in 3-D charts. This function is only available for 3-D charts.
12 .uno%3ADiagramArea 9f Opens the Chart Area dialogue box, in which you can modify the properties of the chart area. The chart area is the background behind all elements of the chart.
3b chart2%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SPLINE_PROPERTIES%3ARB_SPLINES_B 17 Apply a B-spline model.
3e chart2%3AMetricField%3ADLG_SPLINE_PROPERTIES%3AMF_SPLINE_ORDER 22 Set the degree of the polynomials.
43 chart2%3AMetricField%3ADLG_SPLINE_PROPERTIES%3AMF_SPLINE_RESOLUTION 13 Set the resolution.
3f chart2%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SPLINE_PROPERTIES%3ARB_SPLINES_CUBIC 1b Apply a cubic spline model.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_4 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3f chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_Y_ROTATION 57 Sets the rotation of the chart on the y-axis. The preview responds to the new settings.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_2 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_8 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3a chart2%3ACheckbox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ACB_ROUNDEDEDGE 18 Edges are rounded by 5%.
3f chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_X_ROTATION 57 Sets the rotation of the chart on the x-axis. The preview responds to the new settings.
42 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_AMBIENT_COLOR 2e Select a colour using the colour dialogue box.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_3 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_1 45 Click to enable or disable the specular light source with highlights.
3a chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ACB_OBJECTLINES 42 Shows borders around the areas by setting the line style to Solid.
40 chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_PERSPECTIVE bc Mark the Perspective box to view the chart as through a camera lens. Use the spin button to set the percentage. With a high percentage nearer objects look bigger than more distant objects.
3c chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ALB_AMBIENTLIGHT 26 Select a colour for the ambient light.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ACB_SHADING 3f Applies Gouraud shading if marked, or flat shading if unmarked.
d .uno%3AView3D a7 Opens a dialogue box to edit the properties of a three dimensional view for Column, Bar, Pie, and Area charts. For Line and X-Y (Scatter) charts you can see 3-D lines.
3f chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_Z_ROTATION 57 Sets the rotation of the chart on the z-axis. The preview responds to the new settings.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_5 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_6 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_7 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
39 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3ACBX_PERSPECTIVE bc Mark the Perspective box to view the chart as through a camera lens. Use the spin button to set the percentage. With a high percentage nearer objects look bigger than more distant objects.
34 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ALB_SCHEME 48 Select a scheme from the list box, or mark any of the check boxes below.
3f chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3ACBX_RIGHT_ANGLED_AXES 106 If Right-angled axes is enabled, you can rotate the chart contents only in x- and y-direction, that is, parallel to the chart borders. Right-angled axes is enabled by default for newly created 3-D charts. Pie and Doughnut charts do not support right-angled axes.
46 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHTSOURCE_COLOR 2e Select a colour using the colour dialogue box.
3b chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ALB_LIGHTSOURCE 2e Select a colour for the selected light source.
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_SHOW 20 Displays a legend in your chart.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_TOP 2d Positions the legend to the top of the chart.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_SECONDARY_Y 71 Enter a label for the secondary y-axis. This option is only available for charts that support a secondary y-axis.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_ZGRID 75 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts.
16 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_Z 59 Enter a label for the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_LEFT 2e Positions the legend to the left of the chart.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_YGRID 39 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the y-axis.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_XGRID 39 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the x-axis.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_BOTTOM 30 Positions the legend to the bottom of the chart.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_SECONDARY_X 71 Enter a label for the secondary x-axis. This option is only available for charts that support a secondary x-axis.
16 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_Y 28 Enter a label for the y-axis (vertical).
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_RIGHT 2f Positions the legend to the right of the chart.
16 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_X 2a Enter a label for the x-axis (horizontal).
19 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_MAIN 1d Enter a title for your chart.
18 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_SUB 20 Enter a subtitle for your chart.
12 .uno%3ADiagramType 22 Opens the Chart Type dialogue box.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_WIZARD_ROADMAP 25 Click to go to the named wizard page.
2e chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ALB_3D_SCHEME 1c Select the type of 3-D look.
38 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ARB_STACK_Y_PERCENT 27 Stack series display values as percent.
34 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ACB_XVALUE_SORTING 6b Connects points by ascending x-values, even if the order of values is different, in an X-Y scatter diagram.
2d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ACB_SPLINES 1e The lines are shown as curves.
1b CHART2_HID_SCH_NUM_OF_LINES 3b Set the number of lines for the Column and Line chart type.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CTL_TYPE 1a Select a basic chart type.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_LB_BAR_GEOMETRY 1d Select a shape from the list.
30 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ARB_STACK_Y 31 Stack series display values on top of each other.
2d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ACB_STACKED 28 Displays stacked series for Line charts.
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_CTL_VARIANT 2a Select a sub-type of the basic chart type.
2d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ACB_3D_LOOK 27 Enables a 3-D look for the data values.
35 chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3APB_SPLINE_DIALOG 31 Opens a dialogue box to set the curve properties.
34 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ARB_DATACOLS df Data series obtain their data from consecutive columns in the selected range. For scatter charts, the first data column will contain x-values for all series. All other data columns are used as y-values, one for each series.
2a chart2%3AEdit%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3AED_RANGE a7 Enter the data range that you want to include in your chart. To minimise this dialogue box while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
34 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ARB_DATAROWS db Data series obtain their data from consecutive rows in the selected range. For scatter charts, the first data series will contain x-values for all series. All other data series are used as y-values, one for each series.
3b chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ACB_FIRST_ROW_ASLABELS 10b For data series in columns: The first row in the range is used as names for data series. For data series in rows: The first row in the range is used as categories. The remaining rows comprise the data series. If this check box is not marked, all rows are data series.
3e chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ACB_FIRST_COLUMN_ASLABELS 119 For data series in columns: The first column in the range is used as names for data series. For data series in rows: The first column in the range is used as categories. The remaining columns comprise the data columns. If this check box is not marked, all columns are data columns.
31 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3AIB_RANGE a7 Enter the data range that you want to include in your chart. To minimise this dialogue box while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
11 .uno%3ADataRanges 54 Opens the Data Ranges dialogue box in which you can edit Data Range and Data Series.
35 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AIMB_RANGE_CAT 157 Shows the source range address of the categories (the text strings that you can see on the x-axis of a category chart). For an X-Y chart, the text box contains the source range of the data labels which are displayed for the data points. To minimise this dialogue box while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
2f chart2%3AEdit%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AEDT_CATEGORIES 157 Shows the source range address of the categories (the text strings that you can see on the x-axis of a category chart). For an X-Y chart, the text box contains the source range of the data labels which are displayed for the data points. To minimise this dialogue box while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
2a chart2%3AEdit%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AEDT_RANGE 105 Shows the source range address from the second column of the Data Range list box. You can change the range in the text box or by dragging in the document. To minimise this dialogue box while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
2e chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_ADD 88 Adds a new entry below the current entry in the Data Series list. If an entry is selected, the new data series gets the same chart type.
2f chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_DOWN 36 Moves down the selected entry in the Data Series list.
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_DATA_RANGES_LIST a1 Shows all the data ranges used by the data series that is selected in the Data Series list box. Each data range shows the role name and the source range address.
31 chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_REMOVE 35 Removes the selected entry from the Data Series list.
36 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AIMB_RANGE_MAIN 105 Shows the source range address from the second column of the Data Range list box. You can change the range in the text box or by dragging in the document. To minimise this dialogue box while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
2d chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_UP 34 Moves up the selected entry in the Data Series list.
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_SERIES_LIST a8 Shows a list of all data series in the chart. Click an entry to view and edit that data series. Click Add to insert a new series into the list after the selected entry.
11 .uno%3ADataInRows 2a Changes the arrangement of the chart data.
14 .uno%3ADataInColumns 2a Changes the arrangement of the chart data.
10 .uno%3AScaleText 45 Rescales the text in the chart when you change the size of the chart.
15 .uno%3ANewArrangement b6 Moves all chart elements to their default positions inside the current chart. This function does not alter the chart type or any other attributes other than the position of elements.
12 .uno%3AContextType 2c Displays the name of the current chart type.
19 .uno%3AResetAllDataPoints 29 Resets all data points to default format.
11 .uno%3ADeleteAxis 1a Deletes the selected axis.
17 .uno%3AFormatDataSeries 18 Formats the data series.
17 .uno%3AFormatYErrorBars 19 Formats the y-error bars.
11 .uno%3AFormatAxis 1a Formats the selected axis.
12 .uno%3AFormatTitle 1b Formats the selected title.
16 .uno%3AInsertMinorGrid 15 Inserts a minor grid.
1e .uno%3AFormatTrendlineEquation 1f Formats the trendline equation.
10 .uno%3ADrawChart 10b Creates a chart in the current document. To use a continuous range of cells as the data source for your chart, click inside the cell range, and then choose this command. Alternatively, select some cells and choose this command to create a chart of the selected cells.
11 .uno%3AInsertAxis 27 Opens a dialogue box to insert an axis.
12 .uno%3AFormatFloor 18 Formats the chart floor.
16 .uno%3AFormatStockLoss 22 Formats the stock loss indicators.
13 SW_HID_INSERT_CHART 10b Creates a chart in the current document. To use a continuous range of cells as the data source for your chart, click inside the cell range, and then choose this command. Alternatively, select some cells and choose this command to create a chart of the selected cells.
16 .uno%3AStarChartDialog 10b Creates a chart in the current document. To use a continuous range of cells as the data source for your chart, click inside the cell range, and then choose this command. Alternatively, select some cells and choose this command to create a chart of the selected cells.
16 .uno%3AFormatTrendline 16 Formats the trendline.
16 .uno%3AFormatMeanValue 1c Formats the mean value line.
14 .uno%3AInsertR2Value 33 Inserts the coefficient of determination R² value.
16 .uno%3AFormatDataPoint 20 Formats the selected data point.
16 .uno%3AFormatMinorGrid 17 Formats the minor grid.
15 .uno%3AResetDataPoint 31 Resets the selected data point to default format.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMeanValue 1c Deletes the mean value line.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMajorGrid 17 Deletes the major grid.
13 .uno%3AFormatLegend 19 Formats the chart legend.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMinorGrid 17 Deletes the minor grid.
16 .uno%3AInsertAxisTitle 2d Opens a dialogue box to insert an axis title.
16 .uno%3AFormatChartArea 17 Formats the chart area.
18 .uno%3AInsertObjectChart 10b Creates a chart in the current document. To use a continuous range of cells as the data source for your chart, click inside the cell range, and then choose this command. Alternatively, select some cells and choose this command to create a chart of the selected cells.
16 .uno%3AInsertMajorGrid 15 Inserts a major grid.
17 .uno%3AInsertRemoveAxes 2e Opens a dialogue box to insert or delete axes.
17 .uno%3ADeleteDataLabels 18 Deletes all data labels.
13 .uno%3ADeleteLegend 19 Deletes the chart legend.
17 .uno%3AInsertDataLabels 14 Inserts data labels.
13 .uno%3AInsertTitles 2c Opens a dialogue box to insert chart titles.
11 .uno%3AFormatWall 17 Formats the chart wall.
16 .uno%3AFormatStockGain 22 Formats the stock gain indicators.
16 .uno%3AFormatDataLabel 20 Formats the selected data label.
16 .uno%3ADeleteDataLabel 20 Deletes the selected data label.
1e .uno%3ADeleteTrendlineEquation 1f Deletes the trendline equation.
14 .uno%3ADeleteR2Value 16 Deletes the R² value.
17 .uno%3AFormatDataLabels 18 Formats the data labels.
17 .uno%3ADeleteYErrorBars 19 Deletes the y-error bars.
16 .uno%3AInsertDataLabel 1c Inserts a single data label.
23 .uno%3AInsertTrendlineEquationAndR2 48 Inserts the trendline equation and the coefficient of determination R².
16 .uno%3AFormatMajorGrid 17 Formats the major grid.
1b .uno%3AChartElementSelector bf Select the element from the chart that you want to format. The element gets selected in the chart preview. Click Format Selection to open the properties dialogue box for the selected element.